Senographe DMR SM

Technical
Publications
2308529–100
Revision 0
SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P)

DMR V1 upgraded with kit 2307541 or
kit 2307544
sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 2001 GE Medical Systems

ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS À RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX À LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un danger
lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.
Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cet
appareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles–mêmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de
protection établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 26 : Recommandations de la Commission
Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.
WARNING
X–RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR
UNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x–ray beam becomes a source of
danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x–radiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing
themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the Interna-
tional Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 26 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.
ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR
CUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado
por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas
utilicen este aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre las
normas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 26: Recomendaciónes de la Comi-
sión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.
ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FÜR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,
WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbe-
fugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Orga-
nismus schädlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche
Geräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den ge-
fahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 26 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut
machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P)
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1–1 Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1–2 Inspection for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 2 – DESCRIPTION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 3 – HOW TO USE THE CONSOLE IN INSTALLATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3–2 Application and Installation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3–3 Description of the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
3–4 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
3–5 Installation Menu Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
3–6 Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
3–7 Saved Parameters and Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
3–8 Re–loading of Default (Initial) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
3–9 Returning to the Application Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
3–10 Generator Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
3–10–1 Gantry Present/Absent (PRS_A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
3–10–2 Display of Parameters Following an Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
3–10–3 Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
3–10–4 Visual Representation of Numerical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
3–10–5 Visual Display of Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
3–10–6 Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
3–10–7 Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
3–11 Principles of Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–1 Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–2 Use of the First Trigger/Second Trigger Buttons During Generator Installation . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–3 Inhibit Conditions Due to Gantry Absence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–4 Inhibit Conditions Due to Grid Absence/Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
3–11–5 Displayed Messages During Exposure–Producing Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
3–11–6 Other Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
SECTION 4 – SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
SECTION 5 – INSTALLATION STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32
i
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
2 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 2 – GENERATOR CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 3 – GANTRY CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 4 – AEC CALIBRATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SECTION 5 – AEC CALIBRATION ON STEREOTIX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SECTION 6 – RE–CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY IN
NON–STEREOTIX 2 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SECTION 7 – CUSTOMER REQUESTED RE–CALIBRATION OF STEREOTIX 2 MODE
REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
3 JOB CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

JOB CARD IST 001 – CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . 3–3
JOB CARD IST 002 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE
SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
JOB CARD IST 003 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
JOB CARD IST 004 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT
AND SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
JOB CARD IST 005 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION
OF ITS VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
JOB CARD IST 006 – SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
JOB CARD IST 007 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A GIVEN SCREEN
PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
JOB CARD IST 008 – UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
JOB CARD IST 009 – PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
JOB CARD IST 010 – WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57
JOB CARD IST 011 – CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–71
JOB CARD IST 012 – LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79
JOB CARD IST 013 – CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE
COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83
JOB CARD IST 014 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–93
JOB CARD IST 015 – MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A GIVEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . 3–101
JOB CARD IST 016 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . 3–107
JOB CARD IST 017 – CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–111
JOB CARD IST 018 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS . . . 3–117
JOB CARD IST 019 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2
MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–123
JOB CARD IST 020 – AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–131
ii
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
JOB CARD IST 021 – CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING

OF X–RAY BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–133
JOB CARD IST 022 – CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–139
JOB CARD IST 023 – CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . 3–143
JOB CARD IST 024 – MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS . . . 3–145
JOB CARD IST 025 – CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . 3–149
JOB CARD IST 026 – CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–153
JOB CARD IST 027 – CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–155
JOB CARD IST 027 B – CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY FOR NON
MOTORIZED FROM BLADE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
JOB CARD IST 028 – ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT COLLIMATOR BLADE POSITION . . . . 3–183
JOB CARD IST 029 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . 3–191
JOB CARD IST 030 – CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,
COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195
JOB CARD IST 031 – TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM . . . . . . 3–199
JOB CARD IST 032 – REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS
AND PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–203
JOB CARD IST 033 – PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING . . . . . . . . . 3–207
JOB CARD IST 034 – CHECKING SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING . . . . . . . . 3–213
JOB CARD IST 035 – REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
(NEW VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–217
JOB CARD IST 035 B – REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
(OLD VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–221
JOB CARD IST 036 – ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–225
JOB CARD IST 037 – JUMPERS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–235
JOB CARD IST 038 – SAFETY LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–237
JOB CARD IST 039 – MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRATEGY FOR A
GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–241
JOB CARD IST 040 – SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–245
JOB CARD IST 041 – GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–249
JOB CARD IST 043 – DMR INSTALLATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–257
JOB CARD IST 044 – SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–271
JOB CARD IST 045 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOW–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–273
JOB CARD IST 046 – CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–277
JOB CARD IST 047 – CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–283
JOB CARD IST 048 – CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–287
JOB CARD IST 050 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–291
JOB CARD IST 051 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR MAGNIFICATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–293
iii
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER TITLE PAGE
4 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

SECTION 1 – ERROR CODE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
SECTION 2 – ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
SECTION 3 – ERROR CODES: KNOWN ROOT CAUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
5 SIGNAL LISTS/GLOSSARIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–I
6 RENEWAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–I
iv
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
REVISION HISTORY

)%' '() ) %$ % '( %$ , ) %""%, $ *&'(
)' ! )
'&"#$) % ) )* - )* $
*&' % ) (%),' )% +
%' ! )
*&' % ) (%),' )% + %$"-
%),' + &'%+ ( ) *(' , ) ) %&&%')*$ )- )% $'( ) -
" ,
)* #- $ )% %# %#&" $) '' $ )*
%*)&*) $ (-()# '(%"*) %$
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER
Title page 0
i through vi 0
1–1 through 1–46 0
2–1 through 2–4 0
3–1 through 3–294 0
4–1 through 4–20 0
5–i & 5–ii 0
5–1 through 5–54 0
6–i & 6–ii 0
6–1 through 6–78 0
v
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
vi
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER 1 – INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1–1 Chapter Overview
This chapter presents the Senographe DMR installation procedures. The wiring and room
layout requirements for the product are covered in the Pre–Installation Manual.
1–2 Inspection for Damage
The Senographe DMR was completely inspected for proper operation and appearance before
shipment. However, it is necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received.
Visually inspect the packages for any apparent damage. If there are signs of damage, refer the
matter to the shipping company immediately.
Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on
the list are present in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.
SECTION 2
DESCRIPTION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT
D See the Pre-installation Manual for a description of the delivered equipment.

SECTION 3
HOW TO USE THE CONSOLE IN INSTALLATION MODE
3–1 Introduction
This section describes how to use the Senographe DMR console during installation.
3–2 Application and Installation modes
Throughout the Senographe DMR documentation, reference is made to the application mode
and to the installation mode to differentiate between normal operation of the product by a
doctor and operation of the product during installation.
Each time the Senographe DMR is turned on the software automatically starts up in
application mode.
For information on using the Senographe DMR in application mode, refer to the Operator
Manual.
Two major Senographe DMR components must be installed – the generator and the gantry.
Therefore, there are two separate installation phases, one for the generator and one for the
gantry (see Section 3–4).
1–1
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–3 Description of the Console

INSTALLATION
Illustration 1–1 shows the Senographe DMR console. When the Senographe DMR is in
application mode, the six keys below the display window correspond to the functions that
their respective symbol markings indicate (focal spot, track, filter, etc. – refer to the Operator
Manual for explicit details).
On the other hand, when the Senographe DMR is in installation mode, the function of each of
these six keys depends on the procedure being performed and is displayed on the bottom line
of the display window adjacent to the corresponding key.
To enter installation mode, press the SETUP key once. To return immediately to
application mode, press the SETUP key again.
Illustration 1–3 shows the console before and after entry to the installation mode.
Section 1 of this illustration shows a typical console display during normal application mode
use.
Section 2 shows the appearance of the display window when, having started from application
mode, the SETUP key is pressed for the first time.
Section 4 shows the appearance of the display window when the password has already been
entered once, and starting from application mode, the SETUP key is pressed.
1–2
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 1–1
SENOGRAPHE DMR CONSOLE
INSTALLATION
1–3
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–4 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console
INSTALLATION
Menu access paths: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL OR SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
To access the generator or gantry installation mode starting from application mode, follow
this sequence:
1. Press the SETUP key .
2. For access to the generator and gantry installation menus, change the position of the
installation menu enable switch (switch B1–8 on generator CPUboard 400–PL3) from
its position prior to power-up to the opposite position (see Illustration 1–2).
The installation menus can also be accessed by password. Select the PASSWORD key,
enter your password (given at the training course) (see Illustration 1–3, Section 3).
3. Select the sub–assembly to be installed (GENE or ARM for generator or gantry,

respectively).
4. For the gantry ONLY, press the VALID key.
5. Select the INSTAL menu.
Note: The MAINTENANCE menu is not accessible during installation of the Senographe
DMR.
6. You now have access to the installation menus of the sub–assembly selected (generator
or gantry).
Note: The position of the installation menu enable switch is memorized each time the
Senographe DMR is turned on. Until the machine is again turned off (or the default
parameters are re–loaded via the generator’s CLEAR menu, see Section 3–8), this
memorized position is the installation-menu-access-disabled position, and the opposite
position is the installation-menu-access-enabled position. The significance of the
switch’s position thus depends upon its position at power–up.
When you have finished using the Senographe DMR installation mode, you must
CAUTION turn off the Senographe DMR before handing over the machine to the user. In this
way, when the machine is turned on again, access to the installation mode will be
automatically locked out (see Note above).
Illustration 1–3 shows the sequence for accessing generator installation mode.
1–4
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 1–2
LOCATION OF INSTALLATION MENU ENABLE SWITCH
INSTALLATION
GENE CPU BOARD 400–PL3
B1
?
P1 P2
1–5
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 1–3
SEQUENCE FOR ENTERING GENERATOR INSTALLATION MODE
INSTALLATION
1
APPLICATION
SETUP
SMALL AUTO AUTO +0 A
Nb of exposures
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
VIEW MEDICAL LANGUAGE PASSWD
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
1–6
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
INSTALLATION
APPLICATION
SETUP
Nb of exposures
ENTER YOUR PASSWORD:
1 2 3 4 5 6
PASSWORD
4
APPLICATION
SETUP
Nb of exposures
GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM CLINIC
GENE ARM
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1–7
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
5
INSTALLATION
APPLICATION
SETUP
GEMS-E VX.XX GEN DD.MM.YY
INSTAL MAINT
GENE ARM
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ INSTAL
6
APPLICATION
SETUP
LAST INSTAL (D/M/Y H:M) 28/03/96 10:24
CKSUM GENE
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ GENE ARM
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ INSTAL
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
CKSUM GENE
1–8
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–5 Installation Menu Tree Structure
INSTALLATION
The various installation menus are accessible via a tree structure which is shown in
Illustrations 1-5 through 1–13.
1–9
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
INSTALLATION
1–10
L These selections appear only when
the password has been entered.
Select arm/gene install
GENE L MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM L PASSWORD
Enter your password

1 2 3 4 5 6
tion steering step

–xi
ET–UP Select LANGUAGE ARM ACCESS
ORCE DECOMP BEEP HEIGHT FILM FRANC ENGL DEUTS ESPAN ITALI PORTU VALID
WITH BEEP GEMS-E (Arm soft version) ARM (release date)

CASSETTE DETECTION NO
YES NO YES NO INSTAL MAINT
ue) END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP

YES NO
DECOMPRESSION HEIGHT : xx cm
+ – VALID
A
see illustration 1-12
PADDLE PARAMETERS
18 24 24 30 MAGNIF STEREO
A
18 24 PARAM display (2 values)
see illustration 1–12 Same menu
LAST CALIB (D/M/Y H:M) CHANGE
structure
CKSUM GENE as 18 24
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
18 24 PARAM CHANGE offs= (values)
CONFIG GENE AOP DOSE PROD
NEXT VALID
THIS MENU IS THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRO-

GENERATOR CONFIGURATION OF NO USE TO
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
DUCTION TEST PROCEDURES
THE SERVICE THAT ARE OF NO USE TO THE
CONFIG DISP DATE IMAGE EVOLUTION ENGINEER. SERVICE ENGINEER.
FILM DIGITAL PADD
Not used for DMR
installation steering step 13.–a. G

section 3–10–2 TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas Not applicable
TION EXPOSURE PARAM DISPLAY GENERATOR EVOLUTION for DMR
AX PRES. T_MAX RINIT YES NO 300PL3
RE–INITIALIZING THE TUBE
WARNING
WILL ENTAIL RE–CALIBRATING
THE TUBE HEATER CURRENT.
USE THE FUNCTION ONLY WHEN
YOU HAVE REPLACED THE X–
B C
RAY TUBE.
section 3–10–3
RE–INITIALISATION DATE and TIME UPDATE WITH THE BOARD 300PL3
INIT_TUBE INIT_ENERGY DAY HOUR YES NO FILM (AOP)
CELL ALGO COPY TYPE
s=(value) MAX EXPOSURE TIME T(s)=(value)

DATE DD/MM/YY (values) TIME HH:MN:SS (values)
NEXT VALID
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
E
B–SYSTEMS PRESENCE TUBE RE–INITIALISATION
PRS–DS PRS–IDC VALID
RESET TUBE ENERGY (Reset done)
NCE
O
DIGITAL STATION PRESENCE
YES NO
IMAGE DETECTOR CTRL PRES.
YES NO
VALID
D
1–12
C
Job Card IST 001
TUBE CTubH WarmUp

Job Card IST 020 HTR_SCL HARDWARE CALIB
TRACK1 TRACK2
WARNING
Same menu
THE TWO MENUS CTUBE AND CTUBH ARE
TUBE WARM–UP x/y kV structure as
NOT INTENDED FOR SERVICE USE. for TRACK1
HTR_SCL HARDWARE TRACK 1
CALIB PARAM
HTR_DELTA Parameters HTR_SCL HARDWARE TRACK 1 PARAM HTR_SCL track 1 x=(2 values)
LF/MO SF/MO LF/RH SF/RH 1st pt 2nd pt calcul CHANGE
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN

ALIB HEATER: SF/Rh CALIB BOTH FILAMENT CURRENT VALUES HAVE
BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE
M CALIB PARAM Same menu 1ST PT AND 2ND PT MENUS.
structure as
Same menu for 1st pt
structure as PARAM HTR_SCL modif track 1 x=(value)
for LF/MO VALID
NEXT VALID
nu
as
MO LF/Mo HTR_DELTA display DEL_x=(3 values) HTR_SCL CALIB TRACK1 PT1 ref=(value)
CMDE CALIB Measi THE MENU ICH_M, WHICH IS USED TO ENTER
THE MEASURED FILAMENT CURRENT VALUE
FOUND IN THE CALIB MENU, IS ONLY ACCESSI-
BLE AFTER USE OF THE CALIB MENU.
es kV/A)
HTR_SCL TRACK1 PT1 modif ref=(value) HTR_SCL TRACK1 1st point meas=(value)
lue) (value)
mA MEASUREMENT
B CALIB PARAM
Job Card IST 002

Job Card IST 017 mA MEASURE CALIBRATION
kV CALIBRATION CALIB I_MEAS CALCUL
CALIB PARAM
L BIAS VOLTAGE
B PARAM VOLTAGE
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN X–
kV PARAMETERS x=(2 values) RAY TUBE CURRENT HAS BEEN MEASURED
AND ENTERED VIA THE ”CALIB” AND
”I_MEAS” MENUS.
MODIF
ALIB
mA MEASUREMENT CALC
cul FOCAL BIAS VOLT display x=(2 values)
VALID
MODIF PARAM kV MODIF x=(value)
NEXT VALID MEASURED CURRENT meas=(value)
NEXT VALID
FOCAL BIAS VOLT modif x=(value)

NEXT VALID
kV CALIBRATION mA MEASURE CALIBRATION meas=x mA
1st pt 2nd pt calcul MEASUR
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN
BOTH FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUES HAVE BOTH HV VALUES HAVE BEEN MEASURED
BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE AND ENTERED VIA THE ”1ST PT” AND ”2ND PRESSING THE ”MEASUR” KEY UP-
”1ST PT” AND ”2ND PT” MENUS. PT” MENUS. DATES THE DISPLAYED VALUE OF
Same menu THE THEORETICAL MEASURED X–
BIAS VOLT calcul structure as RAY TUBE CURRENT VALUE
for 1st pt
VALID
mA MEASUREMENT PARAMETER f/mA=(value)
CHANGE
FOCAL BIAS VOLT Display Focus/Track kV CALIB 1st point ref=(value) kV
WHEN
HAS CHANGE
ENU. REF CALIB kV_M mA MEAS PARAM MODIF f/mA=(value)
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID

1ST PT KV VALUE HAS BEEN MEASURED
VIA THE ”CALIB” MENU.
AL BIAS VOLTAGE modif x/y (value) kV REFERENCE 1st point ref=(value) kV kV CALIB 1st point MEASURED kV 1st meas=(value)
XT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
1–14
Job Card IST 007
PARAMETERS DUPLICATION (fsc) (screen) –> (fsc) (screen)

SOURCE TARG COPY
CELL CALIBRATION
HV/DAC PM/HV STER
E
Job Card IST 004 SOURCE CHOICE(fsc)/(scr/nscr) TARGET CHOICE (fsc)/(scr/nscr) ENABLE COPY
ALIBRATION Job Card IST 005 SCREEN FSC SCREEN FSC VALID
/DAC PM/PM_HV calibration

CALIB PARAM
_HV/DAC Calibration Job Card IST 018
LIB PARAM SCREEN PRESENT (yes/no) SCREEN PRESENT (yes/no)
PM/PM_HV PARAM display x=(3 values) YES NO YES NO
PM/PM–HV calibration CHANGE

SOURCE FSC CHOICE FSC=(fsc) TARGET FSC CHOICE FSC=(fsc)
ation
FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E
PM/PM_HV PARAM change x=(value)

NEXT VALID
_HV/DAC PARAM display x=(2 values) STEREOTIX CELL calib grid present/absent
HANGE CALIB PARAM
_HV/DAC PARAM change x=(value) STEREOTIX CELL calib STEREOTIX PARAM display x=(4 values)
EXT VALID CELL CALIB CALC CHANGE
STEREOTIX PARAM change x=(value)

Cell Selection STEREOTIX CELL calib
NEXT VALID
NORMAL LEFT CENT RIGHT
STEREOTIX CELL calib calc

VALID
FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E
D D STATUS: (VALUE)
A B C
Same menu
structure
as FSC=A
AEC/AOP CALIBRATION FSC=(fsc)
VALID NAME TYPE STRAT CALIB
Card IST 006

ALGORITHM CALIBRATION
Job Card IST 006
PM_yld LNRT Energ Corr
FILM STRATEGY
SLOW FAST V_SLOW V_FAST S_FAST
Job Cards IST 014 and IST 019

Job Card IST 007 REFERENCE ENERGY
CALIB PARAM CONFIG
F
REF_ENERGY CALIBRATION mAs=(value)
mAs CALIB OD_MS CALC CELL MODE SELECTION
F REF_ENERGY PARAM menu
GAMMA ENR_R OD_R SCALE D_STEP
NORMAL STEREO
REF ENERGY calculation for Stereotix 2 mode

REF ENERGY CALIBRATION VALID
REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_x=(7 values)
REFERENCE ENERGY display ENERG=(value) CHANGE
Measured density OD=(value)
CHANGE
NEXT VALID
THE VALUE OF ENERG IS

CALCULATED DURING THE
h Rh/Al Rh/Rh WARNING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE REFERENCE ENERGY change OD_x=(value)
AND MUST NEVER BE MODI-
FIED MANUALLY FOR ANY NEXT VALID
REASON WHATSOEVER.
AM display x=(6 values) mAs Selection mAs=(value)
E NEXT VALID REFERENCE ENERGY display GAMMA=(value) REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_r=(value)
CHANGE CHANGE
Same menu
M change x=(value) structure as
THE VALUE OF GAMMA IS for OD_R
WARNING CALCULATED DURING THE REFERENCE ENERGY change OD_r=(value)
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
AND MUST NEVER BE MODI- NEXT VALID
FIED MANUALLY FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER.
1–16
E E
Job Card IST 015
MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION
Job Card IST 013 CALIB PARAM
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE fsc name
HEATER REFEN LNRT PARAM
LNRT PARAM display x=(3 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. Config:contact/magnify

MAGNIF. PARAM display x=(2 values)
CHANGE CONFIG CALIB CALC
CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT CHANGE
OD_ref SCALE MAS CALIB
LNRT PARAM change x=(value) MAGNIFICATION CALIB calc
NEXT VALID VALID
MAGNIF. PARAM change x=(value)
NEXT VALID
CONTACT CONFIGURATION
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE THICK.=x cm YES NO
CALIB OD_mea CALC
x=(7 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. x cm
THICK CALIB
RECIPROCITY FAIL.:calc
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE
VALID
(value) Select plexi thickness MAGNIFICATION CALIB.
2 CM 4 CM 6 CM
MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY=(value)
NEXT VALID
CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT mAs=(value)

As=(value) CALIB OD_mea CALC
CALIB REF. ENERGY calc

s=(value) VALID
CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT
MEASURED DENSITY OD=(value)
NEXT VALID
VALID
THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION
TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE
5001 TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER.
GEMS-E (gen soft version) STA (release date)
INSTAL
5200
LAST CALIB (D/M/Y H:M) (date value) (time value) ROT. SENSOR PRESENCE
CKSUM TEST CALIB CONFIG ENDUR DMT YES NO
5220 5230
5250
TALLATION TESTS ARM CONFIGURATION
ARM CALIBRATION
TRENGTH CUTOFF TUBE COLLIM CASSET BUCKY CAMERA ANGLE
THICK COMP FORMAT GRID HOUSING ANGLE
09999
Not used CAMERA FORMAT
5290
6x6 8x8
GTH
5227
CALIB PARAM
G 5446
POWER CUTOFF TEST 18x24 / 24x30 HEIGHT DIFF.: NO
VALID Job Card IST 029 5310 YES NO
TUBE HOUSING ANGULATION
5445
MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION
PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE
HE SERVICE ENGINEER.
G H J K CALIB PARAM
CASSETTE DETECT PRESENCE
YES NO
5311 5232
HOUSING ANGULATION CALIB COLLIMATOR CONFIGURATION
EXPOSE MEASURE S.I.D Calcul FRONT_B TYPE MARG_L MARG_R MARG_F
5314
HOUSING ANGULATION PARAM
A–REF Same menu
structure as
MARG_L
5312 5313 5315 Job Card IST 027 5302

UBE ANGULAT. MEASURE mm (value) SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) REFERENCE ANGLE (Rd) : (value) LATERAL COLL MARGIN (mm) : (value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID + – VALID
NEXT VALID
5447
COLLIMATOR TYPE:
V1 V2 V3 V4
5444
FRONT BLADE PRESENCE
YES NO
installation steering step 13.–b.–iv 5231

TUBE HOUSING ANGULATION
YES NO
1–18
5251 Job Card IST 025 Job Card IST 023 5270 Job Card IST 030 5290
BREAST THICKNESS CALIB COMPRESSION CALIBRATION X–RAY FORMAT ’COMPRESSION ARM ROTATION
CONTACT MAGNIF FORCE LIMIT CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM
’COMP. ARM ROTATION PARAM

MIN MAX CALCUL
J H K A
MIN ANGLE CALIB MAX ANGLE CALIB
* Job Card IST 024 (Value) (Value)
52 5257 5271
ICKNESS ’MAGNIF MODE’ THICKNESS FORCE DETECTOR CALIB
CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM
5258 5272 * 5172

’COMP. ARM ROTATION CALIB
AGNIF MODE’ THICK CALIB FORCE DETECTOR CALIB FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS
MIN MAX CALCUL
5daN >15daN MEASURE CALCUL MEASURE CALCUL
5276
5259 5273/5283 COMP MOTOR CURRENT LIMIT
’MAGNIF MODE’ THICK PARAM FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS CALIB PARAM
OFFSET ELASTIC 0daN 3daN. . . . . . . . . . . .27daN
5281 5277 5278

alue) FORCE DETECTOR MEASURES COMPRESSION SAFETY CALIB COMP CURRENT LIMIT PARAM (value) %
0daN 3daN 6daN 9daN 12daN 1>2 LIMIT_IC LIMIT_OC LIM_IC LIM_OC
5282
5279 5280
FORCE DETECTOR MEASURES
IN_COMPRESSION LIMIT % : (value) OUT OF COMP LIMIT % : (value)
15daN 18daN 21daN 24daN 27daN 2>1
+ – VALID + – VALID
5260 5261 5274/5275

FSET = (value) MAGNIF THICK ELASTIC = (value) FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS (value)
5291
X-RAY FORMAT CALIBRATION set SID to 560 !
COLLIM LIGHT
Job Card IST 028

J
9 5333
LLIMATOR FORMAT CALIB LIGHT CENTRING CALIB set SID to 560 !
XPOSE REF_L REF_R REF_F DIFF–L DIFF–R EXPOSE ALIGN COVERAGE
5335
Menu structure Menu structure LIGHT COVERAGE: (value in Motor Steps)
identical to identical to
REF_R REF_R + – VALID
5293
5336
LATERAL X–RAY FORMAT REF
MEASURE S.I.D Calcul LIGHT ALIGNMENT : (value in Motor Steps)
+ – VALID
5295
REF MEASURE (mm) : (value)
VALID 5343
CORR REAR FORMAT
MEASURE S.I.D Calcul
5301
MAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) 5345
VALID SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm=(value) 5338
NEXT VALID CALIB TRACK MOLY: mAs=(value)

+ – VALID
5339
5344 ARM INSTALLATION exposure
REAR DIFF MEASURE mm=(value) VALID
NEXT VALID
0006
ARM: ADJUST EXPOSURE
5340
CORR LATERAL FORMAT

MEASURE S.I.D Calcul
5241 5342
SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) 0005
LATERAL DIFF MEASURE mm=(value)
ARM INSTALLATION exposure end
VALID NEXT VALID
VALID
1–20
Job Card IST 030 5290
X–RAY FORMAT REFERENCE set SID to 560 !
CALIB PARAM
H 5236
X-RAY FORMAT PARAMETERS
DELTA_X COLLIM LIGHT
Job Card IST 036
5300 5305 5308

m): (value) COLLIMATOR PARAMETERS LIGHT CENT PARAMETERS
CO_L CO_R CO_F STP_L STP_R ALIGN COVERAGE
5297 5307 5349

TERAL COLL OPENING (mm): (value) REAR COLL MOTOR STEP (mm): (value) LIGHT COVERAGE: (value in mm)
EXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
5298 5306 5344

REAR COLL OPENING (mm): (value) LAT COLL MOTOR STEP (mm): (value) LIGHT ALIGNMENT: (value in mm)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
5135
FRONT COLL OPENING (mm): (value)
NEXT VALID
X–RAY FORMAT
CALIB PARAM
G J H A G
GRID TRAVEL
CALIB PARAM
5287
GRID PARAMETERS DISPLAY
OFFSET GAIN MIN MAX TESTS
ACCEL TPOSE SPEED SYNC DELTA TP_MAX
+4.000E+0
PARAMS VMAX PARAMS SYNC
+4000E+2 +2048E+3 +0000E+0
V_MIN V_MAX T_VLIN T_MIN T_MAX SLOPE DELTA TD_lim
+5.000E+2 +1.500E+3 +9.00E+1 +7.000E+0 +1.964E–1 +1.200E+1 +8.000E–2 +2.800E+2 +2.500E+3
T VALUES, GIVEN FOR INFORMATION ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHANGE THESE PARAMETERS!
1–22
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–6 Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure
INSTALLATION
Once you have followed the installation mode access procedure given in Section 3–4, you can
go down into the various installation menus by selecting them progressively using the six
keys below the console display window (see Section 3–5).
To move upward in the tree structure, press the SETUP key once for each change
of level desired. This is useful for going from one branch of the tree structure to another
during installation procedures, or if you accidentally go into an unwanted branch.
3–7 Saved Parameters and Checksum
a. Parameters resulting from installation or non–proprietary maintenance procedures

are saved in two memory zones (one in the generator and one in the gantry) whose
contents are not lost when the DMR is switched off.
b. To perform a saved parameter memory checksum, go to the CKSUM menu for the
generator or gantry and run this function. You can now return to application mode
without receiving a checksum error message.
c. It is not mandatory to do a checksum each time you leave a menu. There is no risk
of losing data if you switch off the Senographe displaying checksum error from
generator (or gantry).
The only purpose of checksum error is to lock the application mode against any
random data change. When you perform the checksum you only tell the software
that you accept the data you have changed (that is, either data entered manually or
calibration data).
1–23
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–8 Re–loading of Default (Initial) Parameters

INSTALLATION
THE FUNCTIONS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ARE NORMALLY

WARNING NEVER USED AFTER THE DMR HAS LEFT THE FACTORY.
To re–load the generator or gantry default parameters (prior to any installation or calibration
procedures), use the appropriate CLEAR menu. The use of this menu executes a software
power–up that is comparable to the very first hardware power–up of the generator or gantry.
When the generator CLEAR menu is used, the DMR leaves the installation menus and returns
to the application mode. In order to re–access the installation mode after performing a
generator CLEAR, you must change the position of the installation menu enable switch (see
Section 3–4).
When the gantry CLEAR menu is used, the DMR returns to the gantry installation entry level
(SETUP/ARM/VALID).
Following use of the CLEAR menu, the software displays a CHECKSUM ERROR message.
All generator or gantry calibration procedures must be performed, followed by a CKSUM to
enable use of the new parameters.
USE OF THE GENERATOR CLEAR MENU RESETS, FROM A SOFTWARE

WARNING POINT OF VIEW, THE THERMAL CONDITION OF CRITICAL
COMPONENTS (TUBE, TUBE HOUSING, GENERATOR, ETC.) TO A COLD
CONDITION. THIS MEANS THAT THE SOFTWARE THERMAL
PROTECTIONS CAN NO LONGER DETECT AN EXCESSIVE
TEMPERATURE RISE IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING USE OF THIS MENU.
THE GENERATOR CLEAR MENU MUST THEREFORE BE USED WITH

CARE, ESPECIALLY WHEN OPERATIONS JUST PRIOR TO ITS USE HAVE
SIGNIFICANTLY RAISED CRITICAL COMPONENT TEMPERATURES (e.g.
NUMEROUS HIGH–POWER AND/OR LENGTHY EXPOSURES).
The existing parameters are PERMANENTLY LOST when a CLEAR menu is

CAUTION executed – a COMPLETE RE–CALIBRATION of the assembly (generator or
gantry) must therefore be performed.
1–24
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–9 Returning to the Application Mode
INSTALLATION
To return to the application mode press the SETUP key n times, where n is the
number of levels that you have gone down the installation tree structure.
Note: If you have performed any calibration procedures, or otherwise changed any saved
parameter values, you must perform a saved parameter memory checksum before
returning to the application mode (see Section 3–7) – if you do not perform this
checksum, then you will receive a CHECKSUM ERROR message.
Note: If you switch off the DMR for any reason and then switch it on again, you must once
again change the position of the installation menu enable switch before being able to get
access to the installation mode (see Section 3–4).
3–10 Generator Configuration Parameters
3–10–1 Gantry Present/Absent (PRS_A)
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PRS_A
The generator installation software provides access to a parameter called PRS_A

(PReSence_Arm), whose value can be set to either YES or NO. The value of PRS_A
indicates, from a generator software point of view, the presence or absence of the gantry, i.e.
possibility or not of communication with the gantry CPU.
The service engineer may set PRS_A to NO to isolate the generator from the gantry during
troubleshooting (from the point of view of the generator software, the gantry becomes a
simple tube stand).
Following a generator CLEAR (see section 3–8) PRS_A takes on the value NO.
PRS_A is kept in the saved parameter memory, which means that its value is retained when
power is turned off. This means that if, during a service call, the service engineer has to set
PRS_A to NO it must be set back to YES before handing back the DMR to the customer.
The value of PRS_A can be set by following the menu access path shown above, selecting
YES or NO and performing a CKSUM.
1–25
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–10–2 Display of Parameters Following an Exposure

INSTALLATION
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DISP
To simplify the service engineer’s work, the software can display certain parameters
following an exposure. These parameters are displayed on the console display window in two
groups which appear alternately:
kv mAs mA Time I heater
and
offset photo-cell photo-cell corrected thickness

HV measurement photo-cell
result measurement
result
Where:
offset = offset of photo-cell measurement (dark current + electrical offset)

photo-cell measurement result = photo-cell/mA measurement
corrected photo-cell measurement result = corrected according to DMR configuration
thickness = breast thickness in equivalent cm of plexiglass.
This DISP parameter is turned on and off by following the menu access path shown above.
Select YES or NO. A CKSUM is NOT necessary because this parameter is not a saved
parameter. When power is turned off, the value of DISP is lost and reverts to NO at the next
power–up.
1–26
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–10–3 Calendar and Clock
INSTALLATION
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE
The generator CPU is equipped with a calendar and clock that are used for the following
functions:
D Thermal protection cooling algorithms, whether or not the generator is turned on.
D Memorization of the date and time of an equipment failure.
D Last date of access to the installation mode.
The last function makes it possible for a service engineer to verify the date and time of the last
service visit and also determine whether access to the installation modes was made by
unauthorized persons since that visit.
The date is modified by following the menu access path shown above, selecting DATE, then
NEXT and, finally, rotating the kv dial to obtain the desired day. Select NEXT
again and rotate the kv dial to obtain the desired month. Repeat once more to obtain the
desired year, then select VALID to confirm the date.
Note: The date is entered in the form DD/MM/YY (for example, if the date to be entered is
February 14th, 2001, you must enter 14/02/01).
The time is modified by following the menu access path shown above and then selecting
HOUR. Enter the time of day as explained above for the date, using the NEXT, kv dial and
VALID functions.
Note: The time of day is entered in 24-hour format, therefore, if the time of day is 3:13:27 pm,
you must enter 15:13:27.
Note: Following a generator CLEAR of saved parameters, the calendar and clock, as well as
the last installation mode access date, are initialized to the release date of the generator
software version at 0:00:00.
3–10–4 Visual Representation of Numerical Parameters
When displayed on the console, most numerical values appear in the form of real numbers in
scientific notation floating point format with four significant figures.
Some examples are:
–1.250E+3 = –1250.00
+4.345E–1 = 0.4345
+1.000E+0 = 1.000
1–27
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–10–5 Visual Display of Parameter Values

INSTALLATION
A parameter value can be displayed on the DMR console by accessing the calibration menus
for the procedures that compute the parameter in question. Typically this is done when you
are at a menu choice between CALIB and PARAM. Select PARAM to display the parameter
value.
Note: If the calibration procedure computes more than one parameter, turning the kv
dial will display them one at a time in sequence.
As an example, looking at the values of scale factor K and offset voltage VOF of tube track 1
which are computed by the heater current scale factor calibration routine: follow the menu
access path SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1/PARAM.
On the right of the first console display line appears the value of scale factor K. Rotate the kv
dial clockwise by one position. Now offset voltage VOF appears instead.
CAUTION DO NOT attempt to modify these calibrated parameter values.
3–10–6 Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement
Parameters are entered or modified in scientific notation form.
When at the parameter value modification or measurement entry level in the menu structure,
there are two possible selections: NEXT and VALID. Begin by selecting NEXT. This enables
modification of the first character to be entered. Successive selections of NEXT will enable
modification of each character to be entered.
Use the kv dial to modify the character being entered. Select VALID when all
characters are correctly entered.
NEVER modify a parameter value on a DMR that has already been calibrated
CAUTION unless you have a specific reason. Doing so, in general, will necessitate entering the
default parameter value(s) and completely re–calibrating the sub–assembly
(generator or gantry) for the parameter value(s) in question.
1–28
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
As an example, set the maximum exposure time to 5.7 (+5.700E+0) seconds, follow the menu
access path SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/T_MAX, select NEXT
INSTALLATION
and turn the kv dial to set the sign of the value to be entered (in this example, the
value is positive +). Select ”NEXT again. Turn the kv dial to set the value of the first digit to 5.
Continue selecting NEXT and turning the kv dial until you have input +5.700E+0 (mantissa
sign and four digits plus exponent sign and one digit). If you make a mistake, select NEXT
repeatedly until you arrive at the faulty value, then correct it by rotating the kV dial. If you
truly wish to enter the parameter value, select VALID, keeping the above CAUTION in mind
before doing so! To exit the modification routine, press SETUP once.
Note: Pressing the VALID key is effective ONLY when the entire value, including exponent, is
displayed. This means that if you correct a digit after making a mistake, as described
above, you must press the NEXT key repeatedly until the entire parameter value is
visible before being able to enter the new value using the VALID key.
3–10–7 Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value
This is the case when entering screen pair names (seven characters maximum allowed).
The principle is identical to that used for parameter value entry as described in Section
3–10–6 (repeated use of NEXT, kv dial and VALID).
Here, rotation of the kv dial gives access to the following characters:
The 26 letters of the alphabet

The ten digits from 0 to 9
The colon :
The choice of a screen pair name is confirmed by pressing VALID.
1–29
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–11 Principles of Generator Calibration

INSTALLATION
3–11–1 Vocabulary
The following key words are found throughout the generator installation menus:
CALIB designates a menu that steers you to the calibration procedure itself.
PARAM designates a menu that steers you to other menus that allow you to display and
modify parameters.
CHANGE designates a menu that allows you to modify a parameter.
REF designates a menu within a calibration procedure that allows you to modify the
command input (mAs for reference energy, photo-cell HV for the frequency/HV calibration,
heater current for the heater current scale factor calibration, etc...).
CALCUL designates a menu that steers you to the execution of the computations necessary to
obtain the parameter values.
3–11–2 Use of the First Trigger/Second Trigger Buttons During Generator Installation
In general, calibration computations are started by pressing the SECOND TRIGGER button
(the FIRST TRIGGER button is not used during installation).
After going down through the different menus, the final CALIB selection steers you to a
menu that has no second line displayed on the console display window (i.e. there are no more
menus to select). It is at this level that the calibration computation is started by pressing the
SECOND TRIGGER button.
This general rule does not apply, for practical reasons, when measurements on the gantry
are necessary (because the gantry and generator/console may be physically separated, the
service engineer cannot necessarily be near both at the same time). For example:
– Calibration of photo-cell HV measurement. The command input is sent upon selection

of the START key and is removed upon selection of the STOP key. For this calibration
procedure, the service engineer has to measure the photo-cell HV on the photo-cell
board, which is attached to the gantry, and enter the result via the HV_M menu.
– HV/DAC calibration. The computation is started upon selection of the START key and
stops automatically. A message appears on the console display to indicate the end of
the computation.
3–11–3 Inhibit Conditions Due to Gantry Absence
The AOP calibration procedures (CELL and ALGO) need to exchange information with the
gantry CPU.
Therefore, before performing these calibration procedures, it is necessary to set the value of
PRS_A to YES (see Section 3–10–1) otherwise, error messages indicating software absence
of the gantry will appear on the console display and access to the CALIB menus is inhibited
(only display and modification of parameters will be possible).
1–30
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
3–11–4 Inhibit Conditions Due to Grid Absence/Presence
INSTALLATION
Many of the AEC calibration procedures are performed with grid and without grid. For such
procedures, the gantry CPU indicates to the generator CPU whether or not the grid is present.
The calibration software will verify agreement between physical presence/absence of the
grid and the service engineer’s choice of calibration with grid or without grid. If there is
disagreement, error messages will appear and access to the CALIB menu will be inhibited.
3–11–5 Displayed Messages During Exposure–Producing Calibration Procedures
The following messages are displayed in the upper right–hand corner of the console display
during calibration procedures that make X–ray exposures:
Exposure number (when exposure is valid)

Arcing
Failure (return to application mode for explicit message)
Excessive temperature
End of series of exposures
Certain calibration procedures that make X–ray exposures insert, in alternation with the
above messages, specific messages such as:
Too much plexi

Not enough plexi
Reduce HV, same point
3–11–6 Other Displayed Messages
In general the software displays, as much as possible, messages indicating the phases of
calibration such as:
Calibration end
Calcul done
SECTION 4
SITE PREPARATION
See the Pre-installation Manual for information on site preparation.
1–31
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SECTION 5
INSTALLATION STEERING
INSTALLATION
The installation of the DMR must be performed according to the CONTENT as

CAUTION well as the CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER given in this section. Failure to do so can
result in faulty calibration of the product and subsequent loss of performance.
Note: Use the installation flow chart (illustration 1–16) as a memo to assist you during the
installation.
Use calibration form (IST 043) to record all values obtained.
1. Unpack generator, gantry and accessories. See Job Card IST 008 UNPACKING THE
EQUIPMENT.
2. Physically place/anchor gantry, generator, console, protective glass screen, pedals, etc.
(see Job Card IST 009 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION).
3. Attach appropriate safety labelling to the equipment according to local regulations (see
Job Card IST 038 SAFETY LABELLING).
The attachment of appropriate safety labelling to the equipment is a LEGAL

CAUTION REQUIREMENT for operation of an X–ray producing unit.
4. Remove all side covers and trim panels from generator and gantry (see Job Card IST
032 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS).
5. Inspect inside of generator and gantry for loose or disconnected cables, wires,
connectors, etc. Refer to MIS maps if necessary.
6. Connect cables between generator, console, and gantry and check the vent screw on the
HV tank(see Job Card IST 010).
7. Connect mains supply to generator and configure generator for mains voltage,
frequency and number of phases (see Job Card IST 011 ”CONNECTION OF MAINS
SUPPLY).
Do not attempt to turn on the DMR at this point. Continue following the
CAUTION Installation Steering in the chronological order provided.
8. Measure mains line resistance and determine maximum allowable generator power (see
Job Card IST 012 LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT).
Note: If a high-power installation (50 kW or more) is known to exist on the same mains circuit
as the DMR being installed, it is not necessary to measure line resistance. In this case, set
maximum generator power to 5.0 kW (maximum possible value) when you reach step
13.–a.–ii below. DO NOT SET MAXIMUM GENERATOR POWER NOW. FOLLOW
THE CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF THE INSTALLATION STEERING.
1–32
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
9. Check basic supply voltages (see Job Card IST 022 CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY
VOLTAGES).
INSTALLATION
DO NOT ACCESS THE INSTALLATION SETUP MENUS DURING THIS
WARNING CHECK. FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE IN THE ORDER GIVEN. DO NOT
PERFORM ANY CHECKSUM OPERATIONS. EXTREMELY IMPORTANT
INFORMATION ABOUT THE INTEGRITY OF THE DMR RAM CONTENTS
CAN BE PERMANENTLY LOST IF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT
FOLLOWED CORRECTLY.
10. Check jumpers and switches (see Job Card IST 037 JUMPERS AND SWITCHES).
11. Measure free space between floor and ceiling of the room.
If the available height is less than 2.5 meters (about 8.2 feet), perform job card IST 40
Setting of elevator upper travel limit.
12. Perform the initial power–up check.
VERY IMPORTANT –– READ CAREFULLY:

WARNING
DO NOT ACCESS THE INSTALLATION SETUP MENUS UNTIL THE
INSTRUCTIONS INDICATE TO DO SO. FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE IN
THE ORDER GIVEN. DO NOT PERFORM ANY CHECKSUM OPERATIONS.
EXTREMELY IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THE INTEGRITY OF
THE DMR RAM CONTENTS CAN BE PERMANENTLY LOST IF THESE
INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED CORRECTLY.
a. Turn on the DMR and wait for the autotests to execute.

b. Normally, the DMR will now be in application mode, in the exposure mode and
configuration that it was in when last turned off before leaving the factory.
THERE SHOULD NOT BE, IN ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, A CHECKSUM

WARNING ERROR MESSAGE ON THE CONSOLE (i.e. Checksum error (gen) AND/OR
Arm checksum error).
IF EITHER OR BOTH OF THESE MESSAGES APPEARS, COMPLETE THIS

INITIAL POWER–UP CHECK AND RELOAD THE GENERATOR OR ARM
(OR BOTH) SAVED PARAMETERS USING THE DISKETTE (PN 2152250)
DELIVERED IN THE ACCESSORIES KIT. THIS DISKETTE IS LABELLED
WITH THE SAME PRODUCT LOCATOR NUMBER AS YOUR DMR. FILES
ARE IDENTIFIED GXXXX.DAT (GENERATOR) AND AXXXX.DAT (ARM),
XXXX BEING THE FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER. THERE SHOULD NOT BE
ANY CHECKSUM ERROR IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE CORRECT
RELOADING OF THESE PARAMETERS.
c. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1–8 on
generator CPU board 400–PL3, see section 3–4).
1–33
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
d. Starting from application mode, select :

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE on the console.
INSTALLATION
e. If necessary, enter the correct date and hour.

13. Perform software configuration.
a. Perform generator software configuration.
Before beginning:
Turn on the DMR.
Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu en-
able switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3, see section 3–4).
i. Choose console dialog display language:

Starting from application mode, select SETUP/LANGUAGE/language on the
console, where language is the desired console dialogue display language
(FRANC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITALI or PORTU).
Note: For compatibility with the information contained in this manual concerning menu paths,
select ENGL for installation of the DMR. When installation is complete, the language
will be changed to that of the country of installation.
ii. Set maximum generator output power.

Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PMAX/pmax
on the console, where pmax is the maximum generator power determined from
the line resistance measurement performed in step 8. above. Possible values are
3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, and 5.0 kW.
Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is 5.0 kW.
iii. Set maximum X–ray tube mAs.

Select SETUP/MASMAX on the console. Enter the maximum mAs value ac-
cording to local regulations using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the
kV dial. See sections 3–10–5 and 3–10–6.
Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is +6.000E+2 (600) mAs.
iv. Set maximum X–ray exposure time.

Select SETUP/T_MAX on the console. Enter the maximum X–ray exposure
time according to local regulations using the NEXT and VALID keys and ro-
tating the kV dial. See sections 3–10–5 and 3–10–6.
Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is +2.000E+1 (20) seconds.
v. Check X–ray tube (model, focus, number of anode metals and anode angles)
type configuration:
1–34
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Select SETUP/ GENE/ INSTAL/ GENE/ CONFIG/ CONFIG/TUBE/

MODEL/XXXX. Check the type of tube installed or to be installed and set
INSTALLATION
the corresponding value:
GS412: for DMR V1 and V2
70TH–F: for DMR+ and V1 or V2 upgraded with Software V6.21 and DMR+
tube
70TH–D: only SENO 2000D
If the configuration is correct, skip directly to step vii below. Otherwise, con-
tinue with step vi.
vi. Check X–ray tube type configuration:

Select FOCUS/DUAL on the console.
Select SETUP/ANODE/DM on the console.
Select SETUP on the console, then verify that the console display now shows
the correct tube type as specified in step v above.
vii. Check AOP type configuration. Starting from step v above, select: SETUP/
SETUP/SETUP/AOP/TYPE
Check that Status shown is: A.
The following information on the choice of AOP type should be transmitted
to the physician. Three types are available:
Type A is AOP 4.01, as installed by default on DMR+ and DMR V2. It imple-
ments new AOP tables, with variable composition.
Type B is AOP 4.01, without variable composition. It is not widely used.
Type C is AOP 3.01, as installed on DMR V1. (no variable composition).
Recommended choice:
If there is already a DMR on site, select the same configuration.
If you have free choice, select AOP 4.01 with variable composition (type A).
If the physician requires it, select AOP 3.01 (type C)
b. Perform gantry software configuration.

i. Check the cassette detection presence configuration.
Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/CASSET/(YES or NO)
– Enter NO for DMR V1
– Enter YES for DMR V2 and DMR+
ii. Check the correct configuration of the 18x24 bucky.

CONFIG/BUCKY/18X24/24X30 Height diff.:YES/NO
– Enter NO when buckies 18x24 have the same thickness than the bucky
24x30 (Standard choice for DMR V1 and DMR+),
– Enter YES when buckies 18x24 are more higher than the bucky 24x30
(Standard choice for DMR V2).
1–35
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
iii. Check the correct configuration of GRID acceleration.

INSTALLATION
CALIB/GRID/PARAMS/TESTS/ACCEL
– Set ACCEL parameter to 1 (1.000E+0) for DMR+.
– Set ACCEL parameter to 1 (4.000E+0) for DMR V1_P and V2_P.
iv. Set X–ray tube housing configuration.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/TUBE/YES on the console (the X–ray tube housing is inclinable
on all DMRs).
Perform a gantry CKSUM and return to application mode. Check that NONE
of the following error messages appears on the console display:
S53 105/080 (incompatible housing configuration)
S53 105/081 (incompatible housing configuration)
S54 155/082 (incompatible tube type)
S54 155/083 (incompatible tube type)
v. Check label on collimator for type (V1 to V4).

CONFIG/COLLIM/TYPE
vi. Check the collimator front blade presence.
CONFIG/COLLIM/FRONT_B/YES or NO
In standard configuration, DMR V1 hardware has not a motorized Front
Blade.
The default setting is YES (collimator with front blade control).
vii. Set lateral margin of X–ray beam. Access the arm configuration menu. Start-
ing from application mode, select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L
Then use +/– keys to set margin at desired value and select VALID.
See the table below for standards and recommendations to get full film black-
ening.
Standard Lateral margin (mm) Selection *

CEI** +2 ...
UK +3 ...
AUSTRALIA** 0 ...
MQSA / CDRH +2 ...
* Note down (X) the selected value.
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the
margin configuration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
1–36
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
viii. Set rear margin of X–ray beam. Select:

SETUP/MARG_R
INSTALLATION
ening.
Standard Rear margin (mm) Selection *

CEI** +2 ...
UK +2 ...
AUSTRALIA** 0 ...
MQSA** +2 ...
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the
margin configuration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
For DMR V1_P and V2_P, there is a limitation preventing from having a full film
blackening. But setting the rear margin to –4 mm is acceptable.
ix. Set front margin of X–ray beam. Select:

SETUP/MARG_F
ening.
Standard Front margin (mm) Selection *

CEI +2 ...
UK +2 ...
AUSTRALIA +3 ...
MQSA +2 ...
Note: For DMR V1 (in standard configuration) the adjustment of the Front Blade is manual
(the menu SETUP/MARG_F is not accessible).
For DMR V1 upgraded system with collimator V3 kit, the menu SETUP/MARG_F is
available.
x. Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode

xi. Set gantry medical parameters.
Ask the doctor for the desired paddle compression speed (fast or slow). Start-
ing from application mode, select SETUP/MEDICAL/SPEED on the con-
sole. Select FAST or SLOW on the console.
Ask the doctor for the desired maximum compression force in daN. Select
SETUP/FORCE on the console. Select + or – on the console repeatedly until
the desired force value is reached (possible values range from 4 to 20 daN in
steps of 1 daN). Once the desired value is reached, select VAL on the console
to confirm the desired value.
Note: The ACR recommendation is 18daN (40lbs).
1–37
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Ask the doctor if automatic decompression (i.e. return of the compression

paddle to its home position) following an exposure is desired. Select SETUP/
INSTALLATION
DECOMP on the console. Select YES on the console if automatic decom-

pression is desired, or NO if it is not desired.
Ask the doctor if a beep tone is desired. Select SETUP/BEEP on the console.
Select YES on the console if a beep tone is desired, or NO if it is not desired.
Ask the doctor for the desired maximum height during automatic decompres-
sion (between 10 and 40 cm). Select SETUP/HEIGHT on the console.
Select + or – on the console repeatedly until the desired height value is
reached. Then select VALID to confirm the value.
Ask the doctor for the desired cassette detection mode (default is “YES”).
Select SETUP/FILM on the console. Select “NO” ONLY if no cassette
detection is desired.
Note: The parameter film is reset to yes at each power up of the DMR.
The service engineer is not needed for selecting the above–mentioned gantry medical
parameters (SPEED, FORCE, DECOMP, BEEP, HEIGHT and FILM); the doctor can
easily change them at will at any time following installation of the DMR.
xii. Set paddle deformation parameters.

See Job card IST044 “Setting paddle deformation parameters”.
14. Perform preliminary generator and gantry testing.

See Job Card IST 033 PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING.
15. Calibrate grid position.
See Job Card IST 026 CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION.
16. Check safe–lighting and film processing (see Job Card IST 034 CHECKING
SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING).
Note 1 : For following steps :
use AEC flow chart to assist in following steering guide, see illustration NO TAG.
Note 2 : In case of error messages during the following steps, see IST 41 for explanation of these
messages.
17. Calibrate photo-cell HV measurement and scale factor.

See Job Card IST 004 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell HV MEASUREMENT AND
SCALE FACTOR.
18. Calibrate photo-cell sensitivity as a function of its voltage.
See Job Card IST 005 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell SENSITIVITY AS A FUNC-
TION OF ITS VOLTAGE.
Note: It is a good practice to backup generator data at this time.
19. Calibrate AEC for each screen pair (repeat steps a. to i. below for each screen pair).
1–38
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
a. Choose and configure a screen pair.

Perform the procedures in Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND
INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION.
b. Check on pre–exposure in Jobcard IST046.

c. Calibrate photo-cell gain.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 007 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell GAIN
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
d. Determine if reciprocity law failure compensation parameters (LNRT) can be

entered manually. If not, perform the necessary calibration to determine them.
IF the screen and film of the screen pair being calibrated appear in table 1 below, or
IF, in your own experience installing the DMR, you have ALREADY determined
parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the SAME screen pair, go directly to step e..
IF this is not the case, go directly to Job Card IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM
RECIPROCITY FAILURE COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
Once this calibration is finished, write down the newly–determined parameters
A0, A1 and A2 for the screen pair being calibrated in table 1 below, then SKIP step
e. and go DIRECTLY to step f.
TABLE 1
A0, A1 AND A2 VALUES FOR VARIOUS SCREEN PAIRS
PROCESSOR
SCREEN BRAND AND CYCLE TIME
TYPE FILM BRAND AND TYPE (SEC) A0 A1 A2
KODAK MIN–R KODAK MIN–R MA 90 +1.000E+0 +1.329E–1 +1.333E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R E 90 +1.000E+0 +9.797E–2 +1.124E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R H 90 +1.000E+0 +1.432E–1 +1.880E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R M 90 +1.000E+0 +1.698E–1 +2.469E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R 2000 90 +1.000E+0 +1.219E–1 +1.491E–2
” ” ” 3M TRIMAX HM 90 +1.000E+0 +8.479E–2 +1.210E–2
AGFA MR detail S AGFA MR5 150 +1.000E+0 +1.491E–1 +1.796E–2
” ” ” MR3–II 120 +1.000E+0 +1.170E–1 +9.586E–3
KODAK MIN–R 2000/2190 MIN–R 2000 90 +1.000E+0 +1.219E–1 +1.491E–2

AGFA HD/HD–S AGFA HDR–C 90 +1.000E+0 +7.686E–2 +6.342E–3
FUJI AD FUJI ADM 90 +1.000E+0 +1.576E–1 +1.988E–2
e. Calibrate reference energy.
1–39
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Enter manually the three reciprocity law failure compensation parameters (A0, A1
and A2) either from table 1 or from your own notes from a previous installation of
INSTALLATION
the same screen pair on another DMR for the screen and film of the screen pair be-
ing calibrated:
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/

ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/PARAM on the console, where x is the screen
pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. See
Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION.
At this point, enter the three parameter values by using the CHANGE key, rotating
the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP keys. See sections 3–10–5
and 3–10–6.
If this is an additional DMR, at the same site, using the same processor, then as soon
as the three parameter values are correctly entered, go IMMEDIATELY to Job
Card IST 014 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR. Once this calibration is finished, go directly to step f. below.
Otherwise, go directly to Job Card IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM REC-
IPROCITY FAILURE COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR. Once
this calibration is finished, write down the newly–determined parameters A0, A1
and A2 for the screen pair being calibrated in table 1.
f. AOP strategy: this parameter is determined automatically at the end of IST013 or
IST014 reference energy calibration. So the manual setting of the AOP strategy
(IST039) is no longer necessary.
Note: However, if there are several senographe DMR installed on the same site, it may be
necessary to “equalize” all the strategies to the same value, to avoid unjustified mAs
deviation between identical senographes. For this purpose only, it is still possible to
read/set the strategy value. Starting from application mode, select:
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/STRAT
Where x is the screen pair indicator (A, B, C, D, or E).
See IST039 for further reference.
This equalization must only be done if the DMRs are using the same film/screen couple,
same film processor, same SID.
g. Calibrate photo-cell in Stereotix 2 positions.
Note: This step is not applicable for non–Stereotix 2 installations.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 018 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell IN

STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS.
h. Calibrate reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode.
Note: This step is not applicable for non–Stereotix 2 installations.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 019 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE

ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
i. If the AEC calibration for the screen pair being calibrated is successful and
complete at this point (which is normally the case) be sure that this screen pair is
enabled for use in application mode (see Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR
SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION.
1–40
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
20. Test for absence of grid lines on exposed film.

See Job Card IST 031 TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM.
INSTALLATION
21. Change console dialog display language to that of the country of installation (if other
than English):
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/MEDICAL/LANGUAGE/
language on the console, where language is the desired console dialog display lan-
guage (FRANC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITALI or PORTU).
22. At this step, a calibration backup can be done. Then, in case of a system crash, the
calibration backup can be used or the system can be completely recalibrated following
the process in chapter 2.
23. Perform safety checks (collimator size for example) if applicable from local
regulations.
24. Switch off the DMR to disable access to installation menus.
25. Connect room lights (optionnal), see Job card IST042 for Senographe DMR+ and
DMR V2+. For DMR V1 consult Job Card IST010.
26. Refit all covers.
1–41
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 1–16
DMR STEERING GUIDE FLOWCHART
INSTALLATION
Note: use Calibration form (IST043) to record all obtained values
Do software configuration
* of medical menus:
Unpacking the equipment ...... Language
Compression speed
IST 008 Compression max. force ......
Decomp. auto
Beep
Physical installation Film detection
......
IST 009
Do/check software configuration
Safety labelling of install menus:
...... Generator: Pmax
IST 038 MaSMax
T. Max
Removal of side covers AOP type
IST 032 ...... Tube type ......
& general inspection Gantry:Cassette detection
Bucky settings
Tube housing
Connecting the cables + ...... Collimator settings
HV tank check IST 010 Paddle deformation settings (IST 044)
* Check box Connection of Mains supply ...... Arm Angle Check

when step done IST 015 (Check only) ......
IST 011
Only for DMR+
Line resistance measurement ...... Preliminary generator ......

IST 012 & gantry testing
IST 033
First power–on for basic
power supplies check ......
Check calibration of ......
IST 022 grid position
IST 026
Check jumpers & switches ......
IST 037 Check safe lighting ......
& film processing
IST 034
Set elevator upper travel limit ......
IST 040 (optionnal)
AEC calibration ......
Power–on: (see AEC flow chart, illus. 1.19)
observe for possible ......
error codes
Test for no grid lines ......
IST 031
Checksum Clear generator & gantry error stacks

error Clear generator statistics ......
codes Backup generator & gantry parameters
NO
displayed
?
Perform safety regulation checks ......
(optionnal)
YES
Switch off to disable access ......
to install menus
Restore factory data if possible, or
recalibrate the complete system
following the calibration process
shown in Chapter 2 – Calibration Wire room lamps/door (IST042 or IST010 ......
for DMR V1+) and refit all covers
1–42
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 1–17
FLOW CHART OF AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
INSTALLATION
DMR : FLOW CHART OF AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
CAUTION: ONE NEED
FILM/SCREEN ONLY
DO NOT PERFORM IST 017
? COUPLE
ALREADY ? YES
? TO SHIFT
AVERAGE
? NO
AT FIRST INSTALLATION CALIBRATED DENSITY
NO YES
CHECK OF VIEWBOX
& SENSITOMETRIC
STABILTY IST 047 & IST 048
A
DIFFERENT
? SCREEN
?
kV SCALE FACTOR IST 017
COMMON YES
TO HV_PM INTERNAL COUPLE CHOICE NO
VOLTMETER IST 004 (NAME, VALIDATION)
ALL CALIBRATION parag.5
COUPLES IST 006
DAC IST 004 COUPLE CHOICE
Time : 20’ CALIBRATION parag.6
Time : 5’ (NAME, VALIDATION
IST 006
PM/HV_PM
PARAMETERS DUPLICATION Time : 5’
CALIBRATION Copy only parameters without
IST 005
screen
PARAMETERS
COUPLE CHOICE IST 007 section 8 step 1 to 5
DUPLICATION IST 007
(NAME, VALIDATION Time : 5’ section 8
IST 006 step 1
Time : 5’ PM YIELD See Note 1 below to 10
PM YIELD IST 007 Perform only calibration Time : 5’
See Note 2 with screen
IST 007 parag. 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.10
Time : 40’ and 6.11
kV RISE TIME IST 046 Time : 20’
A
LNRT
PARAMS
? ALREADY
? NO
YES SEE RECOMMENDATION # 1
KNOWN COUPLE CHOICE
HEATER
ENTER KNOWN CALIBRATION AT 30 mA
PARAMETERS
(A0, A1, A2) IST 013/5.5 Time : 5’
from steering Time : 10’
guide table SEE RECOMMENDATION # 2
REFERENCE ENERGY
path = AOP/ALGO/FSC = x..
/CALIB/LNRT.. REFERENCE ENERGY IST 014
/PARAM/CHANGE IST 013/5.6 Time : 20’
Time : 5’ Time : 25’
LNRT OD OPTIMIZATION
REFERENCE ENERGY SEE RECOMMENDATION # 3 Contact mode
IST 050
IST 014 IST 013/5.7 Time : 30’ to 90’
Time : 20’ Time : 45’ to 80’ OD OPTIMIZATION
Mag. mode IST 051
AOP STRATEGY
Time :0’ Automatic (See installation
section 5, parag.19.F)
REFERENCE
ENERGY
OD OPTIMIZATION FOR STEREOTIX
Time : 30’ to 90’ Contact mode IST 050 (IF APPLICABLE)
OD OPTIMIZATION OPTIONAL (If required by local regulation) IST 019

Mag. mode IST 051 (e.g.: MQSA 2002) Time : 20’
AOP CORRECTION END

IN MAG. MODE IST 015 ONLY FOR DMR V1_P AND V2+
Time : 15’
STEREOTIX NOTE 1
? TO BE ? DO NOT FORGET : DO BOTH COPY I
CALIBRATED YES
STEREOTIX CELL E.G. : A no screen TO B no screen
CALIBRATION IST 018 AND
NO Time : 15’ A with screen TO B with screen
REFERENCE ENERGY
FOR STEREOTIX IST 019
NOTE 2
Time : 20’
IF LNRT PARAMS ARE UNKNOWN
PERFORM IST 13 IMMEDIATELY
CALIBRATE AFTER IST 07 (SO, WITH HOT TUBE)
END ? ANOTHER ?
NO YES
COUPLE
Time (in minutes) is an average value for indication purpose only
1–43
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
INSTALLATION
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR AEC/AOP CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Recommendation # 1: Selection of Reference O.D.
Whenever Reference O.D. is determined by the customer, take in account the following:
• Site dedicated to cancer screening campaign. See applicable standards,
• Kodak MinR 2000; recommended net O.D. > 1.4.
• The value must be compatible with the quality of the viewboxes.
To perform IST 013, it is possible to use an O.D. value other than the one expected by the doctor.
• In this case, once IST 013 has been performed, O.D. value must be adjusted with IST 014,
• This O.D. (used to complete IST 013) needs to be chosen on the linear part of the sensitometric curve with the
recommended gamma (See Job Card IST 048). Film Reciprocity Law Failure Compensation algorithm of DMR
uses a calculation range around O.D. ± 0.2.
Note: Take care to have OD ± 0.2 range inside the same linear part (i.e. with the same slope).
Recommendation # 2: Setting of Sensitometric Scale from Senographe Console
– Enter Sensitometric Scale (steps 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15),
Note: The target O.D. is between two density steps. Use these two values to calculate the gamma value:
Gamma = (D(n+1) – D(n))/0.3. The DMR will do the calculation this way.
The result shall be identical or very close to the value found with Job card IST 048.
If not, modify the choice of O.D. steps, by shifting the step values.
Recommendation # 3: Calibration of Film Reciprocity Law Failure Compensation for a given

Screen/Film pair
– Calibrate the Reference Energy (step 5.6 of Job Card IST 013).
• Choose O.D. according to the recommendation # 1.
• For a good result, it is recommended to find manually the exact mAs value to reach the expected O.D.
with 28 kV/4 cm acrylic.
– Perform Film Reciprocity Law failure Compensation procedure: step 5.7 of IST 013.
– CAUTION: If an error 068/xxx is displayed by the Senographe console, it means that the parameters may be
erroneous. Do not attempt to force the calibration. Reset the generator and perform again the calibration.
• Check result according to step 5.9 of IST 013:
The optical density must not vary by more than 0.2 between any of the three films; if it does, the entire
calibration must be repeated.
1–44
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
• If the O.D. used in IST 013 is different from O.D. desired by customer, perform IST 014 : Calibration of
the REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN/FILM PAIR.
INSTALLATION
Note: Check IST 039. Verify if the strategy computed by DMR is compatible with kV and
mAs values:
– If you decrease the strategy, e.g., Very Fast to Fast, for a same AOP mode configu-
ration, the choice of kV will be higher.
1–45
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
INSTALLATION
1–46
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER 2 – CALIBRATION
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter is a resume of the procedures to follow when a complete re–calibration of the
generator and/or gantry is deemed necessary, when a new screen pair is being introduced,
when the Stereotix 2 option is being installed after the initial installation, and when the
customer wishes to change the reference optical density in AEC and AOP modes.
CALIBRATION
This chapter is divided into 7 sections:
D Section 1 introduces the chapter.

D Section 2 describes generator calibration (except AEC calibration of a screen pair).
D Section 3 provides information for complete gantry calibration.
D Section 4 provides information for AEC calibration for a given screen pair.
D Section 5 describes AEC calibration of a Stereotix 2 installed after initial installation.
D Section 6 describes re–calibration of non–Stereotix 2 reference optical density in AEC
and AOP modes.
D Section 7 describes re-calibration of Stereotix 2 mode reference optical density in AEC
mode.
SECTION 2
1. Check jumpers and switches – see Job Card IST 037.

2. Calibrate X–ray tube heater current scale factor – see Job Card IST 001.
3. Calibrate X–ray tube focal bias voltage – see Job Card IST 002.
4. Calibrate X–ray tube mA measurement – see Job Card IST 016.
5. Calibrate X–ray tube kV scale factor – see Job Card IST 017.
6. Calibrate X–Ray tube heater current – see Job Card IST 003.
7. Calibrate photo cell HV measurement and scale factor – see Job Card IST 004.
8. Calibrate photo cell sensitivity as a function of its voltage – see Job Card IST 005.
SECTION 3
GANTRY CALIBRATION
1. Check jumpers and switches – see Job Card IST 037.

2. Calibrate compression force detector – see Job Card IST 023.
3. Test minimum compression/decompression force – see Job Card IST 024.
4. Calibrate breast thickness measurement – see Job Card IST 025.
5. Calibrate grid position – see Job Card IST 026.
6. Calibrate X–ray tube reference angle – see Job Card IST 029.
7. Check X–ray film format geometry – see Job Card IST 027.
2–1
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
8. Calibrate collimator blades reference positions – see Job Card IST 030.
9. Calibrate light centering device– see Job Card IST 036 and 028.
10. Test for absence of grid lines on exposed film – see Job Card IST 031.
SECTION 4
AEC CALIBRATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR
When a new screen pair is being introduced, follow the sequence Calibrate AEC for each
screen pair given in the Installation Steering in chapter 1, and the AEC flow chart (see
illustration NO TAG in Chapter 1).
CALIBRATION
SECTION 5
AEC CALIBRATION ON STEREOTIX 2
When the Stereotix 2 option is installed after initial installation of a Senographe DMR, follow
the sequence given below:
1. set up and calibrate the Stereotix 2 according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual
2. calibrate photocell in Stereotix 2 positions (see Job Card IST 018)
3. Calibrate reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode (see Job Card IST 019).
FOR SAFETY REASONS IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE GANTRY IS

WARNING ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR
IS EQUIPPED WITH THE STEREOTIX 2 (see Job Card IST 009).
SECTION 6
RE–CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY IN NON–STEREOTIX 2 MODE
To re–calibrate the reference optical density, follow the sequence below:
1. Set up the following exposure:

D any compression paddle installed
D contact (no magnification)
D grid installed
D 40 mm plexiglass on the cassette holder
D mode: AEC (1–point)
D screen pair: select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
D focal spot: LARGE
D track: MO
D filter: MO
D manual density correction: +0
D HV: 28 kV.
2. Take an exposure using a cassette and undeveloped film corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. Write down the resulting mAs value.
3. Perform the section entitled Calibration of Reference Energy in Job Card IST 014, but
do not use the default mAs value for the first exposure – instead, enter the mAs value
obtained in the exposure above.
2–2
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
4. Perform the section entitled Check Results in Job Card IST 014.
SECTION 7
CUSTOMER REQUESTED RE–CALIBRATION OF STEREOTIX 2 MODE REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY
When the customer requests a re–calibration of Stereotix 2 mode reference optical density,
perform Job Card IST 019 in its entirety.
CALIBRATION
2–3
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
CALIBRATION
2–4
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER 3 – JOB CARDS
JOB CARD IST 001 – CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
JOB CARD IST 002 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . 3–9
JOB CARD IST 003 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
JOB CARD IST 004 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FACTOR . . . . . 3–19
JOB CARD IST 005 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE 3–23
JOB CARD IST 006 – SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
JOB CARD IST 007 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
JOB CARD IST 008 – UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
JOB CARD IST 009 – PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
JOB CARD IST 010 – WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57
JOB CARD IST 011 – CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–71
JOB CARD IST 012 – LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79
JOB CARD IST 013 – CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE COMPENSATION
JOB CARDS
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–83
JOB CARD IST 014 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . 3–93
JOB CARD IST 015 – MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A GIVEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–101
JOB CARD IST 016 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–107
JOB CARD IST 017 – CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–111
JOB CARD IST 018 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–117
JOB CARD IST 019 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–123
JOB CARD IST 020 – AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–131
JOB CARD IST 021 – CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM . . . . . 3–133
JOB CARD IST 022 – CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–139
JOB CARD IST 023 – CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–143
JOB CARD IST 024 – MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–145
JOB CARD IST 025 – CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–149
JOB CARD IST 026 – CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–153
JOB CARD IST 027 – CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–155
JOB CARD IST 027 B – CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY FOR NON MOTORIZED
FROM BLADE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
JOB CARD IST 028 – ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT COLLIMATOR BLADE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–183
JOB CARD IST 029 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–191
JOB CARD IST 030 – CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT, COLLIMATOR BLADE
REFERENCE POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195
JOB CARD IST 031 – TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–199
JOB CARD IST 032 – REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–203
JOB CARD IST 033 – PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–207
JOB CARD IST 034 – CHECKING SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–213
JOB CARD IST 035 – REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP (NEW VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–217
3–1
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
JOB CARD IST 035 B – REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP (OLD VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–221
JOB CARD IST 036 – ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–225
JOB CARD IST 037 – JUMPERS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–235
JOB CARD IST 038 – SAFETY LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–237
JOB CARD IST 039 – MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . 3–241
JOB CARD IST 040 – SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–245
JOB CARD IST 041 – GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–249
JOB CARD IST 043 – DMR INSTALLATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–257
JOB CARD IST 044 – SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–271
JOB CARD IST 045 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOW–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–273
JOB CARD IST 046 – CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–277
JOB CARD IST 047 – CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–283
JOB CARD IST 048 – CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–287
JOB CARD IST 050 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–291
JOB CARD IST 051 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR MAGNIFICATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–293
JOB CARDS
3–2
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P) Job Card IST 001 1 of 6
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE Version No.:

FACTOR Date :
Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D True R.M.S. AC ammeter
e.g: Fluke 8060, Fluke 87, Fluke 45. HP 3457A, Tektronix DMM 254.
JOB CARDS
D HV unit / cable adaptor, Part number 36003399.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
To ensure an accurate measurement:
D For ALL Digital Multimeters, the Autorange function MUST NOT be used, as it can lead to severe mea-
surement errors (>40% !!).
D For ALL Digital Multimeters, the Relative Measurement function MUST NOT be used to reset to zero
the natural offset displayed when there is no current measured. The offset is automatically reset to zero
by the principle of the rms measurement.
D Measurement configurations to be used are as follows:
a. Fluke 8060: used with 20–A shunt in the 200–mV AC range (shunt reference: 80J10).
b. Fluke 87: no shunt, in the 10–A AC range.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this cal-

CAUTION ibration procedure, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the X–ray tube filament supply circuit unusable. This
can show up as an error message during power up, and thus inhibit use of the
calibration software. If this happens, the only way to cancel the error is to
manually re–enter the default parameter values (see section 5 for default
parameter values) and switch the Senographe DMR off and back on again
before again attempting a calibration.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–3
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE

FACTOR Job Card IST 001 2 of 6
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor K and fixed offset VOF between the X–ray tube filament current
command from the software and the real filament current value obtained. Each tube track has its own filament
supply circuit, so this calibration procedure is to be performed for each of the two tracks.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE K = +9.450E+0 (9.45) AND VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0).
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this calibration procedure.
5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR.
5.1.2 Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400–PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy build–up in the HV
JOB CARDS
unit during this calibration procedure.
5.1.3 Disconnect the DMR HV cable at the HV tank end.
5.1.4 Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).
5.1.5 Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the DMR HV tank.
5.1.6 Connect the true r.m.s. AC ammeter in series with the filament being calibrated
on the HV unit / cable adaptor; and place a jumper on the other track (see illustrations 1 and 2).
Note: See “important note” in section 2 to ensure an accurate measurement.
Note: Keep the other filament connected in order to avoid error messages when the Senographe DMR
is switched on.
3–4
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter
From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield
–HT –HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)
JOB CARDS
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter
Note: For safety purpose, –HT is permanently connected to ground
3–5
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 2
HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM
L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEAD–ON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT.
G
POLARIZING TAB C
S
JOB CARDS
The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X–ray industry markings (L, S, C and G).
However, the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe DMR are as follows:
L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply
S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply
C = filament supply return and X–ray tube cathode HV
G = focal bias voltage supply
5.1.7 Switch on the Senographe DMR.
Note: ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.
5.1.8 Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board
400–PL3, see ”Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure” in chapter 1).
5.2 Perform the calibration procedure for the desired X–ray tube track.
5.2.1 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1 (or TRACK2)

/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.
Note: The default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.
3–6
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabi-
lizes (this may take a few seconds).
5.2.3 Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.
5.2.4 Release the 2nd trigger button.
5.2.5 Select SETUP/MeasI on the console.
5.2.6 Enter and validate the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this first calibration
point.
5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.
Note: The default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.
JOB CARDS
5.2.11 Select SETUP/MeasI on the console.
5.2.12 Enter and validate the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this second calibration
point.
5.2.13 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the scale
factor and fixed offset of the filament current command from the software.
5.3 Check the calibration accuracy.
5.3.1 Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
Note: Again, the default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.
3–7
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console.
Note: Again, the default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.
5.3.9 The expected results are 4.0 ± 0.02 A for the first point and 5.0 ± 0.02 A for the second point. If the
results are within these tolerances, the calibration for this X–ray tube track is finished. If the results
are out of tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure in section 5.2 and the check procedure in sec-
tion 5.3 for the same X–ray tube track.
JOB CARDS
Note: Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.
Note: If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of cur-
rent for the two points (4.0 and 5.0 A) should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure
is probably not being followed correctly.
5.3.10 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of scale
factor K and offset VOF. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV
dial on the console.
If the value of K is less than +8.000E+0 (8.0), either the calibration procedure
CAUTION was done incorrectly or there is a hardware defect.
5.3.11 Repeat the calibration and check procedures on the other tube track, if necessary.
5.3.12 Perform a ”CKSUM”, then turn the system off
5.3.13 Re–connect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400–PL1 connector XJ7, remove high
voltage cable adapter. Do not forget to secure the HV ring with the Allen screw, to insure proper
ground continuity.
3–8
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS Version No.:

VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Voltmeter
D HV unit / cable adaptor, part number 36003399
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this cal-

CAUTION ibration procedure, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the X–ray tube focal bias voltage supply circuit
unusable. This can show up as an error message during power up, and thus
inhibit use of the calibration software. If this happens, the only way to cancel
the error is to manually re–enter the default parameter values (see section 5
for these values) and switch the Senographe DMR+ off and back on again
before again attempting a calibration.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
3–9
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS

VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 2 of 6
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the X–ray tube focal bias voltage
command from the software and the real focal bias voltage value obtained. The focal bias voltage applied to
the X–ray tube electron beam concentration device establishes the focal spot width.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +9.389E+1 (93.89) AND BETA = +3.801E–2
(0.03801).
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR+ for this calibration procedure.
5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR+.
5.1.2 Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400–PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy build–up in the HV
JOB CARDS
unit during this calibration procedure.
5.1.3 Disconnect the DMR+ HV cable at the HV tank end.
5.1.4 Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).
5.1.5 Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the DMR+ HV tank.
5.1.6 Connect a DC voltmeter between common (C) and the focal bias voltage wire (G) (see illustrations
1 and 2).
3–10
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter

From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield
–HT –HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
JOB CARDS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter
Note: For safety purpose, –HT is permanently connected to ground
3–11
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 2
HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM
L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEAD–ON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT.
G
POLARIZING TAB C
S
JOB CARDS
The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X–ray industry markings (L, S, C and G).
However, the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe DMR+ are as fol-
lows:
L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply
S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply
C = filament supply return and X–ray tube cathode HV
G = focal bias voltage supply
5.1.7 Switch on the Senographe DMR+.

ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.
400–PL3, see Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure in chapter 1).
5.1.9 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/BIAS/VOLTAGE on the console.
3–12
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.10 Rotate the kV dial in order to check that all four focal bias voltage command values are the same
as the values specified on the label on the X-ray tube housing:
MO/LF = . . . . . . . . . . .
RH/LF = . . . . . . . . . . . .
MO/SF = . . . . . . . . . . .
RH/SF = . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify any values that appear different from these on the tube label by using the
CAUTION CHANGE key, rotating the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP
keys. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and ”Modification of a Parameter
Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.
JOB CARDS
5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.
5.2.1 Select SETUP/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.
5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabi-
lizes.
5.2.3 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter.
5.2.5 Select SETUP/MeasV on the console.
5.2.6 Enter and validate the absolute value of measured focal bias voltage value from the voltmeter for
this first calibration point. See ”Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value” in chapter 1 for information on
entering alpha–numeric values.
5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console for the second calibration point.
lizes.
5.2.9 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter.
5.2.11 Select SETUP/MeasV on the console.
5.2.12 Enter and validate the measured focal bias voltage value from the voltmeter for this second calibra-
tion point.
3–13
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.13 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the parame-
ters alpha and beta. The message ”CALCUL DONE” appears on the console display.
5.3.1 Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
lizes.
5.3.3 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter for the first point.
5.3.4 Release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

JOB CARDS
lizes.
5.3.7 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter for the second point.
5.3.8 Release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
5.3.9 The expected results for the first point are the value of MO/LF ±5% for the first point and the value
of MO/SF ±5% for the second point (see section 5.1.10 for these values). If the results are within
these tolerances, the focal bias voltage calibration is finished. If the results are out of tolerance,
repeat the calibration procedure in section 5.2 and the check procedure in section 5.3.
Note: Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.
Note: If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of focal
bias voltage for the two points should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure is prob-
ably not being followed correctly.
5.3.10 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of
parameters alpha and beta. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV
dial on the console.
5.3.11 Perform a ”CKSUM”, then turn the system off.
5.3.12 Re–connect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400–PL1 connector XJ7, remove high
voltage cable adapter. Do not forget to secure the HV ring with the Allen screw, to insure proper
ground continuity.
3–14
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER Version No.:

CURRENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The following procedures must have been performed in the following order:
D Job Card IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
D Job Card IST 002 CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
D Job Card IST 016 CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT
D Job Card IST 017 CALIBRATION OF kV SCALE FACTOR
3–15
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER

CURRENT Job Card IST 003 2 of 4
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT
The objective is to determine the X–ray tube heater current necessary for producing the desired X–ray tube
anode current at a given kV value.
The calibration procedure must be performed on each focal size/track combination. Four repetitions of the cal-
ibration procedure are therefore necessary.
Three exposures are taken automatically at different kV values. Using the results, the software calculates the
necessary parameters to determine the X–ray tube heater current needed to produce the desired X–ray tube
anode current for all possible kV values.
5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3) or enter password on console.
JOB CARDS
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to the
service menu.
5.1.2 Select the following menu sequence on the console: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/

TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB
Note: /focal size/track/ must be SF/RH for the first combination performed.
To avoid excessive X-ray doses on the photo-cell tube, place an empty cassette
CAUTION on the top of the image receptor.
5.1.3 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO
2, EXPOSURE NO 3 and CALIBRATION END appear sequentially on the console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.
Note: Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO HOT appears on the
console display when tube temperature is excessive for taking the next exposure. It is not neces-
sary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not exit
the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO HOT message disappears, continue the
calibration by pressing the 2nd trigger button and holding it down.
Note: In case of arcing, the software re–attempts the same exposure automatically.
Note: The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warm–up may be necessary (see Job Card
IST 020 AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP).
3–16
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.4 Repeat sections 5.1.2 to 5.1.3 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations in the follow-
ing order: SF/Mo, LF/Rh, LF/Mo.
5.1.5 Perform this step only if a warning message is displayed.

The generator firmware can display the Limited Ich message on the console at the end of the
tube–current calibration IST 003. This message is only a warning and therefore not associated
with an error code.
Limited Ich (limited heater current) means that one or more filament heating current values were
calculated above 5.6 A (but internally limited to 5.600 A when stored in memory). To handle
this warning, proceed as follows:
1. Access the DMR installation menu to read the heater parameters (the path is: SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/HEATER/LF/MO/Param/I–Value). If necessary, see DMR
menu structure in service manual (Ill. 1–7).
JOB CARDS
2. Explore the 28 kV/A combinations and note the kV values showing a current value equal to
5.600 A.
3. Repeat Step 2. for the LF/RH combination (there is a very low probability of current limitation
occurring in small focus).
4. Return to Application Mode (set–up button).
5. Set the DMR for 2–point exposure technique at 60 mAs. Make an exposure for each kV point
detected at 5.600 A (LF/MO and LF/RH). Allow at least 60 seconds between each exposure.
6. Repeat Steps 1. and 2.: If no more kV point are set to 5.600 A, the problem has been resolved.
If there is still one or more points showing a current value of 5.600 A make Job Card IST 001,
then restart this procedure from Step 1 above. If the problem recurs, replace the X–ray tube.
5.2 Check the results.
5.2.1 Be sure that the gantry presence parameter PRES_A is set to YES before proceeding (see Gantry
Present/Absent in Chapter 1).
5.2.2 Activate the display of parameters following an exposure (see Display of Parameters Following an
Exposure in Chapter 1).
5.2.3 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode (Path is: SETUP/GENE/INSTALL/CKSUM/
CKSUM.
5.2.4 Set up the Senographe DMR for a manual (2–point) exposure at 30 kV and 63 mAs. For each of
the four focal size/track combination, take an exposure following a 3-second preparation time. Note
the resulting X–ray tube anode currents displayed on the console display.
Note: A lower mAs value cannot would decrease the measurement accuracy.
3–17
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.5 The table below shows the expected X–ray tube anode current for each focal size/track combina-
tion:
Value available for Maxiray 70TH–F tube:
LF/RH – 62 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
SF/RH – 35 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
LF/MO – 100 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
SF/MO – 40 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
Value available for GS412 tube:

LF/RH – 75 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
SF/RH – 40 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
LF/MO – 100 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
JOB CARDS
SF/MO – 40 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
5.2.6 If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then
on again.
3–18
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV Version No.:

MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Voltmeter
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THESE CALIBRATION PROCEDURES INVOLVE CONNECTING A

WARNING VOLTMETER TO THE PHOTO-CELL HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIR-
CUITS WHICH OPERATE AT APPROXIMATELY 800 VDC. USE
APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO
THESE CIRCUITS.
In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during these cal-

CAUTION ibration procedures, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the photo-cell board unusable. This can show up as an
error message during power up, and thus inhibit use of the calibration soft-
ware. If this happens, the only way to cancel the error is to manually re–enter
the default parameter value (see sections 5 and 6 for these values) and switch
the Senographe DMR off and back on again before again attempting a cal-
ibration.
These procedures must be done with cables W14 and W15 connected to
CAUTION gantry photo-cell board 800–PL4 connectors XJ3 and XJ2, respectively.
Note: These two calibration procedures must always be done together and in the order presented. Follow
the procedure in section 5 and then the procedure in section 6.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–19
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASU-

REMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 004 2 of 4
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT
The objective is to determine the scale factor F/HV between the real photo-cell HV value and the photo-cell
HV measurement input to the software. This is accomplished by sending a theoretical photo-cell HV command
value of +7.000E+2 (700) V from the software and measuring the real voltage obtained. The measured value
is entered and the software calculates the value of F/HV.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUE IS F/HV = +1.797E+2 (179.7) Hz/V
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3) or enter password on console.
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
JOB CARDS
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
5.1.2 Carefully connect a voltmeter set to 1000 VDC to the photo-cell HV (+ve lead to the terminal lug
on the frame of the gantry photo-cell board 800–PL4 connector XJ2, and –ve lead to the gantry pho-
to-cell board 800–PL4 test point TP1, marked –HT).
5.1.3 Ensure that the gantry is present by selecting SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CON-

FIG/PRES_A/YES on the console (see Gantry Present/Absent (PRES_A) in Chapter 1).
3–20
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/AOP/CELL/ HV/DAC / FREQ/HV /CALIB/CALIB/START.

The message Working appears on the console display.
5.2.2 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize, and note its absolute (positive) value.
5.2.3 Select STOP – the message Done appears on the console display.
5.2.4 Select SETUP/HV_M on the console.
5.2.5 Enter and validate the absolute (positive) value of the voltmeter reading by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).
5.2.6 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID – the message Calcul done appears on the console display.
JOB CARDS
5.3.1 Activate the display of parameters following an exposure by selecting SETUP six times, then
CONFIG/DISP/YES (see Chapter 1, Display of Parameters Following an Exposure).
5.3.2 Perform a CKSUM and return to 2-point application mode.
5.3.3 Press the 1st trigger button and hold it down until the voltmeter reading stabilizes. Note the absolute
(positive) value of the voltmeter reading. Release the 1st trigger button.
5.3.4 Check that the photo-cell HV value displayed on the console display is within ±1%, ±0.1V, plus
voltmeter error, of the voltmeter reading taken in step 5.3.3.
5.3.5 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/CELL/ HV/DAC / FREQ/HV /PARAM on the

console. Note down the calculated gain factor F/HV.
5.3.6 Leave the voltmeter connected and proceed directly to section 6.
SECTION 6
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the photo-cell HV command value
from the software and the real photo-cell HV value obtained. The calibration is fully automatic.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +2.567E–1 (0.2567) AND BETA = +2.184E+0 (2.184).
6.1.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/ HV/DAC /CALIB/START – the messages Working, then Done appear
on the console display.
6.1.2 Select SETUP/PARAM. Write down the calculated values of scale factor alpha and offset beta.
Each of these two values is displayed alternately by rotating the kV dial on the console.
3–21
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/ FREQ/HV /CALIB/REF.
6.2.2 Enter and validate a photo-cell HV reference value of +4.000E+2 (400) V by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).
6.2.3 Select SETUP/CALIB/START – the message Working appears on the console display.
6.2.4 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize. The voltmeter reading must be 400 ±5V. Do not enter
this measured value.
6.2.6 Select SETUP/REF on the console.

JOB CARDS
6.2.7 Enter and validate a photo-cell HV reference value of +6.000E+2 (600) V by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial.
6.2.8 Select SETUP/CALIB/START – the message Working appears on the console display.
6.2.9 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize. The voltmeter reading must be 600 ±5V. Do not enter
this measured value.
6.2.11 Repeat steps 6.2.6 to 6.2.10 using a photo-cell HV reference value of +8.000E+2 (800) V. In this
case, the resulting voltmeter reading must be 800 ±5V.
6.2.12 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If you are handing the machine back to the user
at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.
3–22
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY Version No.:

AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm to insure com-
plete covering of the photo cell)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 004 ”CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FAC-
TOR”
D Remove the protective film from bucky top plate.
Note: In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
3–23
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY

AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Job Card IST 005 2 of 4
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE
The photo cell’s sensitivity to light varies as a function of its voltage. This phenomenon is exploited by the
Senographe DMR to compensate for all the different possible configurations encountered in application mode
(kV, SID, etc.). The Senographe DMR determines the needed photo cell sensitivity for a given configuration
and applies the appropriate photo cell HV.
The objective here is to determine the coefficients beta and gamma that define the relationship between photo
cell HV and photo cell sensitivity. A third coefficient, alpha, is always equal to zero.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +0.000E+0 (0), BETA = +7.377E+0 (7.377) AND
GAMMA = –4.931E+1 (–49.31).
5.1.1 Calibration of heater current.

JOB CARDS
– Set up the senographe DMR in the following configuration:

Mode: Manuel (2–point).
Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid).
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
– Take the exposure
To avoid excessive X–Ray doses on the photo–cell tube, place an empty cas-
CAUTION sette on the top of the image receptor.
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).
5.1.3 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:

6 cm of plexiglass
Contact (no magnification)
SID = 660 mm
No cassette
Note: To insure that the photo cell is fully covered by the plexiglass, be sure that it overlaps the front
edge of the cassette holder by about 1 cm.
3–24
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/CELL/ PM/HV /CALIB on the console.
5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken. If more, or less,
plexiglass is needed to successfully perform the calibration, the message ”not enough plex” or ”too
much plexi” appears on the console display, and the series of exposures is halted.
If this happens:
– Release the 2nd trigger button and, according to the message, either add or remove
1 cm of plexiglass,
– Select SETUP/CALIB on the console,
– Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down again,
JOB CARDS
– Continue the procedure.
5.2.3 When the calibration is successful and complete, the series of X–ray exposures halts automatically
and the message ”calibration end” appears on the console display. At this point, release the 2nd trig-
ger button.
5.2.4 Select SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of parameters beta and
gamma. Each of these values is displayed by rotating the kV dial on the console. Since the third
parameter, alpha, always has a value of zero, it is not necessary to note it down.
Note: The value of alpha MUST be zero. Do not modify it under any circumstances.
5.2.5 Perform a ”CKSUM” and return to application mode. If you’re turning the machine back over to
the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.
3–25
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–26
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND Version No.:

CONFIGURATION Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a

CAUTION screen pair.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–27
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND

CONFIGURATION Job Card IST 006 2 of 4
SECTION 5
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
The objective is to select and configure a screen pair prior to performing AEC calibrations on it.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this procedure.

Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on gen-
erator CPU board 400–PL3).
5.2 Choose the screen pair to be configured and calibrated.

Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x on the con-
sole, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D or E) corresponding to one of the 5 possible screen pairs
JOB CARDS
to be calibrated.
Note: Do not confuse the screen pair indicator with the screen pair name, which is chosen via the proce-
dure in section 5.6. While the 5 screen pair indicators cannot be changed and do not appear in
application mode, each of them can be assigned a screen pair name corresponding to the film/cas-
sette combination used, which appears on the console display in application AOP (0–point) and
AEC (1–point) modes.
5.3 Enable/disable screen pair.

Select SETUP/VALID on the console. This function gives the possibility to enable or disable the use of the
screen pair in application. Select NO to disable and YES to enable the screen pair.
D If yes is selected, then complete the entire calibration of the screen pair (see flow chart of AEC / AOP
calibration; illustration NO TAG; in the installation chapter 1).
D If no is selected, the user could not select the screen pair name which means that the entire calibration
of the screen pair was not completely done.
5.4 Choose screen type.

Screen type would be chosen by selecting TYPE on the console. However, the present version of the Seno-
graphe DMR does not provide any options for screen type. If you select TYPE, be sure to select SETUP before
proceeding to the next section.
5.5 Choose default AOP strategy.

Select STRAT/MEDIUM on the console.
Note: This default AOP strategy value will be verified and changed, if necessary, at the end of screen
pair calibration. This value has no effect on screen pair calibration.
3–28
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.6 Choose screen pair name.

Select SETUP/NAME on the console. Enter and validate the desired screen pair name, which can contain up
to 7 characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, and colon ”:”) – see Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value in Chapter 1 for informa-
tion on entering alpha–numeric values.
This is the name that appears on the console display in application AOP (0–point) and AEC (1–point) modes.
Note: The default screen pair name is the screen pair indicator. See section 5.2.
Typically, this name is an abbreviation of the film and cassette type used to constitute the screen pair being
used. It is a good idea to ask the doctor for suggestions for the screen pair name.
Note: This name can be changed at any time in the future without producing the need to re-perform any
calibrations on the screen pair in question.
5.7 Proceed to the screen pair calibration procedures.
JOB CARDS
Once you have completed the procedures in this Job Card, perform a CKSUM, return to application mode and
proceed directly to Job Card IST 007, Calibration of Photo Cell Gain for a Given Screen Pair.
3–29
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–30
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A Version No.:

GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
Time: hh min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated (same cassette for all the procedure)
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Screen–less cassette simulation tool OR cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated, but with-
JOB CARDS
out its screen (see section 5.2)
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 10 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure
complete coverage of the photo-cell)
Tool reference : 45 203 014 or 46–286893P1 (US pole).
Thickness accuracy of plexiglass plates is mandatory (10 0.2 mm)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
D About checksum, see chapter 1, para. 3–7.
D kV accuracy check (if applicable) followed by kVp recalibration must be performed before this job
card (see IST 033, para. 5.1.11).
D Job Cards IST 004 and IST005 must have been successfully performed.
D In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
3–31
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A

GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 2 of 20
SECTION 5
ADVANCE PREPARATION AND INFORMATION
5.1 Calibration steering. See illustration 1.

ILLUSTRATION 1
IST007 FLOWCHART
START
Other Film/Screen Other Film/Screen combination

First Film/Screen Calib. Combination with with the same Screen
NO another Screen type? NO
Perform section 8
step 1 through 10
JOB CARDS
YES YES
DMR+ set–up for the contact mode:
Sections 6.1/6.2
Calibration without Screen Last Film/Screen

Calibration
Section 6.3 with another NO
Check without Screen
Screen type?
Section 6.4 Copy parameters
Section 8 step 1 through 5
Calibration with Screen YES
Section 6.5
Perform DMR+ set–up for the contact mode:
Check with Screen
Section 7 Sections 6.1/6.2
Section 6.6
Calibration with Screen
Section 6.5
DMR+ set–up for the Magnification
mode Check with Screen
Section 6.7 Section 6.6
Calibration without Screen

Section 6.8 DMR+ set–up for the Magnification
mode
Check without Screen Section 6.7
Section 6.9
Section 6.10
Section 6.10
Check with Screen
Check with Screen
Section 6.11
Section 6.11
END
END
3–32
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2 Information about cassettes and films used in these procedures
5.2.1 Determine whether or not the screen–less cassette simulation tool can be used.
The screen–less simulation tool can be used only if the cassette of the screen pair being calibrated
is among the following:
– KODAK Min–R 2
– FUJI MA
– AGFA–GEVAERT MAMORAY
– 3M
– DUPONT
– KONICA
If the cassette of the screen pair being installed is not among these models, the screen–less cassette
JOB CARDS
simulation tool cannot be used. In this case, a normal cassette of the type used in the screen pair
being calibrated must be used, but without its screen.
Note: If a screen–less cassette simulation tool is not available, any of the cassette models listed above,
without its screen*, can be used during calibration of any screen pair that uses any of the models
in the list. For example, if you’re calibrating a screen pair that uses the 3M cassette, you can use
a KODAK Min–R 2 cassette without its screen. However, if you are calibrating a screen pair that
uses a cassette model that is not on this list, you must use a cassette of that exact model, without
its screen.
* When removing the screen from a cassette, be sure to leave the layer of plastic foam intact in
the cassette.
3–33
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.2 Learn how to use the screen–less cassette simulation tool.

If used, the screen–less cassette simulation tool must always be loaded with an undeveloped film
of the type used in the screen pair being calibrated, as shown in illustration 1.
Note: It is normal for the film not to lie flat at the rear edge of the film holding area. The rear edge of
the film holding area was in fact designed to insure that the FRONT edge of the film butts up per-
fectly against the front edge of the film holding area. This is critical, because the photo-cell is
located towards the front edge of the bucky and must be maximally covered by the film.
The loaded screen–less cassette simulation tool must be installed in the Senographe DMR cassette
holder or in the bucky in the same way as an ordinary cassette.
Be sure to orient the simulation tool in the cassette holder with its front edge
CAUTION coinciding with the front edge of the bucky, as shown in illustration 1.
JOB CARDS
Note: Whenever the instructions in this Job Card instruct you to install the loaded cassette (without
screen) install the loaded simulation tool instead, if permitted (see section 5.2.1 above).
5.2.3 Each of the two cassettes (with and without screen) used in these procedures must be loaded with
undeveloped film of the type used in the screen pair being calibrated.
– The same two cassettes must be used for all procedures in this Job Card.
– The same undeveloped films can be left in the cassettes for all procedures in this Job
Card.
– Mark the cassette without screen clearly so as not to confuse it with the cassette with
screen (not applicable if screen–less cassette simulation tool is used).
5.3 Advance preparation if a new screen pair is being introduced

Select and configure a screen pair (see Job Card IST 006).
3–34
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
SCREEN–LESS CASSETTE SIMULATION TOOL
Screen–less cassette simulation tool
Rear edge (away from patient)
Rear edge of
film does not
lie flat against
simulation tool
JOB CARDS
Front edge (towards patient)
Undeveloped film
Film must be loaded with its front edge butted

up against the front rim of the simulation tool
Note: The loaded screen–less cassette simulation tool must be installed in

the cassette holder or in the bucky of the Senographe DMR, oriented
as shown.
3–35
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.4 General instructions to be observed during all procedures in this Job Card
5.4.1 The photo-cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.
Note: Number the plexiglass plates from 1 to 6 and use the same plates for the same thickness.
5.4.2 When selecting plexiglass thicknesses (2, 4 or 6 cm) in the menus between exposure sequences,
never go up in the menu structure higher than indicated in the procedure being performed. Doing
so will reset stored intermediate values and ruin the calibration. Also, once all three thicknesses
have been calibrated, follow the instructions immediately for performing the calculation. Select
SETUP no more than the precise number of times indicated, again at the risk of losing intermediate
values prior to the calculation.
5.4.3 On the other hand, if an error is made during the calibration of one of the three plexiglass thicknesses
JOB CARDS
(for example, the plexiglass was incorrectly placed or is not the correct thickness), then you must
go upward in the menus (by selecting SETUP a certain number of times) at least to the level that
gives the choices GRID, SCREEN and CALIB (just below PM_YLD). Here you reset the inter-
mediate values intentionally, and you must repeat all three thickness calibrations.
5.4.4 Normally, this Job Card is used when a new screen pair is being introduced. In this case, follow the
procedures in this Job Card in the exact order shown.
5.4.5 If, however, only part of the photo-cell gain calibration is being done (e.g. because of a mistake dur-
ing a certain part of the calibration), the procedures can be performed independently of the others,
but be sure to read and carry out all preliminary preparations and procedures associated with the
procedure in question.
5.4.6 When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder or 1.5 magnification device, the plexiglass must
always overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo-cell is
fully covered.
5.4.7 When taking a series of calibration exposures, if arcing occurs, the arcing message appears on the
console display. This does not mean that the series must be repeated (i.e. the software keeps track
of which exposures in the series were successful even if it must repeat one due to arcing). Only if
there were a serious arcing problem would the software abort the series, in which case it would have
to be repeated.
5.4.8 If you are in the middle of IST 007, and must stop, continue at another time, there are certain steps
that you need not repeat. For example:
D if you have completed step 6.4.13, then you can start with step 6.5
D if you have completed step 6.6.13, then you can start with step 6.7
D if you have completed step 6.9.12, then you can start with step 6.10.
3–36
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

SECTION 6
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN
The objective is to determine the X–ray absorption of the screen. The calibration software achieves this by sub-
tracting the photo-cell gain obtained with a screen from the photo-cell gain obtained without a screen.
Therefore, each configuration must be calibrated twice – once with and once without a screen.
6 coefficients are calculated for each of 5 track/filter combinations. Thus, 30 coefficients are calculated for
each of 4 different cases (2 configurations, each calibrated once with and once without a screen), for a total
of 120 coefficients.
6.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for these procedures.
JOB CARDS
6.1.2 Set the SID to that used by the user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm.
6.2 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedures using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ).

18 x 24 compression paddle installed
Contact (no magnification)
Bucky with Grid installed
SID as indicated in section 6.1.2
6.2.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/

FSC=x on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. See Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGU-
RATION
6.2.3 Select CALIB/PM_yld/GRID/YES on the console. This sets up the calibration for the with grid
procedure.
3–37
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.3 Perform the procedure using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen.
6.3.1 Be sure to be familiar with the advance preparation and information given in section 5 before pro-
ceeding, especially the information concerning the use, if permitted, of the screen–less cassette sim-
ulation tool. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.2 before
proceeding.
6.3.2 Select SETUP/SCREEN/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the cassette without
screen procedure.
6.3.3 Install the loaded cassette (without screen).
BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITHOUT SCREEN IS

WARNING INSTALLED BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.4 WILL NOT
SHOW AN ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
JOB CARDS
6.3.4 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the bucky 18 x 24.
6.3.5 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.
6.3.6 Select SETUP/CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount
of plexiglass present.
6.3.7 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.
6.3.8 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken (at least 25).
6.3.9 When the series of exposures is complete, the message thick plexi end appears on the console dis-
play. At this point, release the 2nd trigger button.
6.3.10 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 4 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/4 cm on the console.
6.3.11 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.3.7 to 6.3.9.
6.3.14 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the 6 coefficients
(A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, and B2) for each of 5 track/filter combinations. The message PM_yld cal end
appears on the console display.
6.3.15 Proceed immediately to section 6.4 to check calibration accuracy.
3–38
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.4 Check the contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen calibration accuracy.
Note: This check must always be made immediately after performing the calibration procedure in sec-
tion 6.3.
6.4.1 Copy the without screen parameters for the screen pair being calibrated to the with screen parameter
location of an unused screen pair (generally E) by following this procedure:
– Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/
FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to the
screen pair being calibrated.
– Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/YES.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the unused screen pair.
JOB CARDS
Be very sure of the choice of unused screen pair indicator y (A, B, C, D or E).
CAUTION If a mistake is made, there is a risk of erasing good parameter values on
another screen pair that is in use.
– Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct (see CAUTION above),
copy the parameters by selecting SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message
COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
6.4.2 If necessary, enable use of the unused screen pair. (From application mode, select SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=y/VALID/YES on the console.)
6.4.3 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Display of Parameters
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.
6.4.4 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.
6.4.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.2.1.
6.4.7 Put 60 mm of plexiglass on the bucky.
3–39
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.4.9 Set up the following exposure:

Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: y (this is the indicator of the unused screen pair chosen in section 6.4.1)
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
6.4.10 Take a short exposure. It is not necessary for the exposure to be complete, so the 2nd trigger button
can be released as soon as X–rays are being produced.
Note: Even if exposure is aborted due to insufficient available mAs, the thickness displayed on the con-
sole is useable. It is NOT USEFUL to wait for the tube to cool and repeat the exposure.
JOB CARDS
6.4.11 Note in the Job Card IST043 (IST007 data section) the thickness displayed on the console after the
exposure. It must be equal to the plexiglass thickness ±2 mm.
6.4.12 Repeat sections 6.4.8 to 6.4.11 using 4 cm and 2 cm of plexiglass.
6.4.13 If the displayed thickness is outside the tolerance given in section 6.4.11, first check that the correct
screen pair was selected in section 6.4.9. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (con-
tact mode with grid and cassette without screen, section 6.3) was probably done incorrectly. That
procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be repeated (this
can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).
Note: See formula in Job card IST043 (IST007 data):

Delta (4cm) must be greater than Delta (2cm) and Delta (6cm)
absolute value(Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.
6.5 Perform the procedure using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen.
ceeding. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.2 before
proceeding.

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/PM_yld on the console,
where x is the screen pair being calibrated. This sets up the calibration for the cassette with screen
procedure.
6.5.3 Install the loaded cassette (with screen).
BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITH SCREEN IS INSTALLED

WARNING BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.6 WILL NOT SHOW AN ERROR
DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
3–40
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.5.4 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.5.6 Select CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount of plexi-
glass present.
6.5.9 When the series of exposures is complete, the message ”thick calib end” appears on the console dis-
JOB CARDS
6.6 Check the contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen calibration accuracy.
tion 6.5.
6.6.1 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. Display of Parameters Fol-
lowing an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.
6.6.2 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/YES on the console.)
6.6.4 Select the screen pair being calibrated and verify that its name is as entered in Job Card IST 006
6.6.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.2.1.
3–41
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.6.7 Put 6 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.

Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO; Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: MAXIMAL SIZE
JOB CARDS
screen pair was selected in section 6.6.9. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (con-
tact mode with grid and cassette with screen, section 6.5) was probably done incorrectly. That pro-
cedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be repeated (this
can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

6.7 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedure using magnification mode without grid.
Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:
D 18 x 24 cm compression paddle installed .
D Magnification device installed (always in the bottom holes)
Note: Magnification of 1.5 if the SID = 660 and Magnification of 1.4 if the SID = 610
D Cassette holder 18 x 24 in place ( no grid ).
D SID as indicated in section 6.1.2
D Perform all the magnification calibration (with and without screen) in maximal collimation size.
At each time you move the magnification plate, the collimation is set by default in minimal size 9x9.
3–42
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.8 Perform the procedure using magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette
without screen.
ceeding, especially the information concerning the use, if permitted, of the screen–less cassette sim-
ulation tool. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.7 before
proceeding.

RATION
6.8.3 Select CALIB/PM_YLD/GRID/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the without
grid procedure.
JOB CARDS
6.8.4 Select SETUP/SCREEN/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the cassette without
screen procedure.
BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITHOUT SCREEN IS

WARNING INSTALLED BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.9 WILL NOT
SHOW AN ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
6.8.6 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
6.8.8 Check for maximal collimation size.
Note: The small focus is automatically selected during this calibration.
6.8.13 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 40 mm. Select SETUP/
3–43
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.9 Check the magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen calibra-
tion accuracy.
tion 6.8.
6.9.1 Copy the without screen parameters for the screen pair being calibrated to the with screen parameter
location of an unused screen pair (generally E) by following this procedure:
JOB CARDS
– Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/

FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to the
screen pair being calibrated.
– Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/YES.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the unused screen pair.
Be very sure of the choice of unused screen pair indicator y (A, B, C, D or E).
CAUTION If a mistake is made, there is a risk of erasing good parameter values on
another screen pair that is in use.
– Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct (see CAUTION above),
copy the parameters by selecting SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message
COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2
6.9.4 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.7.
3–44
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


Screen pair: y (this is the indicator of the unused screen pair chosen in section 6.9.1)
Focal spot: SMALL (IMPORTANT for thickness accuracy)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: maximal size.
JOB CARDS
screen pair was selected in section 6.9.8. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (1.5
magnification mode without grid and cassette without screen, section 6.8) was probably done incor-
rectly. That procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be
repeated (this can be done independently of the contact mode procedures in this Job Card).

6.10 Perform the procedure using magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette with
screen.
ceeding. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.7 before
proceeding.

RATION
6.10.3 Select CALIB/PM_YLD/GRID/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the without
grid procedure.
3–45
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITH SCREEN IS INSTALLED

WARNING BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.11 WILL NOT SHOW AN
ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
6.10.7 Check for maximal collimation size.
JOB CARDS
Note: The small focus is automatically selected during this calibration.
6.11 Check the magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen calibration
accuracy.
tion 6.10.
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.
3–46
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.11.2 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/YES on the console.)
6.11.4 Select the screen pair being calibrated and verify that its name is as entered in Job Card IST 006
6.11.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.7.
JOB CARDS
Focal spot: SMALL (IMPORTANT for thickness accuracy)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: maximal size.
6.11.11 Note in Job Card IST043 the thickness displayed on the console after the exposure. It must be equal
to the plexiglass thickness ±2 mm.
3–47
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

screen pair was selected in section 6.11.9. – otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (1.5
magnification mode without grid and cassette with-screen, section 6.10) was probably done incor-
rectly. That procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, will have to be
repeated (it can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

6.11.14 It is ESSENTIAL to disable the UNUSED screen pair y that was used to test the without-screen
parameters (from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/
ALGO/FSC=y/VALID/NO).
6.11.15 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from application mode, select SETUP/
JOB CARDS
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO, but see CAUTION in section

3.)
SECTION 7
CALIBRATING THE 5TH COUPLE (ONLY)
Perform this calibration only when you need to calibrate the 5th couple.
Presuming that the last free couple is E the procedure is as shown below.
7.1 Perform the no-screen/contact-mode calibration (similar to the procedure in Section 6.3)
7.2 Copy E no-screen to E with-screen and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.4)
7.3 Repeat 7.1 and 7.2 in magnification-mode (similar to the procedure in Sections 6.8 & 6.9)
7.4 Perform the with-screen/contact-mode calibration and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.6 & 6.5)
7.5 Repeat 7.4 in magnification-mode and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.10 & 6.11).
Note: The above method could be applied to all couples, but is more time-consuming.
SECTION 8
COPY OF PARAMETERS FOR ANOTHER FILM/SCREEN COMBINATION
Perform this procedure VERY CAREFULLY and EXACTLY as given

CAUTION below. Failure to copy the parameters correctly could ruin the calibration of
existing calibrated screen pairs.
3–48
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

1. Starting from application mode, select (see illustration 1–10)

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
2. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to an existing calibrated
screen pair using the same cassette as the screen pair currently being calibrated.
3. Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/NO.
4. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the screen pair being calibrated.
5. Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct, copy the without screen parameters by select-
ing SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
6. Select SETUP/SOURCE/SCREEN/YES on the console.
JOB CARDS
7. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to an existing calibrated
screen pair using the same cassette as the screen pair currently being calibrated.
8. Select SETUP/SETUP/TARGET/SCREEN/YES.
9. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the screen pair being calibrated.
10. Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct, copy the with screen parameters by selecting
SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.
3–49
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–50
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
D 6 mm Allen wrench
JOB CARDS
D Claw hammer or other suitable tool for removing packing nails
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
CAUTION Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–51
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT

Job Card IST 008 2 of 4
SECTION 5
The objective is to unpack the gantry, generator and accessories and move them to the mammography room.
5.1 Inspect for damage and perform initial unpacking.

The Senographe DMR was completely inspected for proper operation and appearance before shipment. How-
ever, it is necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received. Visually inspect the packages for any
apparent damage. If there are signs of damage, refer to the Damage in Transportation statement in the front
of this manual.
Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on the list are present
in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.
5.2 Perform initial unpacking.

JOB CARDS
5.2.1 Remove the outer cardboard covering from the crate.
5.2.2 Remove ramp from crate and put it in place.
5.2.3 Remove the protective screen and the other accessories from the crate and move them into the mam-
mography room.
5.3 Unpack gantry.
5.3.1 Use the 6 mm Allen wrench to remove the four gantry baseplate shipping hold–down screws.
5.3.2 Thread the four special jacking bolts (provided in the accessory pouch) into their respective holes
in the gantry baseplate. Place the four flat round jack feet (provided in the accessory pouch) on the
floor of the crate with their nipples facing upwards. Continue turning the jacking bolts downwards
until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the jack feet.
5.3.3 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts.
5.3.4 When gantry baseplate is high enough to be clear of the wooden support blocks, remove these
blocks.
5.3.5 Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by the castors.
5.3.6 Leave the four special jacking bolts threaded into the gantry baseplate and keep the jack feet aside
(the jack feet will be used again when installing the gantry).
3–52
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.7 Carefully roll the gantry down the ramp and into the mammography room.
5.4 Unpack generator.
5.4.1 Remove the supports from the generator cabinet.
5.4.2 Carefully roll the generator down the ramp and into the mammography room.
JOB CARDS
3–53
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–54
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: PHYSICAL INSTALLATION Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
D 8 mm Allen wrench
JOB CARDS
D Drill
D Screwdrivers
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 008 ”UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT”
SECTION 5
PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
The objective is to place and anchor physically the gantry in its permanent position, and to assemble the protec-
tive screen.
Note: The generator is not permanently installed in this Job Card because it must remain mobile until
the wiring between it and the gantry is complete (Job Card IST 010 ”WIRING”). The generator
must therefore remain on its castors for the moment.
The ”CE” marking label, located on one of the large side panels of the generator, must remain vis-
ible after installation of the generator.
3–55
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
5.1 Install and anchor the gantry into its permanent position.
D Before you proceed, it is recommended to perform a final verification of the information given in the Pre–
Installation Manual, particularly concerning clearances around the gantry when installed in its permanent
position.
D If no Stereotix 2 is to be installed, the anchoring is not mandatory, only recommended (except in seismic
area).
5.1.1 Place the drilling template (provided in the installation kit) flat on the floor, align it with the desired
permanent position and mark the three gantry mounting hole centers on the floor.
5.1.2 Drill the three gantry mounting holes (depth and diameter depend on the type of insert to be used
– see below).
5.1.3 Place the appropriate type of insert (not provided) into each of the three mounting holes (depending
JOB CARDS
on the type and thickness of floor). The inserts should be able to receive the 10 x 80 mm screws (pro-
vided), or, for U.S. installations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).
5.1.4 Wheel the gantry so that its three baseplate mounting holes are aligned with the three holes drilled
in the floor.
5.1.5 Place the four flat round jack feet on the floor with their nipples facing upwards.
5.1.6 Turn the four jacking bolts downwards until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the four
jack feet.
5.1.7 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts until the castors are clear of the floor.
5.1.8 Use the 8 mm Allen wrench to remove the castors.
5.1.9 Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by its baseplate.
Remove the four jacking bolts completely.
Note: The four jack feet remain below the gantry baseplate. If the floor is not perfectly even, level the
DMR base using the 4 screws PN 45562657 (provided in installation kit). Insert them in place
of the jacking blots to push on the jack feet.
5.1.10 To provide access to all three gantry baseplate mounting holes (one of the holes is located inside
the gantry column), remove the two column side panels (see IST 032 if necessary).
5.1.11 Bolt the gantry to the floor with the three 10 x 80 mm diameter screws (provided) or, for U.S. instal-
lations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).
5.1.12 Cover all unused gantry baseplate holes with the plastic plugs provided.
5.2 Assemble the protective screen.

See the mounting instructions delivered with the X–ray shield (one to three panels). Anchoring to the floor
is not mandatory (except in seismic areas).
3–56
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: WIRING Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D HV grease
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Standard set of socket wrenches and/or nut drivers
JOB CARDS
D Standard set of open end wrenches
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The chronological order given in Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be followed.
3–57
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
SECTION 5
CONNECTION OF CABLES BETWEEN GANTRY, GENERATOR AND CONSOLE
The objective is to connect all cables between the generator, gantry and console, and to connect X–ray lamp
and room lamp wires to the generator, if used.
Note: The mains cable is NOT connected in this Job Card. This operation is performed in
Job Card IST 011 ”CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY”.
5.1 Route cable bundle between gantry and generator.

This section describes the routing of the cable bundle between the gantry and generator. All connections of
this cable bundle are already made in the gantry; it is only necessary to route it between the gantry and generator
and make the connections in the generator.
Note: THE ROUTING PROCEDURE FOR THE CABLE BUNDLE IS VERY CRITICAL. TO AVOID
JOB CARDS
HAVING TO UN–DO YOUR WORK AND CORRECT IT, BE SURE TO FOLLOW THE
INSTRUCTIONS IN THE EXACT ORDER GIVEN. READ EACH STEP COMPLETELY
BEFORE STARTING TO PERFORM IT.
5.1.1 Be sure that the gantry is placed exactly in its permanent position.
5.1.2 Be sure that the generator is placed approximately in its permanent position (it may be necessary
to move the generator slightly in order to route and attach certain wires and cables inside the genera-
tor cabinet).
Note: The generator cabinet should still be easy to move as it should still be on its castors at this point.
Note: Be sure that the generator is placed with HV unit 701 closest to the gantry.
5.1.3 Free the cable bundle from the gantry and lay it out flat and free of kinks and twists.
3–58
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.1.4 Identify inner bundles 1 and 2 at the free end of the cable bundle.
– Inner bundle 1 consists of:
– HV cable
– X–ray tube anode current return wire (”BLOC +HT”)
– Emergency ”OFF” switch wires (”300 PL3 XJ 5”)
– Anode starter cable (”G300 PL2 XJ2”) with its green/yellow ground wire
– Inner bundle 2 consists of:
– Green/yellow ground wire (”45553495”)
– Gantry +27 VDC supply (”200 PL2 XJ6”)
– Gantry +27 VDC current return (”200 PL2 XJ7”)
JOB CARDS
– 4 optical fibers (”400 PL2 XJ6”, ”400 PL2 XJ7”, ”400 PL2 XJ8”, and ”400 PL2 XJ9”)
5.1.5 Feed the free end of the cable bundle UNDER the generator cabinet (see illustration 1):
7. Pass the free end of the cable bundle via the narrow side of the generator cabinet closest to HV
unit 701.
8. Carefully pull the free end of the cable bundle via one of the two wide sides of the generator cabi-
net until all slack between the gantry and generator is taken up.
Note: The choice of which wide side of the generator cabinet must be made by the service engineer who
must judge which side will facilitate cable bundle installation. Illustration 1 shows both possibili-
ties.
Note: When this step is finished, the entire cable bundle should be on the floor of the mammography
room. All excess cable bundle should be laid out flat and free of kinks and twists next to the wide
side of the generator cabinet.
3–59
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.1.6 Roll up excess cable bundle as shown in illustration 1, taking the following guidelines into account:
– Be sure to choose the direction of spiral rotation according to your choice of generator
side, as shown in illustration 1.
– The resulting roll must consist of only one layer (i.e. all the rolled up excess cable bundle
must be flat on the floor).
– The diameter of the roll must not exceed 35 cm.
– The orientation of inner bundles 1 and 2 must be EXACTLY as shown in illustration 1
(i.e. inner bundle 1 towards the HV unit side of the generator cabinet and inner bundle
2 towards the opposite side).
– Inner bundle 2 must pass BELOW inner bundle 1.
If any of the above guidelines is not met, re–arrange (and re–roll, if necessary), the excess cable
bundle until all the guidelines are met. THIS IS THE CRITICAL POINT WHICH DETER-
JOB CARDS
MINES THE SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF THIS JOB CARD.
5.1.7 Slide the excess cable bundle roll under the generator so that it protrudes from the opposite side of
the cabinet by about 10 cm. Be sure that inner bundles 1 and 2 are still oriented as given in the guide-
lines in section 5.1.6 above.
5.1.8 Slide the entire excess cable bundle roll completely under the generator cabinet.
3–60
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
ILLUSTRATION 1
INITIAL PREPARATION OF GANTRY–GENERATOR CABLE BUNDLE (TOP VIEW)
GANTRY 800
GENERATOR CABINET
HV UNIT
701
JOB CARDS
INNER BUNDLE 2
INNER BUNDLE 1
35 CM MAX.
OR
INNER BUNDLE 2
INNER BUNDLE 1
35 CM MAX.
HV UNIT
701
GENERATOR CABINET
GANTRY 800
3–61
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.2 Route and connect the wires and cables from inner bundle 1 (and X–ray lamp and room lamp wires
if used) inside the generator cabinet (illustration 2).
Note: It is recommended to wait until all cables and wires in inner bundle 1 (and X–ray lamp and room
lamp wires if used) are routed and connected inside the generator cabinet before attaching any
wires or cables with tie–wraps.
5.2.1 Route and connect HV cable.
1. Route inner bundle 1 out from beneath the generator cabinet on the HV unit side. Separate HV
cable from other cables in inner bundle 1.
2. Apply HV grease to the HV cable connector.
3. Route the HV cable above the horizontal cross–member of the generator cabinet, then down
towards HV unit 701. See illustration 2.
JOB CARDS
4. Connect the HV cable connector to HV unit 701.
5. Tighten carefully the HV connector ring. Tighten the small 1.5 mm screw located on the ring,
to insure proper grounding of the HV cable.
Note: In case of no proper grounding of HV cable, intermittent console lockup and random error mes-
sages could occur. Always check grounding at both ends of HV cable in case of problem.
5.2.2 Route and connect X–ray tube anode current return wire.
1. Separate X–ray tube anode current return wire (marked ”BLOC +HT”) from inner bundle 1.
2. Route this wire as shown in illustration 2.
3. Locate the threaded stud marked with a ground symbol ” ” on the top cover of HV unit 701.
4. Connect X–ray tube anode current return wire to this stud by carefully removing the retaining
nut with a nut driver or socket wrench, adding this wire to the others, and replacing the nut.
Do not tighten this nut excessively, as HV unit 701 is sealed and can only be
CAUTION serviced in the factory.
3–62
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.2.3 Route and connect emergency off switch wire.
1. Separate emergency off switch wire (marked ”300 PL3 XJ5”) from inner bundle 1.
3. Locate connector XJ5 on generator anode security board 300 PL3 and connect this wire to it.
5.2.4 Route and connect anode starter cable and its ground wire.
1. Separate anode starter cable (marked ”G300 PL2 XJ2”) from inner bundle 1.
2. Route this cable as shown in illustration 2.
3. Locate connector XJ2 on generator anode starter board 300 PL2 and connect this cable to it.
4. Use a socket wrench or nut driver to remove CAREFULLY the ground screw located on the
JOB CARDS
sheet metal frame of generator power conversion assembly 300, just below generator anode
starter board 300 PL2. Add the yellow/green ground wire from the anode starter cable to the
other existing ground wires, and then replace the ground screw.
Do not tighten this screw excessively, as there is no nut on the opposite side
CAUTION of the sheet metal ; there is only a threaded hole in the sheet metal.
5.2.5 Route and connect X–ray lamp and/or room lamp wires (field supplied – if used).
1. Route these wires as shown in illustration 2.
2. Locate connectors XJ12 and XJ11 on generator mains distribution board 200 PL1.
3. Connect X–ray lamp wires to connector XJ12 and room lamp wires to connector XJ11.
Note: The rating of both relays 200 PL1 X3 and X4 is :

1 Amp, 250 VAC for AC supply
or 2 Amp, 30 VDC for DC supply.
3–63
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.2.6 Attach inner bundle 1, X–ray lamp and room lamp wires and cables to generator cabinet.
1. Arrange HV cable neatly as shown in illustration 2, then attach it to the lower and middle genera-
tor cabinet cross–members with two tie–wraps as shown (one tie–wrap on each cross–member).
2. Arrange the remaining cables and wires from inner bundle 1 as shown in illustration 2, then
attach them to the lower and middle generator cabinet cross–members with two tie–wraps as
shown (one tie–wrap on each cross–member).
Note: X–ray tube anode current return wire ”BLOC +HT” is attached only to the lower generator cabinet
cross member.
3. Arrange X–ray lamp and room lamp wires (if used) as shown in illustration 2, then attach them
to the lower and middle generator cabinet cross–members with two tie–wraps as shown (one
tie–wrap on each cross–member).
JOB CARDS
3–64
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
ILLUSTRATION 2
ROUTING OF CABLES WITHIN INNER BUNDLE 1 AND X–RAY AND ROOM LAMP WIRES
300 PL2 400 PL1
JOB CARDS
EMERGENCY OFF
SWITCH WIRE
”300 PL3 XJ5” ANODE STARTER
300 PL3 CABLE ”G300 PL2 XJ2”
ÈÈ
ÈÈ ÈÈ
X–RAY LAMP AND
ROOM LAMP WIRES
(FIELD SUPPLIED)
ÈÈ
ÈÈ ÈÈ HV CABLE
200 PL1 200 PL2
X–RAY TUBE ANODE

CURRENT RETURN HV UNIT 701
ÈÈ
WIRE ”BLOC +HT”
ÈÈ = TIE–WRAP
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ INNER BUNDLE 1
3–65
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.3 Route and connect the wires and cables from inner bundle 2 and console cable inside the generator
cabinet (illustration 3).
Note: It is recommended to wait until all cables and wires in inner bundle 2 and console cable are routed
and connected inside the generator cabinet before attaching any wires or cables with tie–wraps.
5.3.1 Route and connect generator–gantry ground wire.
1. Route inner bundle 2 out from beneath the generator cabinet on the mains input (i.e. non–HV
unit) side. Separate yellow/green generator–gantry ground wire (marked ”45553495”) from
other wires and cables in inner bundle 2.
3. Locate the grounding strip just behind generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1.
JOB CARDS
4. Use a nut driver or socket wrench to remove one of the AVAILABLE grounding screws from
this grounding strip.
5. Attach the generator–gantry ground wire to the grounding strip with this screw, being sure to
place the lockwasher onto the screw shaft before re–installing it.
Do not tighten this screw excessively, as there is no nut on the opposite side
CAUTION of the sheet metal; there is only a threaded hole in the sheet metal.
5.3.2 Route and connect gantry +27 VDC supply and current return wires.
1. Separate gantry +27 VDC supply and current return wires (marked ”200 PL2 XJ6” and
”200 PL2 XJ7”, respectively) from other wires and cables in inner bundle 2.
2. Route these wires as shown in illustration 3.
3. Use a nut driver or socket wrench to remove carefully the retaining nuts from connectors XJ6
and XJ7 of generator Mains Control board 200 PL2. Add each of these two wires to its respective
connector and replace the retaining nuts, tightening them gently with the nut driver or socket
wrench.
3–66
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.3.3 Route and connect optical fiber cables.
Optical fiber cables and their connectors are more delicate than ordinary
CAUTION electrical cables. Handle them with care.
1. Separate the black flexible tubing containing the four optical fiber cables (marked
”400 PL2 XJ6”, ”400 PL2 XJ7”, ”400 PL2 XJ8”, and ”400 PL2 XJ9”) from other wires and
cables in inner bundle 2.
2. Route this tubing as shown in illustration 3.
3. Locate optical fiber connectors XJ6, XJ7, XJ8 and XJ9 on generator interface board 400 PL2.
CAREFULLY connect each of these four optical fiber cables to its respective connector.
JOB CARDS
5.3.4 Route and connect console cable.
1. Route console cable (provided in the accessory pouch) as shown in illustration 3.
Note: Console cable goes on INSIDE of middle generator cross–member.
2. Locate connector XJ8 on generator command board 400 PL1 and connect this cable to it.
3. Route and connect opposite end of console cable to the console.
Be sure to tighten connector retaining screws FINGER TIGHT ONLY at

CAUTION each end of console cable.
5.3.5 Attach inner bundle 2 and console cables to generator cabinet.
1. Leaving sufficient slack to avoid stress on the optical fiber connectors, attach optical fiber cable
tubing to the middle generator cabinet cross–member with a tie–wrap as shown in illustration 3.
2. Arrange optical fiber cable tubing and console cable neatly as shown in illustration 3, then
attach them to the lower generator cabinet cross–member with a tie–wrap as shown.
3. Arrange generator–gantry ground wire and gantry +27VDC supply and current return wires
neatly as shown in illustration 3, then attach them to the lower generator cabinet cross–member
with a tie–wrap as shown.
3–67
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
ILLUSTRATION 3
ROUTING OF CABLES WITHIN INNER BUNDLE 2 AND CONSOLE CABLE
400 PL3
300 PL1
JOB CARDS
400 PL2
CONSOLE CABLE
200 PL2
ÈÈ
GANTRY +27VDC
SUPPLY AND CUR-
RENT RETURN
ÈÈ TIE–WRAP MUST
WIRES ”200 PL2 XJ6” BE PLACED
AND ”200 PL2 XJ7” AROUND THE
OPTICAL FIBER
GENERATOR– CABLE COMMON
GANTRY TUBING
GROUND WIRE
”45553495” 200 PL1
OPTICAL GENERATOR CABINET

FIBER GROUNDING STRIP
CABLES
”400 PL2 XJ6”,
”400 PL2 XJ7”,
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
”400 PL2 XJ8”,
AND ”400 PL2
XJ9”
INNER BUNDLE 2
ÈÈ
CONSOLE CABLE
ÈÈ = TIE–WRAP
3–68
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
5.4 Install generator cabinet in its permanent position.
1. Roll the generator exactly to its permanent position.
2. Using an open–end wrench, turn the four jack–screws at the bottom of the generator cabinet so
that all four castors are clear of the mammography room floor and the generator cabinet is stand-
ing stable and level on the jack–screws.
JOB CARDS
3–69
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
WIRING
Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–70
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D a.c. voltmeter
D torque measurement wrench (optional)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Follow standard safety techniques and procedures for handling equipment and circuits that can come into con-
tact with mains supply voltages.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
SECTION 5
CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY
The objective is to determine the characteristics (i.e. nominal voltage, frequency and number of phases) of the
available power source, configure the Senographe DMR generator accordingly, and connect it to the power
source.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, all boards and components referred to in this Job Card are contained
in Mains Interface Assembly 200 of the Senographe DMR generator.
5.1 Determine if available mains supply is mono– or tri–phase.

If a tri–phase mains supply is available in the mammography room, use all three phases to power the Seno-
graphe DMR by wiring it according to the tri–phase configurations below. If only two phases, or one phase
and neutral are available, wire the Senographe DMR according to the mono–phase configurations below, tak-
ing special care to configure fuses F1, F2 and F3 as specified in section 5.6 .
Note: Recommended torque to tighten all lug nuts is 4 N.m (Newton. meter)
3–71
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2 Check nominal line voltage and frequency.

Consult the user or the local electrical utility to determine nominal line voltage and frequency.
Measure open–circuit line voltage. Verify that it corresponds to the nominal line voltage (as determined above)
± 10%. Possible nominal line voltages are 200, 208, 220 and 240 V for mono–phase only, and 380 and 415
V for mono– or tri–phase.
5.3 Position voltage selection boards.

Position and attach voltage selection boards IN1 and IN2 to generator Mains Distribution board 200–PL1
according to nominal mains voltage and number of phases. See illustration 1 and table 1 below.
5.4 Configure the Senographe DMR according to line frequency.

The Senographe DMR operates with either a 50 or 60 Hz line frequency without adjustment.
5.5 Position mains voltage selection wire ”SEL”.

JOB CARDS
Position and connect mains voltage selection wire ”SEL” to the lug on generator Mains Distribution board
200–PL1 corresponding to the nominal (NOT measured) line voltage determined in section 5.2. See illustra-
tion 1 and table 1 below.
Note: The ”0V” lug is reserved exclusively for performing the procedure given in Job Card IST 012
”LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT”. The Senographe DMR cannot function normally
when the ”SEL” wire is in this position.
5.6 Configure fuses F1, F2 and F3.

Follow the indications on the label located on the bottom of the generator cabinet, just below mains supply
switch S1, for configuring these fuses. Also see illustration 3 below.
TO ASSURE SAFE OPERATION OF THE SENOGRAPHE DMR, PAY

WARNING PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO THE INFORMATION ON THIS LABEL
FOR MONO–PHASE INSTALLATIONS. BE SURE TO DETERMINE IF
THE MAINS SUPPLY CONSISTS OF TWO PHASES OF A THREE–
PHASE SYSTEM, OR A SINGLE PHASE AND NEUTRAL. FOR A
SINGLE–PHASE WITH NEUTRAL MAINS SUPPLY, A METAL CYLIN-
DER (DELIVERED WITH THE SENOGRAPHE DMR) MUST BE
INSTALLED IN THE PLACE OF F1.
3–72
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

TABLE 1
POSITION OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARDS IN1 AND IN2 AND ”SEL” WIRE ACCORDING TO NOMINAL MAINS
VOLTAGE AND NUMBER OF PHASES
NOMINAL MAINS VOLTAGE AND POSITION OF

NUMBER OF PHASES POSITION OF IN1 POSITION OF IN2 ”SEL” WIRE
380V TRI–PHASE ”TRI–380” ”HT” 380V
415V MONO–PHASE ”MONO” ”HT” 415V
380V MONO–PHASE ”MONO” ”HT” 380V
240V MONO–PHASE ”MONO” ”BT” 240V
JOB CARDS
440V MONO–PHASE
use transformer reference : 45563370 and 380V monophase
p
configuration
480V MONO–PHASE
Note: 415V TRI–PHASE connection cannot be used. Use 415V MONOPHASE instead.
3–73
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
PLACEMENT OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARDS IN1 AND IN2 AND ”SEL” WIRE ON GENERATOR MAINS DISTRIBU-
TION BOARD 200–PL1 ACCORDING TO NOMINAL LINE VOLTAGE AND NUMBER OF PHASES
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇ

!! 3Φ 380V ONLY !!
VOLTAGE ≤ 240V VOLTAGE ≥ 380V
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ ÇÇÇÇÇ

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
TRI–380
IN1 ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
BT ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
HT
Any Voltage
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ IN2
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ IN2
ÇÇÇÇ
except R1 R4
3ø 415 V
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
JOB CARDS
ÇÇÇÇ
MONO
ÇÇÇÇ
IN1 415V
380V
240V
ÇÇ 220V
208V
200V
0V
”SEL” WIRE
SEE SECTION 5.5
X1
GENERATOR MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200–PL1
3–74
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.7 Route and connect mains cable.
1. Verify that generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 is open (i.e. in the ”0” position) and that
mains source is turned OFF.
2. Route mains cable into the generator cabinet, via the mains input (i.e. non–HV unit) side, as
shown in illustration 2.
3. Connect mains cable conductors (two or three phases plus ground) to terminals on generator
Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 and grounding terminal as shown in illustration 3.
Note: To connect the ground wire to the grounding terminal, insert a flat–blade screwdriver into the slot
in front of the terminal and push firmly. Twist the handle of the screwdriver while still pushing
firmly to open the terminal. Insert the ground wire into the open terminal and release the screw-
driver to close the terminal on it.
JOB CARDS
4. Arrange mains cable conductors neatly as shown in illustration 2, and attach mains cable to the
lower cross–member of the generator cabinet using a tie–wrap AROUND THE JACKETED
PART OF THE CABLE, as shown.
5. Route and connect other end of mains cable to mains source.
3–75
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 2
ROUTING OF MAINS CABLE
400 PL3
300 PL1
JOB CARDS
400 PL2
200 PL2
200 PL1
GENERATOR
MAINS SUPPLY
SWITCH 200–S1
ÈÈ
ÈÈ
MAINS CABLE
ÈÈ
TIE–WRAP MUST BE
PLACED AROUND
THE JACKETED PART
OF THE MAINS CABLE ÈÈ = TIE–WRAP
3–76
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 3
CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY AND GROUND WIRES TO GENERATOR MAINS SUPPLY SWITCH 200–S1 AND CON-
ÈÈÈÈ
FIGURATION OF FUSES F1, F2 AND F3
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ
ÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ
ÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ PH3 WIRE
F1 F2 F3
ÇÇÄÄÄÄÄ
ÈÈÈÈ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇ
CON-
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÈÈÈÈ
NECTED
ÈÈÈ
ÇÇ
FOR 3Φ
ÈÈÈÈ
JOB CARDS
ONLY
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
ÈÈÈ
S1 MUST BE
OFF
ÈÈÈ
BEFORE
WIRES ARE
K1 ÈÈÈ S1 CON-
NECTED
REPLACE F1
WITH METAL CYL-
INSERT A FLAT–BLADE SCREWDRIVER
INDER IF (AND
FIRMLY INTO THIS SLOT AND TWIST
ONLY IF) POWER
TO OPEN GROUND WIRE TERMINAL
SOURCE CON-
SISTS OF ONE
PHASE AND NEU-
TRAL
3–77
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–78
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D a.c. voltmeter
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
During the procedures in this Job Card, you will be in close proximity to cir-
CAUTION cuits operating at mains voltage. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Note: Be sure that the console is connected to the Senographe DMR generator.
SECTION 5
LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
The objective is to determine the mains line resistance at the mains input to the Senographe DMR generator
cabinet. The result of this measurement may have an impact on the maximum allowable generator power.
(Maximum allowable generator power, once determined by the procedure in this Job Card, will be set later
in the sequence given in Installation Steering in chapter 1).
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedure.
5.1.1 Switch off the Senographe DMR and open generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 (”0” position).
3–79
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.2 Disconnect mains voltage selection wire ”SEL” from its normal lug on generator Mains Distribu-
tion Board 200–PL1, and reconnect it to the ”0V” lug.
Note: The ”0V” position of the ”SEL” wire is reserved EXCLUSIVELY for this line resistance measure-
ment. The Senographe DMR cannot function normally when the ”SEL” wire is in this position.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO TURN ON THE SENOGRAPHE DMR AT THIS POINT. FOLLOW
THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.
5.1.3 Connect the ac voltmeter to the input (i.e. line) end of generator mains fuses F1 and F2.
5.2 Perform the procedure.
5.2.1 Turn mains source on, close generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 (”1” position) and note down
the open circuit line voltage ”V1” from the ac voltmeter.
JOB CARDS
Note: IN THE NEXT STEP, YOU WILL HAVE ONLY 3 SECONDS TO TAKE A READING ON
THE AC VOLTMETER. FAILING TO DO SO WILL MEAN A LOSS OF SEVERAL MIN-
UTES OF INSTALLATION TIME. READ THE NEXT STEP COMPLETELY BEFORE PER-
FORMING IT.
5.2.2 While looking carefully at the ac voltmeter reading, press the Senographe DMR ”on” switch (either
on the console or, more conveniently, on the generator Mains Control Board 200–PL2). During a
period of three seconds, a resistive load (power resistors R1 and R4 on generator Mains Distribution
Board 200–PL1) will be effectively connected across the Senographe DMR mains input, causing
a drop in the voltage read on the ac voltmeter. Read and note down this closed circuit voltage ”V2”.
Note: Immediately following this three–second period, red LED DE5 on generator Mains Control Board
200–PL2 will light, indicating that an attempt to repeat this closed circuit voltage reading is tem-
porarily impossible due to heating of the resistive load. After about 15 minutes, the LED will go
out, indicating that the resistive load has sufficiently cooled down, and the reading can be repeated
if necessary.
3–80
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.3 Calculate line resistance RL according to the appropriate formula:

FOR MONO–PHASE INSTALLATIONS, RL = [(V1 – V2)/V2] X Rint
FOR TRI–PHASE INSTALLATIONS, RL = 1.5 X [(V1 – V2)/V2] X Rint
Where Rint, the internal resistive load, depends on the nominal mains voltage:
Nominal mains voltage (V) Rint (Ω)
200 11
208 11
220 11
240 11
380 44
415 44
JOB CARDS
5.2.4 Once line resistance RL is determined, find the maximum allowable generator power from table 2.
Example 1: Imagine that for a 240V mono–phase installation, the line resistance is determined to
be 0.41 ohms. Looking across the ”240V MONO–PHASE” row of table 2, we find the HIGHEST
maximum allowable generator power whose maximum line resistance value exceeds 0.41 ohms.
The result is thus a maximum allowable generator power of 3.5 kW.
Example 2: Imagine that for a 380V tri–phase installation, the line resistance is determined to be
2.46 ohms. Looking at the ”380V TRI–PHASE” row of table 2, we find that installation of the Seno-
graphe DMR is IMPOSSIBLE with such a high line resistance; even at a maximum allowable gen-
erator power of 3.0 kW, the maximum line resistance permitted is 2.40 ohms. In such a case, it would
be necessary to install a new line before continuing with the installation.
Note: The maximum allowable generator power as determined here will be set later in the sequence
given in Installation Steering in chapter 1.
3–81
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

TABLE 2
MAXIMUM LINE RESISTANCE VALUES (IN OHMS) FOR A GIVEN NOMINAL MAINS VOLTAGE AND NUMBER OF PHASES
AND MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GENERATOR POWER
Nominal mains voltage Maximum allowable generator power

(V) and number of
phases 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
380V TRI–PHASE 2.40 2.20 2.00 1.80 1.60
415V MONO–PHASE 1.43 1.31 1.19 1.07 0.95
380V MONO–PHASE 1.20 1.10 1.00 0.90 0.80
240V MONO–PHASE 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.32
220V MONO–PHASE 0.40 0.37 0.34 0.30 0.27
208V MONO–PHASE 0.36 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.24
JOB CARDS
200V MONO–PHASE 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.25 0.22
5.2.6 Open generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 (”0” position) and turn mains source OFF.
5.2.7 Disconnect mains voltage selection wire ”SEL” from the ”0V” lug on generator Mains Distribution
Board 200–PL1 and reconnect it to its normal lug, i.e. the lug which corresponds to the NOMINAL
(NOT measured) mains voltage.
3–82
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE Version No.:

COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Normal cassette and a supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Sensitometer and densitometer.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must strictly follow the order of AEC calibration for each screen pair given in Installation Steering in
Chapter 1. In particular, the three film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the
screen pair being calibrated must be unknown. If they are known, it is useless to follow the procedures in this
Job Card (see AEC calibration sequence and “Recommendations for AEC/AOP calibration procedure”
given in Installation Steering of Chapter 1).
Note: In the case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for the explanation.
3–83
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE

COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 2 of 10
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE.
5.1 General instructions

D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures in
this Job Card.
D When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 10mm to ensure that the photo cell is fully covered.
D Whenever the optical density of a film is measured, the measurement is always relative to the film
base fog level (net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog,(unex-
posed area of the film); then measure the Net density in the middle of the film.
D To avoid confusing results (for you and the software), take care to avoid putting the single-sided film
upside-down in the cassette.
JOB CARDS
D The minimum number of films to expose during this procedure is 9 films.
5.2 Perform a warm up of the X–Ray tube prior of the calibration.

Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
5.3 Calibration of X–Ray tube heater current
5.3.1 Perform the calibration procedure on the LF/RH focal size/track combination, then on the others
in any order (SF/RH, LF/MO, SF/MO).
5.3.3 Select the following menu sequence on the console: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/

TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB
3–84
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Note: /focal size/track/ must be LF/RH for the first combination performed.
To avoid excessive X-ray doses on the photo-cell tube, place an empty cassette
CAUTION on the top of the image receptor.
5.3.4 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO
2, EXPOSURE NO 3 and CALIBRATION END appear sequentially on the console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.
Note: Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO WARM appears on the
console display when tube temperature is excessive for taking the next exposure. It is not neces-
sary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not exit
the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO WARM message disappears, continue
the calibration by pressing the 2nd trigger button and holding it down.
JOB CARDS
Note: In case of arcing, the software re–attempts the same exposure automatically.
Note: The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warm–up may be necessary (see Job Card IST
020 AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP).
5.3.5 Repeat sections 5.3.3 to 5.3.4 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations.
Note: This must be done only if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
5.4 Perform film reciprocity law failure compensation calibration.

There are two objectives:
1. Calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1-point) or AOP (0-point) mode.
This is done in section 5.6.
2. Determine the film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the screen pair
being calibrated. These parameters are determined jointly by the screen pair and the characteristics of the
Senographe DMR product. This determination is done in section 5.7.
3–85
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.5 Calibrate X-ray tube heater current at 30 mA.
Note: This calibration does not depend on the screen pair being calibrated, and thus needs to be per-
formed only once for the first screen pair to be calibrated. For subsequent screen pairs, skip this
section and go directly to section 5.6.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/

LNRT/HEATER/CALIB on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding
to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006). Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A
series of 3 X-ray exposures is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.
Note: This calibration does not depend on any particular configuration of the Senographe DMR, so it
can be performed without any particular attention paid to presence or absence of accessories such
as compression paddle, cassette, grid, etc.
JOB CARDS
5.6 Calibrate reciprocity law failure reference energy.
5.6.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Verify the initial film reciprocity law failure com-
pensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 by rotating the kV dial through the three values. The initial
parameter values are given below:
A0init = +1.008E+0 (1.008)
A1init = +1.244E–1 (0.1244)
A2init = +2.277E–2 (0.02277)
If any of the parameter values are different from the initial values given above, correct them
manually by pressing the CHANGE key, then enter the correct value using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1). Once the value is entered and vali-
dated, press the SETUP key once to continue checking the remaining parameter values.
Note: With experience installing several Senographe DMRs, you may find sets of initial parameter val-
ues for certain screen pair types (i.e. high or low speed films, certain screen types) that result in
fewer films being used to complete this calibration.
5.6.2 Ask the doctor for the desired reference optical density (Target net density); generally
OD_R(Optical Density–Reference) is between 1.0 and 1.6.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/
FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/REFEN/OD_ref/CHANGE on the console, where x is the screen pair
indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006).
Enter the desired reference optical density by rotating the kV dial and using the NEXT and
VALID keys (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or
Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).
3–86
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.6.3 Perform a sensitometry test on the fresh film (unexposed film) being used with the screen pair being
calibrated.
5.6.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is dis-
played on the console screen. Select CHANGE on the console.
Enter the optical density from scale number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
5.6.5 Press the SETUP key on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the
console screen. Select CHANGE on the console.
Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
JOB CARDS
5.6.6 Repeat section 5.6.5 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensitometry test.
Note: If the message “Scale error” is displayed, the entered values of optical density did not increase as
expected; repeat the test and check that the correct values have been entered.

– any compression paddle installed
– contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
– 40 mm plexiglass on the bucky
5.6.8 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.
5.6.9 IF this is the FIRST exposure, select SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/CALIB on the console. For SUB-
SEQUENT exposures (if any) select only SETUP/CALIB on the console. Press the 2nd trigger
button and hold it down. A single X-ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.
Note: By default, the first exposure is taken at +7.000E+1 (70) mAs. For certain slower speed films, this
calibration can be done using fewer films if the initial mAs value is increased. To do this, prior
to pressing the 2nd trigger button, select SETUP/SETUP/MAS/CHANGE on the console and
enter the desired initial mAs value using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. Then
select SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/CALIB on the console and proceed with the exposure.
5.6.10 Develop the film and measure its optical density.
Note: The grid is not activated during this calibration mode exposure, so it is normal to see grid lines
on the developed film.
3–87
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.6.11 Select SETUP/OD_mea on the console. Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter
the measured optical density value (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.
5.6.12 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. At this point, either the
result is satisfactory, and the software displays CALIB END on the console display or, if another
exposure and re-calculation are necessary, the software displays ANOTHER FILM.
In the latter case, re-load the cassette with fresh film and repeat sections 5.6.8 to 5.6.12 without
manually changing the mAs value – the software will have calculated a new mAs value for this
exposure. Normally, no more than 2 or 3 films need to be used before CALIB END appears on the
console display to indicate a satisfactory result.
Note: It is useful to note the updated mAs value determined by the software before taking any subsequent
exposures. This can give you an idea of the initial mAs values needed for certain film types to
reduce the number of films needed during future Senographe DMR installations (see Note in sec-
JOB CARDS
tion 5.6.9).
5.7 Calibrate film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters.

– bucky 18 x 24 in place
– set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or 660 mm (most common)
5.7.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/LNRT on the console.
Note: There is a delay of about 2 seconds between the moment when the LNRT key is pressed and the
appearance of the succeeding sub-menu titles. This is due to a calculation that the software per-
forms to determine, among other things, the plexiglass thickness necessary for the calibration.
5.7.3 Place the amount of plexiglass indicated on the console display on the bucky and install the cassette
loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.
5.7.4 Press the CALIB button, then press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X-ray exposure
is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.
If a message “Cooling Tube” or “Cooling Gene” is displayed, wait for cooling.

CAUTION If the message “Pwr too high” is displayed, one or more of the exposure pa-
rameters was not correct. Verify the maximum power setting and repeat the
procedure.
Note: The exposure time can be very short (20 ms) or very long (9 s), so be sure to hold the 2nd trigger
button down constantly until the exposure is complete.
3–88
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.7.5 Develop the film and measure its optical density.
5.7.6 Select SETUP/OD_mea on the console. Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter
the measured optical density value (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.
5.7.7 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. At this point, either the
result is satisfactory, and the software displays CALIB END on the console display, or, if another
exposure and re-calculation is necessary, the software displays ANOTHER FILM.
In the latter case, press the SETUP key once and repeat sections 5.7.3 to 5.7.7. As many as 15 films
may have to be used before CALIB END appears on the console display following the calculation,
indicating a satisfactory result.
JOB CARDS
Note: Be sure to update the amount of plexiglass on the cassette holder (if necessary) according to the
indication on the console display.
5.7.8 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console and note down the three film reciprocity law fail-
ure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 by rotating the kV dial.
Note: Keep these three parameter values with the table in Installation Steering in Chapter 1, once you
have verified them in section 5.9 below. They can be used in the future to avoid repeating this Job
Card during installation of other Senographe DMRs with the same screen pair. The Installation
Steering section explains how to perform the calibration when these parameters are known.
5.8 Set manual density correction step size.
5.8.1 Ask the doctor for the desired manual density correction step size.
For example, if the step size is chosen to be +1.000E–1 (0.1), then, assuming that the reference opti-
cal density of 1.0, the available range of corrected optical density is from 0.5 to 1.5 in steps of 0.1
in both AEC and AOP application modes.
5.8.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/Energ/PARAM/D_STEP/CHANGE on the console. Use the NEXT and

VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the desired manual density correction step size value (see
Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measure-
ment in Chapter 1).
Note: In case the message ”Invalid parameters” is displayed on the console:

– Check the results following paragraph 5.9 for verification.
– If the results are correct, continue the DMR calibration / installation. Otherwise restart the job
card IST013.
3–89
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.9 Check results.
5.9.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP
/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.
5.9.3 Set up the following exposure configuration:

– mode: AEC (1–point)
– screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
– focal spot: LARGE
– track: MO
– filter: MO
JOB CARDS
– manual density correction: +0.

– bucky 18 x 24 with grid in place
– set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm
5.9.5 Take three exposures, using the screen pair being calibrated, with the following kV and plexiglass
thicknesses, measuring and noting down the optical density of the film, the mAs and the time ob-
tained in Job Card IST043, (IST013 data section) for each one:
– 28 kV with 40 mm of plexiglass
Note: Since these exposures are taken in application mode, the grid is activated during the exposures and
thus no grid lines should be visible on the developed films.
The optical density must not vary by more than 0.2 between any two of the three films. If it does,
the entire calibration must be repeated.
Do not, in any circumstances, attempt to manually adjust any of the parame-

CAUTION ters determined by the calibration procedures in this Job Card. If the optical
density is outside the tolerance defined above , then there is an error which
must be corrected by repeating the entire calibration. A satisfactory result
must be obtained before proceeding.
3–90
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Once the variation in optical density between the three films is satisfactory, check that the optical
density of the 28kV/40 mm film is inside the tolerance of the reference optical density ±0.1 (the ref-
erence optical density was chosen in section 5.6.2).
If the optical density is outside this tolerance, the reference energy must be calibrated as indicated
in Job Card IST 014. To do this, perform the following sequence:
1. Perform the section entitled Perform calibration of reference energy in Job Card IST 014.
Note: The reference optical density must be re–entered following the menu sequence given in Job Card
IST 014.
Note: For the initial calibration attempt, do not use the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70). Instead,
use the mAs value obtained above from the 28 kV/40 mm check exposure.
2. Perform the section entitled Check results in Job Card IST 014.
JOB CARDS
5.9.6 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console – but see CAUTION
in section 3).
3–91
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–92
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR Version No.:

A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette and a supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Densitometer
JOB CARDS
D Sensitometer
D plexiglasss in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure complete
covering of the photo cell)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Note: In the event of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for an explanation.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The chronological order of AEC calibration given in Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be strictly followed
for each screen pair.
This Job Card is used ONLY when the three reciprocity law failure
CAUTION compensation parameters given (A0, A1 and A2) have been entered manu-
ally as explained in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.
3–93
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR

A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 2 of 8
For this procedure, do not, under ANY CIRCONSTANCES, attempt to

CAUTION ”tweak” manually the GAMMA or ENR_R parameters determined by the
calibration procedures in this Job Card. If the calibration results are not sat-
isfactory, there is a reason which must be corrected; correct the problem and
repeat the entire calibration.
SECTION 5
PREPARATION
5.1 General Instructions

D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout these procedures.
D When placing plexiglasss on the cassette holder, the plexiglasss must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 10 mm to ensure that the photo cell is fully covered, and the plexiglasss
is set all the way to the rear of the image receptor.
JOB CARDS
D To avoid confusing results (for you and the software), take care to avoid putting the single-sided film
upside-down in the cassette.
base fog level (net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog,(unex-
posed area of the film); then measure the net density in the middle of the film.
5.2 Prepare the senographe DMR for this calibration procedure
5.2.1 Calibration of heater current.

Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
D Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch B1 on genera-
tor CPU board 400–PL3.
Note: This is necessary only when the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL
3–94
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3 Perform calibration of reference energy.

The objective is to calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1-point) or AOP
(0-point) mode.
5.3.1 Ask the doctor for the desired reference optical density OD_R (Optical Density–Reference, the
Target Net Density). This is generally between 1.0 and 1.6.
5.3.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/

CALIB/Energ/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006).
5.3.3 Enter the desired reference optical density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the
kV dial, see ”visual display of parameters values” and ”modification of a parameter value or
entry of a measurement” in chapter 1.
JOB CARDS
5.3.4 Perform a sensitometry test on a fresh film (unexposed film) being used with the screen pair being
calibrated.
5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console.
5.3.6 Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is displayed on the console screen.
5.3.7 Select CHANGE on the console.
5.3.8 Enter the optical density from scale number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
5.3.9 Press the SETUP key on the console.
5.3.10 Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the console screen.
5.3.11 Select CHANGE on the console.
5.3.12 Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
5.3.13 Repeat section 5.3.9 through 5.3.12 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensi-
tometry test.
5.3.14 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CONFIG/NORMAL on the console (this tells the software that
the calibration is being done for the normal, and not Stereotix 2, mode).

– bucky 18 x 24 wiht grid in place
– 40 mm plexiglasss on the bucky.
– set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm.
3–95
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.16 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.
5.3.17 For an initial calibration, use the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70) by selecting SETUP/
CALIB/CALIB on the console. For any subsequent re-calibration, follow the instructions given
for entering a mAs value other than the default value (see IST013 Section 5.6.9).
5.3.18 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X–ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd
trigger button.
5.3.19 Develop the film and measure its optical density (OD) (See section 5.1).
The measured OD should be greater than or equal to (OD_R – 0.2) but lower than (OD_R + 0.8),
where OD_R is the reference optical density chosen in section 5.3.1.
For example: If OD_R = 1.1 then the optical density must be between 0.9 and 1.9
JOB CARDS

If the measured value is in the required range, go to step 5.3.21 to enter the value into the DMR.
5.3.20 If the measured value is not in the required range, first change the mAs value and repeat the OD
measurement.
If the film is too dark (measured OD greater than OD_R + 0.8), the mAs must be reduced; if the
film is too light (measured OD less than OD_R – 0.2), the mAs must be increased.
Calculate the required change in mAs value as 8% for each 0.1 of OD variation required.
Note: The value of 8% is based on a film gamma of 3.
For example: with an OD_R of 1.1 and 70 mAs the OD = 1.6, which you want to reduce by 0.5;
then 8% 5 = 40%, and 40% of 70 mAs = 28 mAs.
N to decrease the OD by 0.5, you should enter a mAs value of (70 – 28) = 42 mAs.
Repeat the OD measurement with the calculated new mAs value, as follows:
1. Select SETUP/mAs on the console
2. Enter the new mAs value, using the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial
Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than once after entering the mAs value – a second
press will cause the value to revert to the default of +7.000E+1 (70).
3. Reload the cassette and install it in the cassette holder
4. Select SETUP/CALIB on the console; repeat sections 5.3.18 and 5.3.19.
5.3.21 When the measured OD value is in the correct range, select SETUP/OD_MS; use the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the measured value into the DMR.
5.3.22 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation; Calcul Done appears
3–96
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.23 Note down the following information:

– Gamma value (select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM/GAMMA on the console)
Note: This is not the film gamma, but another intermediate value calculated for internal use by the
Senographe.
– The reference energy (select SETUP/ENR_R on the console)
– The reference optical density (select SETUP/OD_R on the console)
– The sensitometry scale densities (select SETUP/SCALE on the console and rotate the kV dial
to display the different values)
5.4 Set manual density correction step size.
5.4.1 Ask the doctor the desired manual density correction step size.
For example, if the step size is chosen to be +1.000E–1 (0.1), then assuming that the reference opti-
JOB CARDS
cal density is 1.0 the available range of corrected optical density is from 0.5 to 1.5 in steps of 0.1
in AEC and AOP Application Modes.
5.4.2 Select SETUP/D_STEP/CHANGE on the console.

Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the desired manual density correction step
size value.
5.5 Check Results
5.5.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting
SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.
5.5.2 Perform a ”CKSUM” and go to Application Mode.

– Mode: AEC (1–Point).
– Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated.
– Focal spot: LARGE.
– Filter: MO.
– Manual density correction: +0.
– 28 kV.
– 4 cm plexiglass.
5.5.4 Keep the Senographe DMR in the same configuration as given in section 5.3.15.
5.5.5 Take an exposure, using the screen pair being calibrated, note down the resulting mAs value and
measure the optical density of the film.
Note: Since this exposure is taken in Application Mode, the grid is activated during the exposure and
thus no grid lines should be visible on the developed film.
3–97
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.5.6 The optical density of the film must not be outside the tolerance of the reference optical density ±0.1
(the reference optical density was chosen in section 5.3.1). If the optical density is within this toler-
ance, skip directly to section 5.5.8 below.
Note: The reference optical density chosen and entered in section 5.3.1 can no longer be displayed at
this point; it was erased and replaced by the default value when the DMR was returned to Applica-
tion Mode for these checks.
5.5.7 If the optical density of the film is outside this tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure, but use
the mAs value obtained from the check exposure taken in section 5.5.5. To do this, perform the fol-
lowing sequence:
1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/Energ./PARAM/
OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Re-enter the desired reference optical density by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
JOB CARDS
2. Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/mAs on the console and enter the resulting mAs

value obtained from the check exposure taken in Section 5.5.5 by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial.
Note: If the measured optical density from the check exposure is greater (less) than the desired reference
density, it is preferable to use a mAs value slightly lower (higher) than the value obtained from
the check exposure.
Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than one time after entering the mAs value. Doing
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value.
3. Repeat Sections 5.3.15 to 5.3.23, EXCEPT THAT in Section 5.3.17, IT WILL NOW ONLY BE
NECESSARY TO SELECT SETUP/CALIB AND NOT SETUP/CALIB/CALIB ON THE
CONSOLE.
Note: The greater the difference between the optical density measured during the CALIBRATION and
the desired reference density, the greater the final error in optical density when in automatic expo-
sure Application Mode.
4. Repeat all checks in Section 5.5.
5.5.8 If you have entered the parameters A0, A1, and A2 manually, make the following check (otherwise
go to Section 5.5.9).
Take two exposures using the screen pair being calibrated with the following kV and plexiglass
thickness, measuring and noting the optical density of the film, the mAs and the time obtained in
Job Card IST043 (IST014 data section) for each one:
– 32 kV with 1.5 cm of pexiglass.
– 28 kV with 5.5 cm of plexiglass.
3–98
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Check the optical density value obtained previously with 4 cm, with 1.5 cm, and with 5.5 cm. It must
not vary by more than 0.2 between any two of the three films. If it does:
1. Check the reciprocity low failure compensation parameters A0, A1, and A2.
– If the parameters are not correct, re–enter them manually as explained in Chapter 1 of
the Installation Steering Guide, and perform this Job Card, IST 014, from the beginning.
– If the parameters are correct, check Job Card IST 007.
If Job Card IST 007 does not check correct, perform the entire Job Card IST 007 before
performing Job Card IST 014 again.
2. If all the previous checks are correct, check the automatic film processor by making several sen-
sitometry tests and comparing the results (see Job Card IST 034, Section 5.2).
3. If all the previous checks are correct, perform Job Card IST 013.
JOB CARDS
5.5.9 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from Application Mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console) (see CAUTION in
Section 3).
5.5.10 Perform a ”CKSUM” and go to Application Mode.

Note: The strategy of AOP is automatically calculated at the end of this Job Card.
Note: To check this AOP strategy, see Job Card IST 039 ”MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP
STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR” Section 5.1.3, in function of the mAs value obtained
from the 28 kV/4 cm check exposure.
3–99
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–100
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A Version No.:

GIVEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION:
D This Job Card is applicable for senographe DMR V1 and DMR V2 with Carbon cassette holder
18x24 CDRH with top (45561633).
D This Job Card is NOT applicable for senographe DMR V2 with the new Plastic cassette holder
18x24 CDRH (2147919) without top.
SECTION 2
JOB CARDS
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette loaded with one unexposed film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 3
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm to ensure com-
plete coverage of the photo cell)
SECTION 4
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SECTION 5
PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order of AEC calibration given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.
3–101
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION FOR A GIVEN

PAIR Job Card IST 015 2 of 6
SECTION 6
PREPARATION
6.1 General instructions to be observed during all procedures:

D the photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient: position 1) throughout the proce-
dures in this Job Card
D when placing plexiglass on the cassette holder or 1.5 magnification device, the plexiglass must always
overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 10mm to ensure that the photocell is fully covered.
In addition the plexiglass is set all the way to the rear of the image receptor.
D since it is never developed, the same undeveloped film can be used repeatedly throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.
6.2 Perform magnification correction.

JOB CARDS
erator CPU board 400–PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in
Chapter 1).
The objective is to calculate two co-efficients that correct the photocell gain when the Senographe DMR is
being used in magnification mode.

– cassette holder in place (no grid).
– compression paddle installed
– cassette loaded with unexposed film installed.
– set the SID to that user by user, 610 mm a 660 mm (most common).

CALIB/Corr/CALIB/CONFIG/YES on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (this tells the software that the cal-
ibration in contact mode is being done).
6.2.3 Place 2 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.2.4 Select SETUP/CALIB/THICK/2 CM on the console.
3–102
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.2.6 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more exposures are taken. Continue holding
the 2nd trigger button down until CALIBRATION END appears on the console display, then release
the 2nd trigger button.
6.2.7 Select SETUP/THICK/4 CM on the console.
6.2.8 Place 4 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.2.9 Repeat steps 6.2.5 and 6.2.6.
6.2.11 Place 60 mm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.
6.2.12 Repeat steps 6.2.5 and 6.2.6.
JOB CARDS
Do NOT attempt to execute the calculation here. The calculation will be per-
CAUTION formed in section 6.2.25.

– cassette holder in place (no grid).
– magnification device installed (always in the botton holes)
Note: Magnification of 1.5 if the SID = 660

Magnification of 1.4 if the SID = 610
– compression paddle installed
– cassette loaded with undeveloped film installed.
6.2.14 Select SETUP/SETUP/CONFIG/NO on the console (this tells the software that the calibration in
1.5 magnification mode is being done).
6.2.15 Place 2 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
6.2.16 Select SETUP/CALIB/THICK/2 CM on the console.
6.2.18 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more exposures are taken. Continue holding
the 2nd trigger button down until CALIBRATION END appears on the console display, then release
the 2nd trigger button.
6.2.20 Place 40 mm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
6.2.21 Repeat steps 6.2.17 and 6.2.18.
3–103
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.2.24 Repeat steps 6.2.17 and 6.2.18.
6.2.25 Select SETUP/SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. CORR CAL
END appears on the console display.
6.3 Check results.
6.3.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/
SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.
6.3.2 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See ”Display of parameters
following an exposure” in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.
JOB CARDS
6.3.4 Remove and re–install the 1.5 magnification device.
This is necessary because it is the changing from 1.5 magnification to contact

CAUTION mode (or vice versa) that triggers the reading of the new magnification
correction parameters by the application software. Otherwise the results of
the check procedure will be completely false.

Focal spot: LARGE (not SMALL)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
Manual density correction: +0
HV: 28 kV
6.3.6 Install the cassette loaded with undeveloped film.
6.3.8 Take an exposure and note down the estimated thickness from the console display.
3–104
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.3.11 Remove the magnification device.
6.3.12 Keep the exposure configuration given in section 6.3.5. Leave the cassette loaded with undeveloped
film installed.
6.3.17 Compare the estimated thicknesses for 20 mm of plexiglass in magnification mode and in contact
JOB CARDS
mode. The difference must be less than 1.5 mm.
6.3.18 Compare the estimated thicknesses for 40 mm of plexiglass in magnification mode and in contact
mode. The difference must be less than 1.5 mm.
6.3.19 Normally, at this point, the calibration of the screen pair is finished and the Senographe DMR can
be left to the user with the screen pair enabled. If for some reason the calibration of the screen pair
is not finished, and if the machine must be left unattended at this point, (see CAUTION in section
4) disable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console.)
6.3.20 If you are handing the Senographe DMR back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR
off, then on again.
3–105
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–106
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE mA Version No.:

MEASUREMENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Milliammeter
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–107
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE mA

MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 016 2 of 4
SECTION 5
Calibration of XRT mA measurement
The objective is to determine the scale factor F/mA between the X–ray tube mA measurement input to the soft-
ware and the real X–ray tube mA value.
The default parameter value is F/mA = +1.000E+3 (1000) Hz/mA
DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1 at any

CAUTION point in this Job Card.
5.1 Preparation

JOB CARDS
5.1.2 Remove strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board
701–PL1.
5.1.3 Connect milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA
board 701–PL1. Set the milliammeter to its 100 mA DC scale.
5.1.4 Turn on the Senographe DMR.
400–PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in Chapter 1).
5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/mA_meas/

CALIB/CALIB on the console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1
and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While
still holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the console (this request for a measurement of
X–ray tube current is needed by the calibration software, but the value displayed on the console
at this point is of no importance to the service engineer). Release pushbutton SW2.
5.2.2 Select SETUP/I_MEAS on the console. Enter the value of current (in milliamperes) read from the
milliammeter by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of
Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.
Note: Only values between +4.000E+1 (40) and +6.000E+1 (60) mA are accepted by the calibration
software. An error message appears on the console display if a value outside of this range is
entered.
5.2.3 Select SETUP/CALCUL/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. If the calculated F/mA
value is between 850 and 1150 mA calib END appears on the console display – if it is not, then
an error message appears.
3–108
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3 Check results.
5.3.1 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1
and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While still
holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the console. Verify that the measurement on the console
display now corresponds to the value read on the milliammeter ±400 µA ± milliammeter error.
Release pushbutton SW2. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
5.3.2 Change the milliammeter scale to 200 mA DC. Press pushbutton SW1 on generator kV/mA board
701–PL1 and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter.
(The current should be approximately 120 mA.) While still holding SW1 down, select MEASUR
on the console. Verify that the difference between the measurement on the console display and the
value read on the milliammeter is less than 2.4 mA. Release pushbutton SW1. DO NOT ENTER
THIS MEASURED VALUE.
JOB CARDS
5.3.3 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console and note down the displayed value of F/mA.
5.3.4 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.
5.3.6 Disconnect the milliammeter and replace the strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and
MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board 701–PL1.
3–109
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–110
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Non invasive: RMI 232 kVp–meter, calibrated with known calibration factors.
D or Invasive: Machlett Dynalyser III divider and Fluke multimeter.
JOB CARDS
Note: MQSA (US) regulation requires kVp accuracy better than 5%. It means that the tool used for the
following measurements should have an accuracy much better than 5%, and the kVp limit values
displayed by the tool should depend from its own accuracy. The table 1 is given below to detail
these limit values vs. tool accuracy.
Note: RMI 232 must be used with its calibration factors. If not its accuracy (when verified only) is not
sufficient (from 6.0% at 25 kVp to 4.5% at 40 kVp).
SECTION 3
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Note: The Senographe DMR is calibrated at factory in accordance with MQSA requirements (5%).
Therefore, this Job Card should not be performed at the first installation of the system.
The following procedures must have been performed in the following order:
D Job Card IST 001
D Job Card IST 002
D Job Card IST 016
Recalibration of kV scale factor may require a re-calibration of IST07 for all

CAUTION film/screen couples previously adjusted.
3–111
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR

SECTION 5
The objective is to determine the scale factor G and offset VOF between the X–ray tube kV command from
the software and the real kV value obtained.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE G = +6.554E+1 (65.54) and VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0)
DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1 at any

CAUTION point in this Job Card.
Since MQSA requirement is 5% accuracy, the operator should take into account the accuracy of the measure-
ment method himself to define the read values not to exceed. See Table 1 which gives the limit values for each
used tool.
JOB CARDS
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR
5.1.1 Non invasive measurement method.

– Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:
– no compression paddle.
– maximum magnification mode (the purpose here is simply to reduce the distance
between the kV peak meter and the X–ray source – see applicable documentation for
minimum acceptable distance from X–ray source, if any).
– set SID = 510 mm. It is then not possible to produce HV. (the purpose here is simply to
reduce the distance between the kV peak meter and the X–ray source.
– Place kV peak meter on the magnification device or cassette holder. Turn it on and set it to the
MO/MO position. Set the waveform selector to CP (constant potential).
– Use the Senographe DMR light centering device to center the kV peak meter target with the X–ray
zone.
– Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
(switch B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).
5.1.2 Invasive measurement method.

– Connect the HV divider to the HV TANK of generator.
– Connect the multimeter to negative channel of HV divider.
– Set the multimeter in DC mode, adjust RANGE function to get a display with 3 decimal digits,
then select the MIN function with a response of 100 ms.
3–112
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

– For each displayed value on the multimeter, multiply it by 10 to get the kVp value (the divider
ratio is 10000 and the high voltage is expressed in kilo–volts).
5.2.1 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/KV/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
Note: By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 1st point is 25 kV.
5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1–second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRA-
TION END” appears on the console display. Release the 2nd trigger button.
. If using a RMI 232, read the displayed value, correct it by the correction factor given in the
calibration factor table and note down this result. The calibration factor table gives values by 1 kV
steps; for intermediate values, use a linear interpolation.
. If using the Divider and Multimeter, read the displayed value, multiply it by 10 and note down
JOB CARDS
this result.
Note: If for some reason, this exposure has to be repeated select SETUP/CALIB on the console before
pressing the 2nd trigger button again
5.2.3 Select SETUP/kV_M on the console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of Parameter Values” and
Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.
Note: By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 2nd point is 40 kV. Due to DMR
software, the Mo filter remains selected.
this result.
Note: If for some reason, this exposure has to be repeated select SETUP/CALIB on the console before
pressing the 2nd trigger button again.
3–113
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.6 Select SETUP/kV_M on the console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and
”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.
5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. Normally, ”KV
CALIB END” appears on the console display. If ”OUT OF RANGE” appears on the console dis-
play, this indicates either faulty kV measurement(s) in the steps above, or a hardware failure.
5.3 Check results.
5.3.1 Leave the Senographe DMRsenographe in the same conditions as described in section 5.1 (with the
kVp meter or divider–multimeter in place), and select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.
5.3.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRA-
JOB CARDS
this result.
CAUTION: DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
5.3.3 The kV value read on the kV peak meter should be 25 kV ± 0.3 kV.
Note: The generator kVp accuracy is ± 1% (one per cent) when measured just after a calibration.
this result.
CAUTION: DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.
3–114
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.6 The measured value should be within limits which depend on the measurement tool, as given in
Table 1 below:
Measurement tool 25 kV 40 kV
Min. Limit Max. Limit Min. Limit Max. Limit
RMI 232 24.12 25.86 38.58 41.37
Dynalyser III + Fluke 87 24.02 25.96 38.43 41.54
Table 1
Note: The generator kVp accuracy is ± 1% (two per cent) when measured just after a calibration.
Note: If the need should arise to check this point in application mode, it is not possible to do so because
exposures at 40 kV are prohibited with the Mo filter in application mode.
JOB CARDS
5.3.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the displayed values of G and
VOF by rotating the kV dial.
5.3.8 Job Card IST 003 ”CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT” must be done
immediately following this Job Card, but if you are turning the machine back over to the user at this
point, switch off, then on again.
5.3.9 Perform calibration check of IST007 (section 6.6 only). If thickness accuracy is outside the toler-
ance, IST007 must be performed completely for all already adjusted film/screen couples.
3–115
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–116
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN Version No.:

STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D The cassette that will be used by the doctor for Stereotix 2 mode
Note: Presence or absence of film in the cassette is of no importance in this Job Card.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
complete covering of the photo cell)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THE GANTRY MUST BE ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS

WARNING WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS EQUIPPED WITH THE STEREOTIX
2 (see job card IST 009).
BECAUSE CASSETTES DO NOT ALWAYS EXHIBIT A CONSTANT

WARNING RADIOLOGICAL DENSITY ACROSS THEIR SURFACES, THE CAS-
SETTE USED IN THIS JOB CARD MUST ALSO BE USED IN JOB CARD
IST 019.
FURTHERMORE, THE DOCTOR MUST USE ONLY THIS CASSETTE

IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE, EVEN IF OTHER CASSETTE TYPES ARE
CALIBRATED FOR NON–STEREOTIX 2 USE. BE SURE TO INFORM
THE DOCTOR OF THIS CONSTRAINT.
3–117
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-

TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 2 of 6
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The Senographe DMR being installed must be equipped with the Stereotix 2 option that has been set up and
calibrated according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual.
Also, Job Card IST 004 must have been performed before this Job Card.
Note: In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS
The objective is to calibrate the photocell in its Stereotix 2 positions. Because of the different angles between
the tube housing and the photocell when in Stereotix 2 mode, the photocell does not receive the same dose of
radiation as it does when in non–Stereotix 2 mode.
JOB CARDS
Note: Since this calibration does not depend on a certain screen pair, it is not necessary to perform it each
time a new screen pair is introduced.
This Job Card consists of four interdependent calibration procedures which are performed in the following
order:
D Normal, which is done without the Stereotix 2 installed as a reference calibration for the following three
calibrations.
D Stereotix Left, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tube–carrying arm rotated to the right
side as viewed from the front of the gantry.
D Stereotix Center, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tube–carrying arm rotated to the
center.
D Stereotix Right, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tube–carrying arm rotated to the left
side as viewed from the front of the gantry.
THE FOUR PROCEDURES MENTIONED ABOVE MUST ALL BE PER-

WARNING FORMED WITH THE SAME AMOUNT OF PLEXIGLASS (IF ANY). IF
AT ANY POINT THE SOFTWARE ASKS FOR A CHANGE IN THE
AMOUNT OF PLEXIGLASS, THE SEQUENCE OF FOUR PROCE-
DURES MUST BE STARTED AGAIN USING THE NEW AMOUNT OF
PLEXIGLASS THROUGHOUT.
3–118
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.1 The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient: position1).
5.1.2 When placing plexiglass on the photocell or Stereotix 2 cassette holder, the plexiglass must always
overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 10 mm to ensure that the photocell is fully cov-
ered.
5.1.3 Error messages will appear on the console display when the tube–carrying arm position is not in
agreement with the position being calibrated.
5.2 Prepare the Senographe DMR for these procedures.

erator CPU board 400–PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in
Chapter 1).
JOB CARDS
5.3 Perform the normal calibration.

SID: 510 mm
No cassette holder / no bucky installed
No compression paddle
Magnification: 1.3 (install the magnification device in the middle hole).
Cassette centered laterally on magnification device, and flush with front edge of magnification
device (i.e. no overlap)
Note: Initially, do not put any plexiglass on the photocell. However, it may be necessary to add plexiglass
during these calibration procedures.
5.3.2 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its center (i.e. non–Stereotix 2) position.
5.3.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/CELL/STER/

CALIB/CELL/NORMAL/SETUP/CALIB on the console.
3–119
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.4 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more X–ray exposures are taken. Either the
message ”CALIBRATION END” or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
on the console display. In either case, release the second trigger button.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display, select
SETUP/CALIB on the console and repeat the exposure after changing the amount of plexiglass
by an increment of 10 mm.
If the message ”CALIBRATION END” appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the
Stereotix Left calibration in section 5.4.
5.4 Perform the ”Stereotix left” calibration.

Stereotix 2 installed
SID: 510 mm
JOB CARDS
No Stereotix 2 compression paddle
5.4.2 Set the Stereotix 2 compression plate to its highest position. Set the needle holder to the center of
its lateral (x–axis) range and to the maximum depth (y–axis) range, i.e. as far as possible from the
patient.
5.4.3 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3.
5.4.4 Select SETUP on the console.
5.4.5 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its left Stereotix position (i.e. to the right side as viewed from the front
of the gantry). NORMAL CELL ERR appears on the console display.
5.4.6 Select CELL/LEFT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. LEFT appears on the console dis-
play.
5.4.7 Place cassette (without film) on right side of Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front
of the gantry.
message CALIBRATION END or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display:
– Repeat the normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 10 mm).
– Repeat this Stereotix left calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
3–120
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

– Continue repeating the above two steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for both procedures.
– Proceed to the Stereotix Center calibration in section 5.5 using the same new amount
of plexiglass.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the Ster-
eotix Center calibration in section 5.5.
5.5 Perform the Stereotix center calibration.
5.5.1 Keep the Senographe DMR set up as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.
5.5.2 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3 and Stereotix
left calibration section 5.4.
JOB CARDS
5.5.4 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its center (i.e. non–Stereotix 2) position. STER. LEFT ERR appears
5.5.5 Select CELL/CENT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. CENTER appears on the console
display.
5.5.6 Move cassette to center of Stereotix 2 cassette holder.
– Repeat the normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 1 cm).
– Repeat the Stereotix left calibration in section 5.4 using the same new amount of plexi-
glass.
– Repeat this Stereotix center calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
– Continue repeating the above three steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for all three procedures.
– Proceed to the Stereotix Right calibration in section 5.6 using the same new amount of
plexiglass.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the Ster-
eotix Right calibration in section 5.6.
3–121
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.6 Perform the ”Stereotix right” calibration.
5.6.1 Keep the Senographe DMR set up as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.
5.6.2 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3, Stereotix left
calibration section 5.4 and Stereotix center calibration section 5.5.
5.6.4 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its right Stereotix position (i.e. to the left side as viewed from the front
of the gantry). STER. CENT ERR appears on the console display.
5.6.5 Select CELL/RIGHT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. RIGHT appears on the console
display.
5.6.6 Move cassette to left side of Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
JOB CARDS
– Repeat the Normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 1 cm).
– Repeat the Stereotix left calibration in section 5.4 using the same new amount of plexi-
glass.
– Repeat the Stereotix center calibration in section 5.5 using the same new amount of
plexiglass.
– Repeat this Stereotix right calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
– Continue repeating the above four steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for all four procedures.
– Be sure to execute the calculation as described in the next paragraph as soon as all four
procedures are satisfactorily completed.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, execute the calculation by
selecting SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console.
5.6.8 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If you are handing the machine back to the user
at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.
5.7 Check results

The results of this calibration are checked simultaneously with the results of the calibration in Job Card IST
019.
3–122
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN Version No.:

STEREOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D The cassette that will be used by the doctor for Stereotix 2 mode
Note: This MUST be the same cassette that was used in Job Card IST 018
D A supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 2
JOB CARDS
TOOLS
D Densitometer
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 cm to ensure
complete coverage of the photocell)
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

THE GANTRY MUST BE ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS

WARNING WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS EQUIPPED WITH A STEREOTIX 2
(see job card IST 009).
3–123
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-

REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 2 of 8
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The Senographe DMR being installed must be equipped with the Stereotix 2 option that has been set up and
calibrated according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual. The chronological order of AEC calibration given in
Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be strictly followed for each screen pair.
In case of Stereotix 2 add–on to an already–installed Senographe DMR, follow the instructions given in the
section entitled AEC Calibration Upon Stereotix 2 Add–on in Chapter 2.
SECTION 5
PREPARATION
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:
this Job Card.
JOB CARDS
D When placing plexiglass on the Stereotix 2 cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front
edge (towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
base fog level (Net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog (unex-
posed area of the film), then measure the net density in the middle of the film.
D When measuring optical density of a Stereotix 2 film, the point of measure must be at about 5 mm below
the horizontal reference line, and in line with the vertical reference line.
5.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on
generator CPU board 400–PL3, see ”Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the
Console” in chapter 1).
5.2 Determine mAs value for initial calibration attempt.

– Non–Stereotix 2 mode
– Any compression paddle installed
– Contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
– 4 cm plexiglass on the bucky
– SID = 660 mm
3–124
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
5.2.3 Load cassette with undeveloped film and install it in the cassette holder.
5.2.4 Take an exposure and note down resulting mAs value.
JOB CARDS
5.3 Perform calibration of reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode.
The objective is to calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1–point) mode
with Stereotix 2.

CALIB/Energ/CONFIG/STEREO on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006). This tells
the software that the calibration is being done for the Stereotix 2 (and not normal) mode.
Do not go any higher in the menu tree structure than given in the various
CAUTION steps in this section. If, for any reason, you do go higher in the tree structure,
it is essential to go into the CONFIG/STEREO menu first to avoid acciden-
tally using the default NORMAL mode, before proceeding with the calibra-
tion.
5.3.2 Select SETUP/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Enter the desired reference optical
density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See ”Visual Display of Param-
eter Values” and ”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.
Note: Normally, this value should be the same as the value used for the non–Stereotix 2 calibration in
Job Card IST 014.
3–125
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.3 Perform a sensitometry test on the film being used with the screen pair being calibrated.
5.3.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is dis-
played on the console screen. Select CHANGE on the console. Enter the optical density from scale
number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and ”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a
Measurement” in chapter 1.
5.3.5 Press the SETUP key on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the
console screen. Select CHANGE on the console. Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of
the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
5.3.6 Repeat section 5.3.5 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensitometry test.

JOB CARDS
– SID = 510 mm
– No cassette holder / No bucky installed
– Stereotix 2 installed
– Tube–carrying arm in right Stereotix position (i.e. rotated to the left side as viewed
from the front of the gantry)
– Stereotix 2 compression paddle installed
– Stereotix 2 needle holder set to the center of its lateral (x–axis) range and to the maxi-
mum depth (y–axis) range, i.e. as far as possible from the patient
– 4 cm plexiglass on the Stereotix 2 cassette holder
Note: If the mAs value obtained at section 5.2.4 was under 40 mAs, use 5 cm plexiglass.
– Stereotix 2 compression paddle in contact with plexiglass
5.3.8 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. Place
it on the left side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
5.3.9 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/mAs on the console. For an initial calibration attempt,

take the mAs value obtained in section 5.2.4, DIVIDE IT BY 4, and enter the result by using the
NEXT and VALID keys. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and ”Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70).
3–126
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3.11 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X–ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd
trigger button.
5.3.12 Develop the film and measure its optical density according to the technique given at the beginning
of section 5.
If the optical density of the film is greater than or equal to (OD_R – 0.2), enter this value by
selecting SETUP/OD_MS and using the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the
measured optical density value, then skip directly to section below 5.3.13.
If the optical density of the film is less than (OD_R – 0.2), increase the mAs value by selecting
SETUP/mAs on the console, then entering the increased mAs value by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial. Then re–load the cassette and place it on the left side of the Stereo-
tix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry. Select SETUP/CALIB on the con-
JOB CARDS
sole and repeat sections 5.3.11 and 5.3.12.
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70).
5.3.13 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. CALCUL DONE appears
5.3.14 Note down the following information:

– The gamma parameter (select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM/GAMMA on the console)
Note: This is NOT the film gamma, but another parameter that is calculated by the software.
– The reference energy (select SETUP/ENR_R on the console)
Do not, in any circumstances, attempt to adjust manually the GAMMA or

CAUTION ENR_R parameters determined by the calibration procedures in this Job
Card. If the calibration results are not satisfactory you must repeat the entire
calibration.
– The reference optical density (select SETUP/OD_R on the console)
3–127
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.4 Check results.
5.4.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/
SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.

Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
JOB CARDS
HV: 28 kV
5.4.4 Keep the Senographe DMR in the same configuration as given in section 5.3.7.
5.4.5 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. Place
it on the left side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
5.4.6 Take an exposure and note down the resulting mAs value.
5.4.7 Slide the cassette to the right side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder.
5.4.8 Rotate tube–carrying arm to left Stereotix position (i.e. rotated to the right side as viewed from the
front of the gantry).
5.4.9 Take an exposure.
5.4.10 Develop the film and measure the optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image according to the
technique given at the beginning of section 5.
5.4.11 The optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image must not be outside the tolerance of the reference
optical density ±0.1 (the reference optical density was chosen in section 5.3.2). If the optical density
is within this tolerance, skip directly to section 5.4.13 below.
Note: The reference optical density chosen and entered in section 5.3.2 can no longer be displayed at
this point; it was erased and replaced by the default value when the machine was returned to
application mode for these checks.
3–128
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.4.12 If the optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image on the film is outside this tolerance, repeat the
calibration procedure, but, instead of entering the mAs value given in section 5.3.9, use the mAs
value obtained in section 5.4.6 above. To do this, perform the following sequence:
1. Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/

FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/CONFIG/STEREO on the console.
2. Select SETUP/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Re–enter the desired reference

optical density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
3. Repeat sections 5.3.7 to 5.3.14 EXCEPT THAT IN SECTION 5.3.9 YOU MUST ENTER THE
RESULTING MAS VALUE OBTAINED FROM THE CHECK EXPOSURE TAKEN IN SEC-
TION 5.4.6. DO NOT ENTER THE VALUE GIVEN IN SECTION 5.3.9.
4. Proceed to checks in section 5.4.
JOB CARDS
5.4.13 Measure the optical density of the left Stereotix 2 image according to the technique given at the
beginning of section 5.
The difference between this density and the density of the right Stereotix 2 image must be less
than 0.1. If this is not the case, there is a problem with the calibration done in Job Card IST 018
”CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN STEREOTIX POSITIONS”. In this case, repeat Job
Card IST 018, then this Job Card in its entirety.
5.4.14 Rotate the tube–carrying arm to its center position.
5.4.15 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film in the center of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder.
5.4.16 Keeping the Senographe DMR set up as given in section 5.4.3, take an exposure.
5.4.17 Develop the film and measure its optical density according to the technique given at the beginning
of section 5.
The difference between this density and the density of either the right Stereotix 2 image OR the
left Stereotix 2 image measured above must be less than 0.1. If this is not the case, there is a prob-
lem with the calibration done in Job Card IST 018 ”CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN
STEREOTIX POSITIONS”. In this case, repeat Job Card IST 018, then this Job Card in its
entirety.
5.4.18 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console.) (See CAU-
TION in section 3.)
3–129
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–130
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
This Job Card should only be used when the performance of Job Card IST 003 ”CALIBRATION OF X–RAY
TUBE HEATER CURRENT” has been impossible due to excessive arcing.
SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP
This Job Card provides the procedure for re–starting an X–ray tube that was known to be good upon leaving
the factory, but which now exhibits arcing after a long period of inactivity.
The principle is to take a series of 12 pre–determined exposures, starting at low kV values and progressively
increasing towards high kV values. If arcing occurs during an exposure, some or all exposures are automati-
cally repeated. If persistent arcing occurs, the software automatically terminates the warm–up procedure.
3–131
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR.
5.1.2 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/WarmUp on the console. The track/kV

combination for the first exposure should appear on the console display.
5.2 Perform X–ray tube warm–up.
5.2.1 Press the 2nd trigger button and HOLD IT DOWN while the exposures are taken.
JOB CARDS
Note: There is a time delay of 10 seconds between exposures. You can release the 2nd trigger button dur-
ing this 10 second period, then press it again to continue, but the minimum time between exposures
will still be 10 seconds. If the tube overheats at some point, exposures will be inhibited until it
cools down again. During the cooling period, the 2nd trigger button can be released; as soon as
the display shows that the X–ray tube has sufficiently cooled, press the 2nd trigger button to con-
tinue.
5.2.2 When the warm–up procedure is finished, the message ”Tube OK” normally appears on the console
display. If persistent arcing occurred during the procedures, the message ”Too many spits” appears
3–132
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL Version No.:

CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D ”Ready Pack” or ”cardboard cassette” films (24 x 30 format)
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 30 cm)
JOB CARDS
D Pen or pencil capable of marking the surface of an X–ray film
D Thumb tacks or push pins
D 2.5 mm Allen wrench
D 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM
The objective is to check (and adjust if necessary) the lateral alignment of the following three points:
D X–ray tube focal spot
D Center point between lateral collimator blades
D Center of image receptor support
3–133
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL

CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 2 of 6
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the exposure.

– No compression paddle
– No bucky installed
– SID = 610 mm
– Mo track
– Large focal spot
5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, FROM THE
SIDE THAT WILL FACE THE X–RAY TUBE, in the following way:
– Two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
JOB CARDS
of the image receptor support, at approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 4 cm inwards from the two shorter edges
– The third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of
the image receptor support, approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approximately
12 cm from the rear edge of the film.
Refer to illustration 1 below.
3–134
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
PLACEMENT OF THREE THUMB TACKS TO BE INSERTED IN THE READY PACK
APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM
Note: It is NOT important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly ”squared” alignment with the
edges of the Ready Pack.
5.1.3 Place the Ready Pack on the image receptor support so that the points of the two ”front” thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the image receptor support and the third thumb tack butts
perfectly up against the left edge of the image receptor support. THE POSITIONING OF THE
THREE THUMB TACKS AGAINST THE IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT IS VERY IMPOR-
TANT TO THE SUCCESS OF THESE CHECKS.
3–135
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2 Take the exposure.
5.2.1 Using normal application mode, set up a manual (2–point) exposure as follows:
– 25 kV
– 20 mAs
5.2.2 Take the exposure.
5.2.3 Remove the thumb tacks and develop the film.
5.2.4 Using the ruler and a pen or pencil, carefully draw a straight line between the rearward edges (i.e.
the edges of the holes closer to the front edge of the image receptor support during the exposure)
of the two holes left by the thumb tacks on the front edge of the film. (See illustrations 2 and 3
below.) THIS LINE IS THE REFERENCE FOR ALL THE FOLLOWING GEOMETRICAL
JOB CARDS
MEASUREMENTS.
5.2.5 Attach the developed film to a sheet of graph paper (or other support marked with a series of perpen-
dicular lines), carefully aligning the front edge reference line with a convenient line on the graph
paper. See illustration 3 below.
ILLUSTRATION 2
DETAIL OF WHERE TO DRAW REFERENCE LINE ON FILM WITH RESPECT TO HOLES LEFT BY THUMB TACKS
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN

IN INK OR PENCIL
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
HOLE LEFT IN FILM FILM
BY THUMB TACK
3–136
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 3
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL SPOT WITH RESPECT TO THE
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM
JOB CARDS
t2 t1
approx. 100 mm
THIS LINE COR-

RESPONDS TO
THE LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR LINE DRAWN IN INK OR PEN-
REPORT CIL BETWEEN THE REAR-
WARD EDGES OF THE TWO
FRONT THUMB TACK HOLES –
THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
USED AS A REFERENCE FOR
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
FRONT EDGE
3–137
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3 Check lateral centering of X–ray beam on image receptor support.
5.3.1 Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 in mm in parallel with the reference line and
at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge of the film (see illustration 3).
5.3.2 Calculate the offset E:

E (mm) = 275 – (t1 + 2*t2)
where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support, and t1 and t2 are expressed in mm
5.3.3 IF E ≥ 3 mm, proceed to section 5.4 below. If not, this is the end of the Job Card.
5.4 Correct lateral centering (if necessary) of X–ray beam on image receptor support.
5.4.1 Determine, according to whether E is positive or negative, from which side of the X–ray tube hous-
ing the adjustment will be made:
JOB CARDS
– If E is POSITIVE, adjust from the LEFT side of the housing

– If E is NEGATIVE, adjust from the RIGHT side of the housing
5.4.2 Adjust lateral position of X–ray tube focal spot by following the procedure below:
1. Place the 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench around the adjustment screw locknut
located on the side of the housing determined in section 5.4.1 above.
2. Hold the adjustment screw in the center of the locknut in place with the 2.5 mm Allen wrench.
3. Keeping the adjustment screw in place, loosen the locknut.
4. Use the 2.5 mm Allen wrench to UNSCREW (turn COUNTER–clockwise) the adjustment
screw according to the formula NUMBER OF TURNS = 0.5 * E.
5. Keeping the adjustment screw in place, re–tighten the locknut.
6. Loosen the corresponding locknut on the OPPOSITE side of the housing and TIGHTEN (turn
CLOCKWISE) the adjustment screw until snug, then re–tighten the locknut.
5.5 Check results by repeating sections 5.1 to 5.3.
3–138
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Accurate digital voltmeter (Fluke 8060 or equivalent)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
FIRST POWER–ON CHECK
The objective in this section is to detect (before it’s too late) an incorrect mains supply configuration.
5.1 Check keep–alive supply voltage.
5.1.1 Check that generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 is open (i.e. in the ”0” position) and that mains
source is turned OFF.
5.1.2 Connect the voltmeter (set to 20 VDC scale) to generator mains power board 200–PL1 between test
points PT6 (+VE) and PT7 (0VE). See illustration 1 below.
3–139
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES

ILLUSTRATION 1
LOCATION OF TEST POINTS PT6 AND PT7 FOR CHECKING KEEP–ALIVE SUPPLY VOLTAGE ON GENERATOR MAINS
DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200–PL1
JOB CARDS
PT6 PT7
GENERATOR MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200–PL1
5.1.3 Close generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 (i.e. turn it to the ”1” position) and read the voltmeter
immediately. It should read 8 ± 2 VDC.
If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, turn mains source OFF
CAUTION IMMEDIATELY and check configuration of voltage selection board IN2 on
generator mains distribution board 200–PL1 (see Job Card IST 011 ”CON-
NECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY”).
5.1.4 Connect the voltmeter (set to 500 VAC scale) to generator mains power board 200–PL1 between
terminals 1 (0V) and 4 (220V).
5.1.5 Turn console on and read the voltmeter immediately. It should read 220 ± 20 VAC.
If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, open generator Mains Supply
CAUTION Switch 200–S1 IMMEDIATELY (i.e. turn it to the ”0” position) and check
configuration of voltage selection board IN1 and mains voltage selection wire
”SEL” on generator mains distribution board 200–PL1
(see Job Card IST 011 ”CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY”).
3–140
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

SECTION 6
CHECKING GENERATOR AND GANTRY DC SUPPLY VOLTAGES
6.1 Check generator DC supply voltages.
6.1.1 On generator CPU board 400–PL3, measure DC voltage (+5 V nominal) between TP110 and TP111
(GND). The voltage should be in the range +5.1 V +/–0.05.
Note: This voltage can be adjusted via the potentiometer located on the switching power supply, just
beside the connector.
6.1.2 On generator interface board 400–PL2, measure DC voltage (+12 V nominal) between PT3 and
(PT4SERIG). The voltage should be in the range +11.5 to +12.5 VDC.
6.1.3 On generator interface board 400–PL2, measure DC voltage (–12 V nominal) between PT5 and
JOB CARDS
(PT4SERIG). The voltage should be in the range –11.5 to –12.5 VDC.
Note: The voltages measured in sections 6.1.2 and 6.1.3 above depend on the +5 V adjustment men-
tioned in section 6.1.1.
6.2 Check gantry DC supply voltages.
6.2.1 On gantry power board 800–PL1, measure DC voltage (+27V nominal) between terminals 3 and
1 (GND) of connector TB1. The voltage should be in the range +22 to +35 VDC.
6.2.2 On gantry CPU board 800–PL3, measure DC voltage (+5V nominal) between TP110 and TP111
(GND). The voltage should be in the range +4.75 to +5.25 VDC.
Note: Unlike the +5V supply on the generator CPU board, the +5V supply on the gantry CPU board can-
not be adjusted.
3–141
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–142
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE Version No.:

DETECTOR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Calibrated force detector capable of measuring compression force between the compression paddle and
the cassette holder, required accuracy ±0.5 daN – the Mammo compression scale Part No.
JOB CARDS
46-194427P407 is recommended.
SECTION 3
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR
The objective is to calibrate the compression force detector.
WARNING
If a power line failure occurs during the calibration (before a checksum is done), it is mandatory to repeat this
calibration from the beginning.
5.1 Preparation
3–143
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE

DETECTOR Job Card IST 023 2 of 2
5.2 Perform the calibration.

– Arm rotation at 0°
– Contact mode
5.2.2 Raise the compression paddle and place the force detector on the cassette holder.
5.2.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/

FORCE/CALIB/MEASURE on the console.
5.2.4 With the compression paddle completely raised and out of contact (i.e. in its home position), press
the ”0daN” key on the console.
JOB CARDS
5.2.5 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the force detector. Using the compression fine–ad-
justment knob, adjust the compression to exactly 3 daN on the force detector.
5.2.6 Press the ”3daN” key on the console.
5.2.7 Still using the compression fine–adjustment knob, increase the compression to exactly 6 daN on
the force detector.
5.2.8 Press the ”6daN” key on the console.
5.2.9 Continue this process for 9 and 12 daN, then press the ”ETC” key on the console and proceed with
15, 18, 21, 24 and 27 daN.
5.2.10 Select SETUP/CALCUL on the console. This executes the calculation of the new force detector
calibration parameters.
5.2.12 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle (the paddle must return to its home posi-
tion).
5.3 Check the results.
5.3.1 With the arm at 0° (i.e. X–ray tube above the cassette holder), bring the compression paddle into
contact once again with the force detector. Increase the compression until maximum force is
reached (i.e. compression cannot be further increased). Read the force detector measurement and
check that it is within ±1 daN of the maximum compression force chosen in the SETUP/ARM/
VALID/MEDICAL/FORCE menu.
5.3.2 Repeat the above check with the arm rotated to 180° (i.e. X–ray tube below the cassette holder).
Note: The maximum compression force must never exceed 30 daN. This limit must always be checked
after any maintenance (preventive or corrective) of the compression assembly to insure patient
safety.
3–144
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION Version No.:

FORCE TESTS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D A 3 kg weight whose dimensions allow it to be placed on top of the compression paddle
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 023 ”CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR”
SECTION 5
MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS
The objectives are:
D Check that a compression force (limit IC: In Compression) of at least 22 daN can be reached when the
arm is rotated by 180° with the paddle drive motor current limit value set between 50% ard 70% (motor’s
maximum current rating).
D Check that a decompression force (limit OC: Out of Compression) of at least 3 daN can be reached when
the arm is at 0° with the paddle drive motor current limit value set to 65% of the motor’s maximum current
rating. (This ensures that the compression paddle will rise and stay up when decompression is requested.)
3–145
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION
FORCE TESTS Job Card IST 024 2 of 4
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the tests.
Note: This must be done only if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
5.1.2 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with a compression paddle installed.
5.1.3 Inhibit the cassette detection in medical menu. Starting from application mode:
SETUP/MEDICAL/FILM/NO
5.2 Checking and adjusting the limit IC

JOB CARDS
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the console.

Check that the limit IC is set in between 50% and 70% for the motor current value and perform
the test.
5.2.2 Rotate the arm to 180° (i.e, X–ray tube below the cassette holder).
5.2.3 Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.
Note: Be ready to read the compression force displayed on the gantry readout unit, the paddle should
release and fall towards the tube housing for a compression close to 22 daN.
5.2.4 Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing. If the compression paddle releases for a force
lower or higher than 22 daN, perform the adjustment in step 5.2.5; otherwise go to step 5.3.
5.2.5 Set up the limit IC to its minimum: Starting from application mode, select
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the con-
sole.Use the + and - key on the console to set the motor current value to 50%. Enter this values with
the VAL key on the console.
5.2.6 Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing.
5.2.7 If the compression paddle releases before a force of 22 daN is reached, increase the compression
motor current value by 5%, then try again to reach 22 daN. Continue increasing the maximum in
compression motor current value in steps of 5%, if necessary, until 22 daN can be reached.
Note: Between each compression, request a total decompression of the compression paddle, using the
appropriate footswitch.
3–146
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
5.3 Check the limit OC.
5.3.1 Rotate the arm to 0° (i.e, X–ray tube above the cassette holder).
5.3.2 Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.
5.3.3 Select SETUP/LIMIT_OC on the console. The maximum motor current value (in decompression
mode) should be set to 65% otherwuise use the + and - key on the console to set this value. Enter
this value with the VAL key on the console and return to the application menu.
5.3.4 Place the 3 kg weight on top of the compression paddle.
5.3.5 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle using the appropriate pedal. The com-
pression paddle must rise smoothly to its home position.
5.3.6 If the compression paddle slips or releases, check that the compression paddle drive belt is not slip-
JOB CARDS
ping. If it is slipping, adjust or replace the belt.
Note: The maximum out of compression motor current adjustment range is limited to 65%.
5.3.8 If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR off, then
back on again.
3–147
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–148
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS Version No.:

MEASUREMENT Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 023 ”CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR”
D Check the configuration of the senographe with a Plastic bucky or a Carbon bucky (see section 5 installa-
tion steering, step 14.b.ii).
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
The objective is to calibrate the breast thickness measurement. Since the compression paddle and its drive
train, as well as the cassette holder or magnification device undergo deflection when under compression, a
compensation factor must be calculated to correct for changes in compression force at a fixed breast thickness.
Two calibrations must in fact be done, one for contact mode and one for magnification mode.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the calibrations.

3–149
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS

5.2 Perform the contact mode calibration.
5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 compression paddle installed.
5.2.2 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position.
Note: This MUST be done before entering the gantry installation menus.
5.2.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/THICK/CON-

TACT/CALIB on the console.
5.2.4 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder. Using the compression fine–
adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display panel.
Press the ”<5daN” key on the console.
5.2.5 Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
JOB CARDS
”>15daN” key on the console. The ”Calcul” key appears on the console display.
5.2.6 Press the ”Calcul” key on the console. This executes the calibration calculation for contact mode.
5.3 Check the contact mode calibration results.
5.3.1 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.
5.3.2 Keeping the Senographe DMR in contact mode, place 4 cm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
5.3.3 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the plexiglass.
5.3.4 Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the
gantry display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary
outside the range of 35 to 45 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, ± 5 mm).
5.4 Perform the magnification mode calibration.
5.4.1 Install the magnification device and the 18 x 24 compression paddle.
5.4.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/MAGNIF/CALIB on the console.
5.4.3 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position, using the appropriate
pedal.
5.4.4 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the magnification device. Using the compression
fine–adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display
panel. Press the ”<5daN” key on the console.
5.4.5 Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
”>15daN” key on the console. The ”Calcul” key appears on the console display.
3–150
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.4.6 Press the ”Calcul” key on the console. This executes the calibration calculation for magnification
mode.
5.5 Check the magnification mode calibration results.
5.5.1 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.
5.5.2 Place 4 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.
5.5.4 Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the
gantry display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary
outside the range of 37 to 43 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, ± 3 mm).
5.6 Return the Senographe DMR to its normal state.
JOB CARDS
5.6.2 If you are turning the Senographe DMR back over to the user at this point, turn the Senographe
DMR off, then back on again.
3–151
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–152
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 015 “CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM ANGULATION”. Arm angulation must
be correctly calibrated to ensure that grid movement is made in the correct direction when the angulation
is positive or negative.
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION
The objective is to calculate the gain and offset necessary for determining the grid position. The calibration
is fully automatic. A check is included at the end of this automatic calibration to see if the calculated gain and
offset are within a certain range. If they are not, an error message appears on the console display.
5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the calibration of grid position.
5.1.2 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 bucky.
5.1.3 Set arm rotation to 0° (Bucky is horizontal).
3–153
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION

5.2 Perform the calibration of grid position.
5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/GRID/CALIB

on the console.
5.2.2 Select CALIB on the console. If the calibration is successful, ”CALIBRATION OK” appears on
the console display within a few seconds.
– If “Invalid gain/offset” or other error message is displayed, the problem must be cor-
rected.
5.2.3 On the console, select each of the following calibration parameters in turn; note the values and
check them against the acceptable values given in the table below:
OFFSET; GAIN; MIN; MAX
– If any of these values is out of range, the problem with the bucky must be corrected.
JOB CARDS
5.2.4 Repeat steps 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 with the arm rotated to +90°.
5.2.5 Repeat steps 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 with the arm rotated to –90°.
5.2.6 Repeat steps 5.2.2 to 5.2.5 using the 24 x 30 bucky, if available.
5.2.7 Return to application mode (a CKSUM is not necessary when grid position parameters have been
changed).
5.2.8 If you are handing the Senographe DMR back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR
off, then back on again.
PARAMETER ARM AT 0_ ARM AT +90_ ARM AT –90_ Acceptable Values

18 x 24 Bucky:
OFFSET 0.47 thru 0.53
GAIN 0.5 thru 0.6
MIN > 5000 (5.000E+3)
MAX < 60500 (6.050E+4)

24 x 30 Bucky:
OFFSET 0.47 thru 0.53
GAIN 0.5 thru 0.6
MIN > 5000 (5.000E+3)
MAX < 60500 (6.050E+4)
3–154
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT Version No.:

GEOMETRY Date:
Note: This procedure is only applicable for Senographes DMR V1_P which have
been upgraded with motorized front blade kit.
For DMR with non–motorized front blade, perform Job Card IST 027B in
place of IST 027.
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Ready Pack or cardboard cassette films (24 x 30 format)
JOB CARDS
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 30 cm).
D Writing implement capable of marking the surface of an X–ray film.
D Thumb tacks or push pins (at least 20 mm long)
D Plexiglas plates in thickness increments of 5mm. Plates used for AEC calibration are adequate.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Job Card IST 029 must be done before commencing this procedure.
Note: This prerequisite is given as a reminder only.
3–155
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT

GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 2 of 14
SECTION 5
CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY
The objective is to verify that the exposed area on the X–ray film is within the required tolerances for the fol-
lowing properties:
Parallelism between front collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Lateral centering of X–ray beam on image receptor support
Maximum overlap of X–ray beam beyond front edge of image receptor support (MQSA requirement)
Dimensions of exposed area (width and depth).
These checks are performed by making various geometrical measurements on an exposed cardboard cassette
JOB CARDS
or Ready Pack film.

Set the lateral, rear, and front, collimator margins according to local standards or the doctor’s preference:
1. Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
2. Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L on the console.
3. Press the + or – key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired lateral collimator
margin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to
get full film blackening).
Standard Lateral margin (mm) = MARG_L Selection*

CEI** +2 .....
UK +3 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA/CDRH +2 .....
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the margin configu-
ration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
4. Select VALID on the console.
3–156
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5. Select SETUP/MARG_R on the console.
6. Press the + or – key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired rear collimator mar-
gin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to get full
film blackening).
Standard Rear margin (mm) = MARG_R Selection*

CEI** +2 .....
UK +2 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA +2 .....
JOB CARDS
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the margin configu-
ration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.
8. Select SETUP/MARG_F on the console.
9. Press the + or – key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired front collimator
margin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to
get full film blackening).
Standard Front margin (mm) = MARG_F Selection*

CEI +2 .....
UK +2 .....
AUSTRALIA +3 .....
MQSA +2 .....
11. Perform a “CKSUM” and return to application mode.

– No Bucky
– SID = 660 mm
3–157
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, from the side
that will face the x–ray tube, in the following way:
– two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
of the image receptor support, at approximately 20mm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 40mm in from the two shorter edges
– the third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of the
image receptor support, approximately 20mm in from this edge and approximately
120mm from the rear edge of the film.
Refer to Illustration 1 below.
ILLUSTRATION 1
JOB CARDS
APPROX 120mm
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
APPROX 20mm
APPROX 40mm
APPROX 40mm
APPROX 20mm
APPROX
20mm
Note: It is not important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the edges
of the Ready Pack.
3–158
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.3 Place 15 mm of plexiglas on the image receptor top as shown in illustration 2, to raise the Ready
pack film.
Note: This arrangement is done to simulate the exact film placement when a Bucky and a cassette are
used. This configuration is mandatory to measure accurately the X-Ray area in step 5.8, 5.9
&5.10 (particularly critical for front edge position).
The reason for such criticity is the tolerance decreasing (now 1% of SID for front edge overlap)
induced by various country regulations.
ILLUSTRATION 2
TOP VIEW
IMAGE RECEPTOR
TOP
JOB CARDS
THUMB TACK
PLEXIGLASS PLATE
(15 MM)
(Placed between film
and image receptor)
READY PACK FILM THUMB TACK
5.1.4 Place the Ready Pack on the plexiglas plate support so that the points of the two front thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the support and the third thumb tack butts perfectly up
against the left edge of the support. Correct positioning of all three thumb tacks is very important
for the success of the ensuing checks.
3–159
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

– Maximum format
– Mo track
– 25 kV
– 20 mAs
CAUTION It is critical that the TRACK is MO and that the FOCAL SPOT is LARGE.
JOB CARDS
of the two holes left by the thumb tacks on the front edge of the film (see Illustration 3 below).
Draw another line parallel to the first one and shifted by 3 mm inside the film. This line represents
the edge of the film inside a cassette and is the reference for all the following measurements.
ILLUSTRATION 3
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN LINE DETERMINED
IN INK OR PENCIL BY HOLES
3 mm
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
FILM
HOLE LEFT IN FILM

BY THUMB TACK
3–160
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3 Check parallelism between the front collimator blade and the front edge of the image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances y1 and y2 (see illustration 4).
CRITERION: The difference between y1 and y2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
If the criterion is not met, loosen the collimator assembly hold–down screws and rotate the assembly to correct
the parallelism. Re–tighten the screws. Check by repeating the exposure. Once the parallelism is satisfactory,
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from the most recent check exposure in all the
following checks).
5.4 Check perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1 and z2. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1 and z2 must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.
JOB CARDS
Note: It is important to notice that z1 and z2 are measured between the left edge of the exposed area of
the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.
If the criterion is not met, exchange the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.
5.5 Check perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1’ and z2’. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1’ and z2’ must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that z1’ and z2’ are measured between the right edge of the exposed area
of the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.
5.6 Check parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances d1 and d2. (See illustration 6.)
CRITERION: The difference between d1 and d2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that d1 and d2 are measured between the rear edge of the exposed area and
the REFERENCE LINE.
3–161
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.7 Check lateral centering of x–ray beam on image receptor support

Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge
of the film. (See illustration 7.)
t1 = . . . . . mm t2 = . . . . . . mm
CRITERION: 275 – (t1 + 2t2) must be LESS THAN 4 mm.
Where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support and distances t1 and t2 are in mm.
If the criterion is not met, adjust the lateral position of the X–ray tube housing as described at the end of Job
Card IST 021 ”CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM”.
Check by repeating the exposure before proceeding (be sure to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given
in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure). Once the lateral centering is satisfactory, proceed to the next
check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in all the following checks).
JOB CARDS
5.8 Check width of exposed area

Use the ruler to measure carefully distance t1 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the reference line (see
illustration 7). Same value as in 5.7 above:
t1 = . . . . . mm
CRITERION: t1 must be in the range of (238 + 2* MARG_L) ± 3 mm (respect the sign of MARG_L! ).
Where MARG_L was determined and entered in Section 5.1.
EXAMPLE 1: If margin is set to +2 mm (CDRH Standard), then the criterion is: 239 mm < t1 < 245 mm.
EXAMPLE 2: If margin is set to +4 mm, then the criterion is: 243 mm < t1 < 249 mm.
If this criterion is not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to re–configure the Senographe DMR as described in Section 5.1 above before taking the exposure) and
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in the
following check).
5.9 Check depth of exposed area.

Use the ruler to measure carefully distance d3 at approximately the lateral center of the exposed area. (See
illustration 6.)
CRITERION: d3 must be in the range of (178 + MARG_R) ±3mm where MARG_R was determined and
entered in Section 5.1.
EXAMPLE: If Margin is set to +2 mm (CDRH standard) then the criterion is: 177 mm < d3 < 183 mm.
If this criterion is not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure) and proceed to
the next check bellow, using the film obtained with Job Card IST 030.
3–162
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.10 Check the front margin of the exposed area

Use the ruler to measure carefully the distance W (see Illustration 8). The value sign is positive if the X-Ray
area exceed the image receptor edge, negative if the X-Ray area is inside the image receptor.
Criterion: (take care of Marg_F and W sign ! )

Marg_F –1.5 mm < W < Marg_F + 1.5 mm
Where Marg_F is the value entered in Section 5.1.
EXAMPLE 1: If Marg_F is set to +2 (CDRH, CEI standard)

0.5 mm < W < 3.5 mm
EXAMPLE 2: If Marg_F is set to –2 (Australia standard)

–3.5 mm < W < – 0.5 mm
JOB CARDS
If these criteria are not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to re–configure the Senographe DMR as described in Section 5.1 above before taking the exposure).
3–163
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 4
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN FRONT EDGE OF EXPOSED AREA AND FRONT EDGE OF

JOB CARDS
y1 y2
THIS LINE COR-

RESPONDS TO THE
LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4
REPORT
3–164
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 5
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PERPENDICULARITY BETWEEN LEFT AND RIGHT COLLIMATOR BLADES AND
FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
JOB CARDS
z2 Z2’
z1 z 1’
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4

3–165
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 6
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE AND FRONT EDGE OF
JOB CARDS
d1 d3 d2

3–166
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 7
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR CENTERING OF LATERAL COLLIMATOR BLADES WITH RESPECT TO THE IMAGE
RECEPTOR SUPPORT
JOB CARDS
t2 t1
approx. 100 mm

3–167
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 8
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR MAXIMUM OVERLAP OF X–RAY BEAM BEYOND FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEP-
TOR SUPPORT (MQSA REQUIREMENT)
JOB CARDS
w1 w2

IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT NOTE: In this example , w is a positive value.
3–168
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P) Job Card IST 027 B 1 of 14
Purpose: CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY Version No.:

FOR NON MOTORIZED FRONT BLADE SYSTEM Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–169
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FOR NON MOTORIZED FRONT BLADE SYSTEM Job Card IST 027 B 2 of 14
SECTION 5
The objective is to verify that the exposed area on the X–ray film is within the required tolerances for the fol-
lowing properties:
Parallelism between front collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Lateral centering of X–ray beam on image receptor support
Maximum overlap of X–ray beam beyond front edge of image receptor support (CDRH requirement)
Dimensions of exposed area (width and depth)
These checks are performed by making various geometrical measurements on an exposed ”cardboard cas-
JOB CARDS
sette” or ”Ready Pack” film.
5.1.1 Set the lateral collimator margin according to local standards or the doctor’s preference:
1. Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
2. Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/MARG_L on the console.
3. Press the ”+” or ”–” key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired lateral collima-
tor margin (in mm) is obtained. (See table below for standards.)
Standard Lateral margin (mm) = MARG_L Selection*

CEI** +2 .....
UK +3 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA/CDRH +2 .....
Note: The default value for lateral collimator margin is that of the CDRH standard.
3–170
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


– No bucky
– SID = 660 mm
JOB CARDS
3–171
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM
3–172
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

– Maximum format
– Mo track
– 25 kV
– 20 mAs
CAUTION It is critical that the TRACK be MO and that the FOCAL SPOT be LARGE.
JOB CARDS
MEASUREMENTS.
ILLUSTRATION 2
IN INK OR PENCIL
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
FILM
HOLE LEFT IN FILM

BY THUMB TACK
3–173
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.3 Check parallelism between front collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances y1 and y2. (See illustration 4.)
CRITERION: The difference between y1 and y2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
If the criterion is not met, loosen the collimator assembly hold–down screws and rotate the assembly to correct
the parallelism. Re–tighten the screws. Check by repeating the exposure. Once the parallelism is satisfactory,
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from the most recent check exposure in all the
following checks).
5.4 Check perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1 and z2. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1 and z2 must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that z1 and z2 are measured between the left edge of the exposed area of
JOB CARDS
the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.
If the criterion is not met, bend slightly the left collimator blade to correct the perpendicularity. Check by
repeating the exposure before proceeding. Once the perpendicularity is satisfactory, perform Job Card IST 030
”CALIBRATION OF LATERAL AND REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS”, then
repeat the check exposure one last time (be sure to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job
Card before taking the exposure) and proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this
most recent check exposure in all the following checks).
5.5 Check perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1’ and z2’. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1’ and z2’ must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that z1’ and z2’ are measured between the right edge of the exposed area
of the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.
If the criterion is not met, bend slightly the right collimator blade to correct the perpendicularity. Check by
repeating the exposure before proceeding. Once the perpendicularity is satisfactory, perform Job Card IST 030
”CALIBRATION OF LATERAL AND REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS”, then
repeat the check exposure one last time (be sure to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job
Card before taking the exposure) and proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this
most recent check exposure in all the following checks).
3–174
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.6 Check parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances d1 and d2. (See illustration 6.)
CRITERION: The difference between d1 and d2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
Note: It is important to notice that d1 and d2 are measured between the rear edge of the exposed area and
the REFERENCE LINE.
If the criterion is not met, bend slightly the rear collimator blade to correct the parallelism. Check by repeating
the exposure before proceeding. Once the parallelism is satisfactory, perform Job Card IST 030 ”CALIBRA-
TION OF LATERAL AND REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS”, then repeat the
check exposure one last time (be sure to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before
taking the exposure) and proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent
check exposure in all the following checks).
5.7 Check lateral centering of x–ray beam on image receptor support.
JOB CARDS
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge
of the film. (See illustration 7.)
CRITERION: 275 – (t1 + 2t2) must be LESS THAN 4 mm.
Where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support and distances t1 and t2 are in mm.
If the criterion is not met, adjust the lateral position of the X–ray tube housing as described at the end of Job
Card IST 021 ”CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM”.
Check by repeating the exposure before proceeding (be sure to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given
in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure). Once the lateral centering is satisfactory, proceed to the next
check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in all the following checks).
5.8 Check for maximum overlap of x–ray beam beyond front edge of image receptor support (CDRH
requirement).
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances w1 and w2. (See illustration 8.)
CRITERIA:
1. 8.5 mm < w1 < 11.5 mm
2. 8.5 mm < w2 < 11.5 mm
Note: If these two criteria are met, conformity with CDRH standards concerning beam overlap beyond
front edge of image receptor support is guaranteed for any track and SID (i.e. overlap < 2% of
SID).
3–175
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

If either or both of these criteria is not met, perform Job Card IST 028 ”ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT COLLI-
MATOR BLADE POSITION”. Check by repeating the exposure before proceeding (be sure to re–configure
the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure). Once the overlap is satisfactory,
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in all the
following checks).
5.9 Check width of exposed area.

Use the ruler to measure carefully distance t1 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the reference line. (See
illustration 7.)
CRITERION: t1 must be in the range of (244 + 2*margin) ± 3 mm.
Where ”margin” was determined and entered in section 5.1.1 of this Job Card.
EXAMPLE: If margin is set to –7 mm, then the criterion is: 227 mm < t1 < 233 mm.
If this criterion is not met, perform Job Card IST 030 ”CALIBRATION OF LATERAL AND REAR COLLI-
MATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS”, then repeat the check exposure (be sure to re–configure the
JOB CARDS
Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure) and proceed to the next check below
(use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in the following check).
5.10 Check depth of exposed area.

Use the ruler to measure carefully distance d3 at approximately the lateral center of the exposed area. (See
illustration 6.)
CRITERION: 168 mm < d3 < 176 mm
If this criterion is not met, perform Job Card IST 030 ”CALIBRATION OF LATERAL AND REAR COLLI-
MATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS”, then repeat the check exposure (be sure to re–configure the
Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure).
3–176
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 3
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN FRONT EDGE OF EXPOSED AREA AND FRONT EDGE OF
JOB CARDS
y1 y2
THIS LINE COR-

RESPONDS TO THE
LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR LINE DRAWN IN INK OR PEN-
REPORT CIL BETWEEN THE REAR-
THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM WARD EDGES OF THE TWO
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH FRONT THUMB TACK HOLES –
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT USED AS A REFERENCE FOR
FRONT EDGE
3–177
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 4
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PERPENDICULARITY BETWEEN LEFT AND RIGHT COLLIMATOR BLADES AND
FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
JOB CARDS
z2 Z2’
z1 z 1’
LINE DRAWN IN INK OR PEN-

THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM CIL BETWEEN THE TWO
FRONT EDGE
3–178
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 5
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE AND FRONT EDGE OF
JOB CARDS
d1 d3 d2

FRONT EDGE
3–179
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 6
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR CENTERING OF LATERAL COLLIMATOR BLADES WITH RESPECT TO THE IMAGE
RECEPTOR SUPPORT
JOB CARDS
t2 t1
approx. 100 mm

FRONT EDGE
3–180
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 7
TOR SUPPORT (CDRH REQUIREMENT)
JOB CARDS
w1 w2

FRONT EDGE
3–181
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–182
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT COLLIMATOR Version No.:

BLADE POSITION Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
D 5.5 and 7 mm Allen wrenches.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Good parallelism between front collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support. See the
appropriate section of Job Card IST 027 ”CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY” or IST
027B “CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY FOR NON–MOTORIZED FRONT
BLADE SYSTEM”.
3–183
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT COLLIMATOR

BLADE POSITION Job Card IST 028 2 of 8
SECTION 5
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING (IF NECESSARY) FRONT COLLIMATOR BLADE POSITION
The objective is to check that the front collimator blade allows complete X–ray exposure up to the front edge
of the film without exceeding allowable overlap requirements.
If the front collimator blade is adjusted correctly for rhodium track, large focal spot and 660 mm SID, com-
pliance with CDRH requirements (overlap < 2% of SID) is guaranteed for all possible configurations.

– No bucky
– SID = 660 mm
JOB CARDS
3–184
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM
3–185
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

D Mo track
D Large focal spot
D 25 kV
D 20 mAs
CAUTION It is critical that the TRACK be Mo and that the FOCAL SPOT be LARGE.
JOB CARDS
MEASUREMENTS.
5.3 Measure overlap of X–ray beam.
5.3.1 Use the ruler to measure carefully distances w1 and w2. (See illustration 3 below.)
5.3.2 Calculate the overlap with respect to the ideal value:

d = w1 +w2 – 10.0 mm
2
where 10.0 mm is the ideal value of overlap
Note: w1 and w2 are acceptable as they are if they are both within the following limits:
+8.5 mm < w1 < +11.5 mm

+8.5 mm < w2 < +11.5 mm
If w1 and/or w2 are outside these limits, proceed to the next section. If w1 and w2 are both within
these limits, the next section is optional.
The ideal value for ”d” is 0.
3–186
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.4 Adjust front collimator blade (see illustration 4).
5.4.1 Use the 7 mm Allen wrench to loosen the two front collimator blade locking screws.
5.4.2 Loosen the adjustment screw locknut.
5.4.3 If the value of ”d” measured above is POSITIVE, use the 5.5 mm Allen wrench to turn the front
collimator blade adjustment screw COUNTER–CLOCKWISE.
5.4.4 If the value of ”d” measured above is NEGATIVE, use the 5.5 mm Allen wrench to turn the front
collimator blade adjustment screw CLOCKWISE.
Note: Number of turns necessary = 0.5 * d
5.4.5 Use the 7 mm Allen wrench to re–tighten the two front collimator blade locking screws.
JOB CARDS
5.4.6 Re–tighten the adjustment screw locknut.
5.4.7 Repeat the exposure and check results as given in sections 5.1 to 5.3.
ILLUSTRATION 2

IN INK OR PENCIL
TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
HOLE LEFT IN FILM FILM
BY THUMB TACK
3–187
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 3
TOR SUPPORT (CDRH REQUIREMENT)
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM EXPOSED AREA OF FILM
JOB CARDS
w1 w2
NOTE: VALUES OF W1 AND W2

ARE POSITIVE AS SHOWN IN THIS CIL BETWEEN THE TWO
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH ILLUSTRATION (I.E. EXPOSED FRONT THUMB TACK HOLES –
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT AREA OVERLAPS FRONT EDGE OF USED AS A REFERENCE FOR
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT). IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
FRONT EDGE
3–188
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 4
ADJUSTMENT OF FRONT COLLIMATOR BLADE
7 MM HEX SOCKET HEAD LOCKING SCREWS
LATERAL COLLIMATOR BLADES
JOB CARDS
FRONT COLLIMATOR
BLADE
Í
Í
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ADJUSTMENT SCREW LOCKNUT
Í
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Í
5.5 MM HEX SOCKET HEAD
ADJUSTMENT SCREW
FRONT SIDE OF
SENOGRAPHE DMR
3–189
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–190
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE Version No.:

ANGLE Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D 18 x 24 mm film and cassette
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D None
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE
The objective is to determine the X–ray tube angle when in its reference position.
This calibration is done by taking an exposure (at a given SID) whose field coverage depth is limited by the
anode geometry and not by the rear collimator blade, measuring this field coverage depth, and entering this
depth into the Senographe DMR which subsequently calculates the X–ray tube angle when in its reference
position.
3–191
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE

ANGLE Job Card IST 029 2 of 4
5.1 Perform the calibration of X–ray tube reference angle.

– Contact mode
– 18 x 24 mm bucky and grid installed
– SID set to 560 mm
CAUTION The SID must not be changed from 560 mm until successful completion of
this Job Card.
JOB CARDS
5.1.2 Install a cassette loaded with fresh film in the bucky.
5.1.3 Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/TUBE/CALIB/EXPOSE/VALID/VALID on

the console.
5.1.4 Take an exposure by pressing the 2nd trigger button.
5.1.5 Develop the film and use the ruler to measure the distance between the front edge (edge closest to
the patient) of the film and the rear edge of the blackened area.
Note: Be sure to measure from the front edge of the FILM, even if the blackened area does not extend
to it.
Note: Be sure that the rear edge of the blackened area truly represents the end of the anode, and not a
stuck rear collimator blade (normally the software commands ”full open” during the exposure)
or other obstacle. This can be determined by the abruptness of the change in contrast between the
blackened area and the clear area. If the change is gradual, the exposure is good. If it is very abrupt,
it is necessary to correct the problem and repeat the calibration.
Note: If the blackened area of the film extends all the way to its rear edge, the X–ray tube reference angle
is severely incorrect and this calibration cannot be performed.
5.1.6 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/MEASURE on the console and enter the measured value in mm
using the NEXT and VALID keys.
3–192
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.7 Select SETUP/Calculation on the console to execute the X–ray tube angle calculation.
Normally, the message ”calib OK” appears on the console display.
If the message ”calib error” appears instead, this means that the calculated X–ray tube reference
angle value is out of range. To check this, select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. The dis-
played value of the calculated X–ray tube reference angle A_REF must be between +2.800E–1 and
+3.500E–1 (0.28 and 0.35) radians.
If the angle is out of range, correct the problem and repeat the calibration (check first that the SID
was effectively set to 560 mm).
5.1.9 If you’re turning the machine back over to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR off, then
back on again.
JOB CARDS
3–193
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–194
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT, Version No.:

COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D 18 x 24 cm film and cassette
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION This procedure produces X–Rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Cards IST 029 and IST 027 must have been done before commencing this procedure (these
prerequisites are given as a reminder only).
D Job Cards IST 028 if the collimator has a non–motorized front blade.
SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF ALL COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS
The objective is to determine the lateral, rear, and front, collimator reference positions. The result is that the
software will then be able to command and obtain any desired X–Ray format.
This calibration is done by taking three exposures (at a given SID):
– A first exposure with blades at optical fork reference.
– A second exposure as large as possible.
– A third exposure as small as possible.
The width and depth positions of the blackened areas of the exposed film are then measured and entered in
the Senographe DMR which in turn calculates and saves the reference positions.
3–195
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,

COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Job Card IST 030 2 of 4
5.1 Perform acquisition of three exposures.

– Large focal spot.
– Mo track
– Contact mode.
– Bucky 18 x 24 cm in place (with grid).
– SID must be set to 560 mm.
Note: A warning message “Set Sid to 560” will appear in the sub–menu if the SID is not correctly set.
In this case, simply reset the SID to 560. The message dissapears when the menu level is changed
(up or down).
JOB CARDS
1. The SID must not be changed from 560 mm until successful completion of
CAUTION this Job Card – the value is now the default for SID in the following calibra-
tion menus.
2. This calibration uses the full surface area of the film. Check that no mask
or other object is present in the beam before proceeding.
5.1.2 Install a cassette loaded with fresh film in the bucky.
5.1.3 Select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/COLLIM/EXPOSE/VALID/
VALID
Note: The default value of 10 mAs can be modified if necessary; for normal cassettes use 5 mAs for each
exposure. The kV value is automatically set to 22 kV.
Too dark an exposure will produce a shadow around the exposed area, decreasing distance mea-
surement accuracy.
5.1.4 Take the three exposures in sequence; press the 2nd trigger button and hold it until the third
exposure is acquired (the messages: “1st exposure”, 2nd exposure”, “3rd exposure”, then “end of
acquisition”, are displayed).
5.1.5 Develop the film and use the ruler to measure the differents distances as shown in Illustration 1.
3–196
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2 Enter measured values from DMR console. See illustration 1.
Note: During this procedure, warning messages Value too high or Value too low will be displayed if an
out-of-range value is entered. If this happens, check the value.
5.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/REF_L/MEASURE and enter the measured (L1) value in mm

using the NEXT and VALID keys. The valid range is 188.9 < L1 < 195.6.
5.2.2 Once L1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
ILLUSTRATION 1
BLACKENED FILM AREA DIMENSIONING
L2
JOB CARDS
R2
L1
L3
R1
R3
Front edge of film A1
5.2.3 Select SETUP/REF_R/MEASURE and enter the measured (R1) value in mm using the NEXT and
VALID keys. The valid range is 128.6 < R1 < 142.3.
5.2.4 Once R1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
5.2.5 Select SETUP/REF_F/MEASURE and enter the measured (A1) value in mm using the NEXT and
VALID keys. The valid range is 7.15 < A1 < 16.86.
5.2.6 Once A1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
5.2.7 L2 – L3 value must be entered as follows: Select SETUP/DIFF–L/MEASURE and enter the (L2
– L3) value in mm using the NEXT and VALID keys.
5.2.8 Once (L2 – L3) value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
3–197
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.9 R2 – R3 value must be entered as follows: Select SETUP/DIFF–R/MEASURE and enter the (R2
– R3) value in mm using the NEXT and VALID keys.
5.2.10 Once (R2 – R3) value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.
5.2.11 The calibration procedure is now complete. Perform a checksum as follows: SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/CKSUM.
Note: This calibration procedure adjusts the values of STP_L and STP_R to improve shutter positioning
accuracy. The new values after calibration should be close to the default values (below).
To check for correct operation of a collimator, or if you find a problem with the calibration, start
with the default parameter values given here:
Parameter Default value

JOB CARDS
CO_L 5.700 E+1

CO_R 4.100 E+1
CO_F 4.300 E–1
STP_L 2.500 E–1
STP_R 1.250 E–1
3–198
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON Version No.:

EXPOSED FILM Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Film and cassette of the type and size(s) used by the customer on the Senographe DMR being installed
(18 x 24 mm, plus 24 x 30 mm if this option is chosen by the customer)
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 026 ”CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION”
D Complete AEC calibration for the screen pair to be used in this test (see Installation Steering in chapter 1).
SECTION 5
TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM
The objective is to test for correct grid movement by taking exposures and examining the developed films for
grid lines .
Generalities on gridlines observation:

This procedure describes the optimum conditions for carrying out and analyzing grid line test exposures. It
is important to emphasize, however, that detection of the grid line effect is still a SUBJECTIVE test. In partic-
ular, the following considerations must be remembered:
• It is possible to obtain a good test exposure even on a poorly–calibrated DMR unit.
A tiny variation in speed or exposure time can produce a big variation in the grid lines visibil-
ity. Several exposures, even several patient exams may be required to confirm that the grid line
problem in a system has been significantly reduced after any change in the system .
3–199
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON

EXPOSED FILM Job Card IST 031 2 of 4
• Different people, whether customers or Service Engineers, have very different visual percep-
tions of grid lines.
• When the fault is not very pronounced, it is usually not present over the entire film, but only in
certain areas (at the edge of the film, as follows):
• The following display conditions are essential for grid line observation:
• Viewer light intensity must be high and uniform,
JOB CARDS
• Use of masks around the image to be observed is recommended,

• A magnifying glass sometimes helps to detect the fault,
• The fault shows up better when the optical density of the film is not too high (OD net < 1.2).
5.1.1 The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.
5.1.2 When placing Plexiglass on the cassette holder, the Plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
5.2 Perform the test for absence of grid lines on exposed film.
5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 mm bucky, grid and compression
paddle installed.
5.2.2 Place 1 cm of plexiglass on the bucky.

– Mode: See table 1
– Screen Pair: Choose the screen pair name that corresponds to the film and cassette being
used for the test
– Focal spot: See table
– Track: See table
– Filter: See table
– 25 kV (initial value)
– Format: maximum aperture of collimator
3–200
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

– Focal distance (SID): 660 mm, or SID commonly used by customer,

– Cranio–caudal projection (examination arm in vertical position) or, where appropriate,
the projection at which the customer most often sees the grid.
5.2.4 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See ”Visual Display of Param-
eter Values” in chapter 1.
5.2.5 Load the cassette with a fresh undeveloped film that corresponds to the screen pair being used for
the test and install it in the bucky.
5.2.6 Take exposure N°1 as described in Table 1.

TABLE 1
GRID LINE TEST EXPOSURES
N° Mode Track Filter Plexiglass KV mAs Expo- Comments
JOB CARDS
thickness sure
(mm) time
(ms)
1 AEC MO MO 15 25
2 AOP–CNT 15
3 AOP–CNT 25
4 AOP–CNT 35
5.2.7 Note the exposure time as displayed on the console display. If it is within the range 0.200 to 0.300
S, develop the film and proceed directly to step 5.2.10. If it is above (below) this range, increase
(decrease) the HV by 1 kV and repeat the exposure using the same undeveloped film in the cassette.
Continue increasing or decreasing the HV by 1 kV until a satisfactory exposure time is reached, then
proceed to the next step.
Note: For an unusually slow film (i.e. if the exposure time is still greater than 300 mS at 30 kV), remove
the Plexiglass from the bucky and continue the search for a satisfactory exposure time.
Note: For an unusually fast film (i.e. if the exposure time is still less than 200 mS at 22 kV), increase
the amount of Plexiglass on the bucky to 2 cm and continue the search for a satisfactory exposure
time.
5.2.8 Re–load the cassette with a fresh undeveloped film that corresponds to the screen pair being used
for the test and install it in the cassette holder.
5.2.9 Keeping the same HV value as determined above, take an exposure and develop the film.
5.2.10 Perform test exposures N°2 and develop film
5.2.11 Perform test exposures N°3 and develop film
5.2.12 Perform test exposures N°4 and develop film .
3–201
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2.13 If the Senographe DMR being installed is equipped with the 24 x 30 mm bucky/grid option, per-
form an exposure in the conditions of Exposure N°4 (step 5.2.12) using 24X30 option.
5.2.14 Study the developed films on a light screen with the jeweler’s loop. Verify that there are no signs
of grid lines anywhere on the exposed area of the film. Visible grid lines indicate a problem in the
grid drive train or defective offsets and gain settings. If there are visible grid lines, proceed to steps
5.2.15 to 5.2.16.
5.2.15 Re–calibrate gain and offset following the bucky trouble shooting Job Card.
5.2.16 Check also there are any sticky or rough points by moving the grid by hand back and forth across
its full range of movement.
5.2.17 If you are turning the machine back over to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR
off, then back on again.
JOB CARDS
3–202
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE Version No.:

COVERS AND PANELS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Metric Allen wrenches
D Large flat screwdriver
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS
This section is divided into two subsections, one for removal and replacement of generator side covers and
trim panels, and one for removal and replacement of gantry side covers and trim panels.
5.1 Remove/replace generator side covers and trim panels (see illustration 1).
5.1.1 Remove all power from the Senographe DMR by turning off the wall–mounted circuit breaker.
5.1.2 Remove the four plastic plugs from screws of generator top panel.
5.1.3 Use an Allen wrench to remove the four generator top panel retaining screws (5).
5.1.4 Remove generator top panel by lifting upwards.
3–203
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE

COVERS AND PANELS Job Card IST 032 2 of 4
5.1.5 For EACH of the four generator side panels:
1. Slightly lift the panel upwards and towards yourself.
2. Disconnect the ground wire FROM THE GENERATOR END to avoid RISK OF CREATING
SHORT CIRCUITS.
5.1.6 Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. BE SURE TO RE–CONNECT THE
GROUND WIRE ON EACH OF THE FOUR SIDE PANELS.
5.2 Remove/replace gantry side covers and trim panels (see illustration 1).
5.2.2 Use the screwdriver to remove screw (1).

JOB CARDS
5.2.3 Remove plastic plugs and screws (2) and (3) from each column half–cover.
5.2.4 Do not touch screws (4). Undo hex bolt (6) by 2 or 3 turns (accessible through a slot at rear of the
base).
(this method keeps alignment of covers with safety stop switches).
5.2.5 Slide complete half–cover towards you to remove it.
5.2.6 Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH OR
DAMAGE CABLES.
Note: It is possible to remove only one column half–cover.
3–204
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
SCREW LOCATIONS FOR REMOVING/REPLACING SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS
JOB CARDS
2
5
CPU AND OTHER

BOARDS ACCESSIBLE
FROM THIS SIDE
1
4
6
3–205
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–206
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY Version No.:

TESTING Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Digital mAs meter (GSPONER type) able to display tube current
D Compression measurement tool: GAMMEX RMI model 817 or Mammo compression scale
JOB CARDS
# 46–194427P407 (digital display)
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
3–207
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY

TESTING Job Card IST 033 2 of 6
SECTION 5
GENERATOR TESTING
The objective is to check quickly the generator kV, mA and mAs calibrations, which have already been done
in the factory. At the same time, these procedures will warm up the X–ray tube slightly in preparation for the
AEC calibration.
5.1 Set up generator for testing.
5.1.1 Configure the Senographe DMR for the following exposure:

Mode manual (2–point)
Focal spot: large
Track: Mo
Filter: Mo
JOB CARDS
mAs: 60 (lower mAs value may give inaccurate measurements)

HV: 22 kV
4 cm of plexiglass in the X–Ray field for protecting the photocell.
5.1.2 Activate display of parameters following an exposure by selecting SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/

GENE/CONFIG/DISP/YES on the console (see chapter 1 section 3–10–2). Return to applica-
tion mode.
5.1.3 Connect the digital mAs meter to kV mA board 701–PL1 (on HV tank unit 701) between terminals
MES_MA_POS and MES_MA_NEG. Disconnect the jumper that is normally between these same
two terminals.
5.1.4 Set the mAs meter to current (mA) measurement.
5.1.5 Take 5 exposures at approximately 20 second intervals, incrementing the HV by 2 kV each time
(i.e. 22 – 24 – 26 – 28 – 30 kV).
5.1.6 Take 5 more exposures at the same interval, leaving the HV set at 30 kV.
5.1.7 The X–ray tube current value displayed on the console (Idisplay) must be 100 mA ± 5 mA AND in
agreement with the value read on the mAs meter (Imeasure) ± 5% (this value is available both for
GS412 and Maxiray 70TH–F tubes).
IF Idisplay ≠ Imeasure then perform Job Card IST 016 ”CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA
MEASUREMENT” followed by Job Card IST 003 ”CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE
HEATER CURRENT”.
5.1.8 Take 2 exposures at 40 kV and 50 mAs at an interval of 30 seconds. No arcing should be detected.
If arcing is detected, perform IST 020 ”AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP”.
3–208
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.9 Re–configure the Senographe DMR to 30 kV and 60 mAs. Take one exposure for each of the three
following focal spot/track combinations and verify the expected X–ray tube current reading on the
console display:
The values below apply for tube Maxiray 70TH–F
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/MO TRACK => I = 40 mA ± 2 mA
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 35 mA ± 2 mA
LARGE FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 62 mA ± 4 mA
The values below apply for tube GS412

SMALL FOCAL SPOT/MO TRACK => I = 40 mA ± 2 mA
SMALL FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 40 mA ± 2 mA
LARGE FOCAL SPOT/RH TRACK => I = 75 mA ± 4 mA
JOB CARDS
5.1.10 Disconnect the mAs meter from the Senographe DMR and re–connect the jumper on kV mA board
701–PL1.
5.1.11 Verify kVp using a non–invasive kVp meter, and if needed, recalibrate kVp with IST 017 (this step
may be necessary, due to local regulation)
SECTION 6
GANTRY TESTING
The objective is to check quickly the basic functions of the gantry.
Note that the following functions are tested by the software during each power–up sequence:
D Filter holder rotation
D Lateral, front and rear collimator blade movement
D X–ray tube housing movement
D Compression paddle movement to home position
D Column movement limit stops
D Coherency between focal spot size, magnification and X–ray tube housing angulation
D Grid movement
D Generator–gantry communications link
D Gantry CPU board
3–209
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.1 Check gantry readout.

Immediately following the power–up sequence, the gantry readout should indicate the X–ray format and
magnification factor only; the breast thickness and compression force readouts should be disabled.
In fact the gantry readout displays the size of the actual X–Ray field taking into account the margins set up.
Note: X–Ray format readout displays the actual X–ray field depending on margins settings configured
in steering guide section 14.v.
6.2 Check column movement.
6.2.1 With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all five column up/down control
buttons are operational (check each button for up and down movement of column).
6.2.2 Move column to its upper and lower limits. Optical sensors should stop movement. If optical sen-
sors have failed, mechanical safety stops halt movement. Total one–way movement time
JOB CARDS
(going either up or down) between upper and lower limits should be 16 ± 2 seconds. This time
includes initial acceleration which lasts 3 seconds.
6.3 Check arm rotation.
6.3.1 With the compression paddle out of compression, check that all four arm rotation control buttons
are operational (check each button for release and re–locking of arm rotation).
6.3.2 Rotate arm through its full range of ± 180°. Check that electro–brake is sufficient by manual action
on the handles.
6.3.3 Check alignment of angle markings at 0°.
6.4 Check light centering device.
6.4.1 Press one of the light centering device activation buttons. The light centering device should light
for 30 seconds for large formats (eg: 18x24, 24x30). The light centering device should light for
120 seconds for medium and small formats.
6.5 Check format control.

Check that each of the two format control pushbuttons, when pressed repeatedly, result in the sequence: 1)
light centering device lights; 2) first format reduction; 3) second format reduction; 4) full format.
6.6 Check magnification sensors.
6.6.1 Set SID to 660 mm.
6.6.2 With magnification device removed, the gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.0.
6.6.3 Install the magnification device into the lower, middle and upper holes successively. The gantry
readout should show a magnification of 1.5, 1.8 and 1.9, respectively.
6.6.4 Leaving the magnification device in the upper holes, change the SID to 610, 560 and 510 mm
successively. The gantry readout should show a magnification of 1.7, 1.6 and 1.5, respectively.
3–210
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.7 Check tube housing arm detents.
6.7.1 With Stereotix 2 NOT installed, activate the tube housing arm locking lever and rotate the tube
housing arm to its ± 15° and ± 27° detents. When tube housing arm is locked in each of these four
positions, the error message ”Incorrect X_Ray Incidence” should appear on the console display.
6.7.2 Rotate the tube housing arm so that it is ”floating” between detents. After five seconds, the error
message ”Tube Housing Arm Unlocked” should appear on the console display and ”Arm
Unlocked” should appear on the gantry readout.
6.8 Check paddle compression.
6.8.1 Verify that both sets of compression/decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs
located on the paddle holder all function correctly (i.e. the paddle goes up and down in response
to each command).
JOB CARDS
6.8.2 Use the mammo compression scale placed between the cassette holder and the compression paddle
to check calibration of the compression force display on the gantry readout. Measure one point at
5 daN and one point at 15 daN. The value on the gantry readout must agree within ± 1 daN. If it does
not, perform IST 023 ”CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR”.
Note: If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available, this verification can be done
by setting SID to 660 mm, lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the cassette holder, instal-
ling the magnification device in the upper pair of holes, and connecting a spring dynamometer
(calibrated from 0 to 15 kg) between the compression paddle and the magnification device.
6.9 Check breast thickness measurement.
6.9.1 Set SID to 660 mm, install the 18x24 bucky and place 10 mm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.
6.9.3 Slowly increase compression force on the plexiglass while watching the breast thickness display
on the gantry readout. The displayed value should remain in the range 10 mm ± 3 mm for any value
of compression force (as displayed on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 kg.
6.9.4 Replace 10 mm of plexiglass with 50 mm of plexiglass and repeat the above check. Now the dis-
played value should remain in the range 50 mm ± 3 mm for any value of compression force
(as displayed on the gantry readout) between 5 and 15 kg.
6.9.5 If either or both of the above checks does not give a satisfactory result, perform Job Card IST 025
”CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT”.
3–211
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6.10 Check cassette size sensor.

With the bucky removed, activate the light centering device, then install the 24x30 bucky. The format size
should increase, as indicated by the size of the field illuminated by the light centering device.
6.11 Check grid presence sensor.
6.11.1 With the bucky installed, press the 1st trigger button on the console. There should be grid
movement.
6.12 Check emergency stop buttons.

Pressing either of the emergency stop buttons (located on either side of the gantry column base) should result
in a complete power–down of both the generator and gantry.
JOB CARDS
3–212
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECKING SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM Version No.:

PROCESSING Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Supply of undeveloped film of type used by the customer
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Sensitometer
JOB CARDS
D Densitometer
D Opaque sheet
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
CHECKING FILM PROCESSING
The objective is to check the light–tightness of the darkroom, the influence of the safelighting and correct
operation of the automatic film processor.
5.1 Check darkroom light–tightness and influence of safe–lighting.
5.1.1 Enter the darkroom and load a cassette with the film currently used for clinical purposes, taking care
to protect it from possible fogging from the darkroom safe light or leakage.
Note 1 : The emulsion side of the film must be positioned facing the screen side of the cassette (away from
the tube)
Note 2 : For Kodak Ortho–MA film, the emultion side is underneath when the notch is top left.
5.1.2 In 2–point mode, (HV: 28 kV, mAs=70, 4 cm of plexiglas) expose the cassette to the x–rays in such
a way as to obtain a film with an optical density of between 0.8 and 1.4 (change mAs as necessary
and repeat exposure with a fresh film).
3–213
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECKING SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM

PROCESSING Job Card IST 034 2 of 4
5.1.3 Reload the cassette and make an exposure using the same factors; do not develop the film.
5.1.4 Unload the cassette in the darkroom and place the film on the work surface, emulsion side upwards
and completely covered by an opaque sheet.
Note: for KODAK ORTHO–MA films, the emulsion side is uppermost when the notch is top right.
5.1.5 Prepare the second opaque sheet on the work surface, on the left.
5.1.6 Move the opaque sheet covering the film to the right, uncovering half the film (see illustration 2)
and simultaneously activate the timer.
5.1.7 If this is the first maintenance inspection (reference test) proceed to the next step (5.1.8).
If this is a periodic maintenance check, go to step (5.1.11).
5.1.8 After 15 seconds, cover about a quarter of the bottom lefthand part of the film with the second
JOB CARDS
opaque sheet (see illustration 2, 1st area).
5.1.9 After 30 seconds, move the second opaque sheet upwards in such a way as to cover about half of
the lefthand part of the film (2nd area).
5.1.10 After one minute, move the second opaque sheet upwards to cover about three quarters of the left-
hand part of the film (3rd area).
5.1.11 After 2 minutes, cover the film completely with the first opaque sheet.
Note 1 : if the film is to be handled in the darkroom for long periods (more than one minute), it should be
tested in 5 positions and left for 2 extra minutes in the last position.
Note 2 : if this is a periodic maintenance check, one exposure of the film (of 2 to 4 minutes according to
requirements) will be sufficient.
5.1.12 Develop the film, protecting it with the opaque sheet until it is inserted in the automatic processor.
5.1.13 Write the following data on the developed film :

– date and time
– place
5.1.14 Look for the first area on the film in which the frame line is visible (see illustration 2) and note down
the time corresponding to the area concerned on the film.
5.1.15 Interpreting the results

The time obtained, corresponding to the first visible area, should not be less than 2 minutes.
Note: the ”laboratory safety time”, defined as half the period of time corresponding to the first visible
area, should also be at least one minute.
3–214
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.16 Decisions
1. If the time corresponding to the first visible area is greater than 2 minutes, go on to the next pro-
cedure.
2. If the time is less than 2 minutes, check that:

– the safelighting complies with requirements
– there us no visible light leak (door, ceiling, floor, pipe ducts, etc.)
Inform the user of these problems and take the necessary steps to obtain correct results in subse-
quent tests.
3. If the time is less than 1 minute, priority must be given to solving the problem to enable the tests
to continue.
ILLUSTRATION 2
JOB CARDS
2 minutes 4th area
1 minute 3rd area
30 seconds 2nd area
15 seconds 1st area
Frame line
5.1.17 Use the densitometer to measure the relative optical density on both parts of the film.
CRITERION 1: Any difference between the relative optical densities measured must be less
than 0.1.
CRITERION 2: Neither optical density measured must exceed 0.2 (except for certain fast films).
3–215
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.18 If either or both of the above two criteria are not met:
1. Check the light–tightness of the darkroom by repeating sections 5.1.1 to 5.1.17 with the safe-
light turned OFF.
2. Check the safelight itself.
5.2 Check automatic film processor.
5.2.1 Perform a sensitometry test on the type of film being used by the customer.
Note: Be sure that the sensitometer is in the green position.
5.2.2 Develop the film.
5.2.3 Calibrate the densitometer to zero on step 1 on the sensitometric strip.

JOB CARDS
5.2.4 Use the densitometer to find the first step whose relative optical density is greater than or equal to
1. Let N be the step found and D(N) its relative optical density.
5.2.5 Measure the relative optical density for step (N+2). Let this measured value be D(N+2).
5.2.6 Calculate the film gamma:

Gamma = D(N+2) – D(N)
0.3
CRITERION: Check that the gamma calculated corresponds to that given by the film manufacturer
within a tolerance of ± 0.35 (e.g. gamma ≈ 3.2 for Kodak Ortho–Ma film).
Example: suppose D(N) = 1.12 and D(N+2) = 2.29:

then Gamma = 2.29 – 1.12
0.3
Note: A gamma value less that 3.0 cannot produce a good image quality in mammography.
5.2.7 If the above criterion is not met, check the automatic film processor (temperature, cleanliness,
change in chemicals, etc.).
3–216
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE Version No.:

LAMP Date:
Note: This Job Card apply for systems equipped with new centering devices. For old cen-
tering devices, consult Job Card IST 035B.
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D New centering device lamp (only genuine part number 2188568 must be used, to ensure correct light
intensity, easy filament centering and reliability).
SECTION 2
JOB CARDS
TOOLS
D Standard screwdrivers, open–end wrenches, etc.
D Ruler calibrated in mm
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
The objective is to replace the centering device lamp and set it to the correct vertical height.
5.1 Remove old lamp.
5.1.1 Turn the Senographe DMR off.
5.1.2 Remove the two half–covers from the gantry head.
5.1.3 Remove the anti–scatter box (2 parts); first remove the side part then loosen slightly the attachment
screw (at center underside) of the box and remove the anti–scatter box by pulling it gently forward.
5.1.4 Remove collimator assembly retaining pins by first removing the 2 cotter pins from one end of each
retaining pin. Pivot the collimator assembly downwards.
3–217
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE

LAMP Job Card IST 035 2 of 4
5.1.5 Loosen slightly the two attachment screws on the light box and remove the light box by pulling it
gently forward.
CAUTION Wait for the lamp to cool down before removing.
5.1.6 Remove the old lamp by pulling firmly but gently downwards.
5.2 Install and position new lamp.
Note: When handling the new lamp, be sure not to touch the glass surface with your fingers. Always use
a clean dry cloth or paper handkerchief.
5.2.1 Insert the leads of the new lamp into its socket SLOWLY, and PUSH THEM IN ALL THE WAY.
JOB CARDS
Note: The distance of 30 mm between filament center and pin end is guaranteed by the lamp manufac-
turer, see Illustration 1.
5.2.2 Re–install the light box without tighten its attachment screews.
CAUTION The light box is for protection in case any explosion of the new lamp being
installed occurs.
5.2.3 Turn on the Senographe DMR and verify that the new lamp lights when activated, then turn the
Senographe DMR off again.
5.2.4 Tighten the two attachment screws of the light box..
5.2.5 Check that the CENTER of the filament is aligned with the CENTER of the small slot in the light
box when your eye is at the level of the small slot (see illustration 1). If not, start 5.2 again.
5.2.6 Pivot the collimator assembly back up and re–install its retaining pins and cotter pins.
5.2.7 Proceed directly to Job Card IST 036 ”CENTERING DEVICE LAMP ADJUSTMENT”, leaving
anti–scatter box and gantry head half–covers removed.
3–218
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
CORRECT LAMP FILAMENT HEIGHT
VISUAL INSPECTION:
30 ± 0.5 mm CHECK THAT CENTER OF
FILAMENT IS ALIGNED
JOB CARDS
WITH CENTER OF LIGHT
BOX SLOT.
FILAMENT LIGHT BOX
3–219
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–220
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P) Job Card IST 035 B 1 of 4
Purpose: REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE Version No.:

LAMP (OLD VERSION) Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D New centering device lamp
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
The objective is to replace the centering device lamp and set it to the correct vertical height.
5.1 Remove old lamp.
5.1.1 Turn the Senographe DMR off.
5.1.2 Remove the two half–covers from the gantry head.
5.1.3 Loosen slightly the attachment screw on the protection box and remove the protection box by pull-
ing it gently forward.
5.1.4 Remove collimator assembly retaining pin by first removing the cotter pin from one of its ends.
Pivot the collimator assembly downwards.
3–221
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

LAMP (OLD VERSION) Job Card IST 035 B 2 of 4
5.1.5 Loosen slightly the two attachment screws on the light box and remove the light box by pulling it
gently forward.
5.1.6 Remove the old lamp by pulling firmly but gently downwards.
5.2 Install and position new lamp.
Note: When handling the new lamp, be sure not to touch the glass surface with your fingers. Always use
a clean dry cloth or paper handkerchief.
5.2.1 Study the new lamp from a profile perspective (i.e. filament axis perpendicular to the eye) and
decide if the filament is centered (from front to back when mounted in the Senographe DMR) in
the glass envelope. If it is NOT centered, be sure to orient the new lamp WITH THE FILAMENT
TOWARDS THE FRONT OF THE SENOGRAPHE DMR (i.e. towards the patient), when instal-
ling it.
JOB CARDS
5.2.2 After orienting the new lamp (if necessary) as described above, insert the leads of the new lamp into
its socket SLIGHTLY, just enough to hold the lamp in place. DO NOT PUSH THEM IN ALL THE
WAY.
5.2.3 Turn on the Senographe DMR and verify that the new lamp lights when activated, then turn the
Senographe DMR off again.
5.2.4 Take the ruler and measure the vertical distance between the BOTTOM EDGE of the filament and
the edge of the lamp mounting frame as shown in illustration 1. The objective is to attain a distance
of 16 ± 0.5 mm.
5.2.5 If this distance is not in the range 16 ± 0.5 mm, push the new lamp further into its socket CARE-
FULLY until the correct distance is obtained.
DO NOT push the new lamp too far into its socket because it is very difficult
CAUTION to pull it out again without damaging it.
5.2.6 Re–install the light box and tighten its two attachment screws.
5.2.7 Check that the BOTTOM EDGE of the filament is aligned with the bottom edge of the small slot
in the light box when your eye is at the level of the small slot (see illustration 1). If this is not the
case, remove the light box and repeat steps 5.2.4 to 5.2.5.
5.2.8 Pivot the collimator assembly back up and re–install its retaining pin and cotter pin.
5.2.9 Proceed directly to Job Card IST 036 ”CENTERING DEVICE LAMP ADJUSTMENT”, leaving
protection box and gantry head half–covers removed.
3–222
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
CORRECT LAMP FILAMENT HEIGHT
VISUAL INSPECTION:
CHECK THAT BOTTOM OF
FILAMENT IS ALIGNED
WITH BOTTOM OF LIGHT
JOB CARDS
16 ± 0.5 mm BOX SLOT.
FILAMENT LIGHT BOX
3–223
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–224
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE Version No.:

LAMP Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 035 “REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP” (protection box and gantry
head half–covers are still removed) or IST 035B “REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
(OLD VERSION)”
SECTION 5
ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP
The objective is to adjust the position of the centering device lamp (in all three dimensions, if necessary) so
that the lit field coincides, within acceptable tolerances, with the exposed X–ray field. This is done by first
exposing a film and then illuminating it on the image receptor support to check the coincidence of the lit field
with the exposed area on the X–ray film. The following properties of this coincidence are measured and
adjusted, if necessary, in the following order:
Lateral centering
Field width coincidence
Field depth coincidence
Field front light alignment
Note: Field width, depth and front can be fine–tuned using procedure detailed in IST 028.
3–225
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


– Bucky 18 x 24 installed (mandatory).
– SID = 560 mm
5.1.2 Reset light alignment and light coverage values to zero.

Starting from application mode, select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/LIGHT/ALIGN
Use + & – keys or rotate console kV button to return the displayed ”ALIGN” value to zero.
Select SETUP/COVERAGE
JOB CARDS
Use + & – keys or rotate console kV button to return the displayed ”COVERAGE” value to zero.
3–226
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM
3–227
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

– 18 x 24 format (collimator blades fully open)
– Mo track
– Mo filter
– 25 kV
– 50 mAs

JOB CARDS
5.3 Check and adjust, if necessary, lateral centering.
Note: It is advisable to turn off all room lighting before proceeding to the following steps.
5.3.1 Replace the three thumb tacks in the holes in the developed film.
5.3.2 Place the developed film back onto the image receptor support, with the same orientation as during
the exposure. Carefully align the thumb tacks against the edges of the image receptor support,
exactly as during the exposure.
5.3.3 Keeping the same format size as during the exposure, turn on the light centering device lamp.
5.3.4 Study the relationship between the lit zone from the light centering device and the darkened area
on the film.
5.3.5 Determine if the two areas are centered laterally (illustration 4 shows correct lateral centering).
Note: The lit zone may be wider or narrower than the darkened area on the film at this point.
Illustration 4 shows the lit zone wider than the darkened area on the film.
5.3.6 If the two areas are not centered laterally, turn adjustment screw 1 (see illustration 3) until the lit
zone is centered laterally with the darkened area on the film.
5.4 Check and adjust, if necessary, field width coincidence.
5.4.1 Keep the film aligned on the image receptor support as above.
5.4.2 If the lit zone is wider (narrower) than the darkened area on the film, reduce (increase) the width
of the lit zone by turning knurled nut 2 in the positive (negative) direction (see illustration 3).
Illustration 5 shows correct field width coincidence.
3–228
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.5 Check and adjust, if necessary, field depth coincidence.
5.5.1 Keep the film aligned on the image receptor support as above.
5.5.2 If the rear edge of the lit zone is not aligned with the rear edge of the darkened area on the film, turn
adjustment screw 3 (see illustration 3) until alignment is achieved. Illustration 6 shows correct field
depth coincidence.
Note: The only mecanical adjustment for alignment of the front edge of the let zone is by adjusting the
mirror.
D Adjust the angle of the mirror with the angle adjustment screw (see illustration 2 ) in order to align the
front blade with the darkered area on the film.
Tilt the mirror slightly otherwise a major adjustement may distort the light
JOB CARDS
CAUTION field.
ILLUSTRATION 2
TUBE HOUSING ARM WITH MIRROR INSTALLATION DETAIL
MIRROR FRAME
TUBE HOUSING ARM
MIRROR MOUNTING SCREWS

AND LOCKNUTS
MIRROR ANGLE ADJUSTMENT SCREW

AND SPRING
3–229
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.5.3 Re–install protection box and tighten its attachment screw.
5.5.4 Re–install the two half–covers from the gantry head.
5.5.5 Perform (or return) to job card IST 028.

ILLUSTRATION 3
CENTERING DEVICE LAMP POSITION ADJUSTMENTS
(INCREASE LATERAL WIDTH)
ÊÊÊ
LIGHT BOX
ÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊ
JOB CARDS
1
(LATERAL CENTERING ADJUSTMENT)
3
(REAR BLADE ADJUSTMENT)
3–230
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 4
CORRECT LATERAL ALIGNMENT OF ZONE LIT BY LIGHT CENTERING DEVICE WITH EXPOSED AREA OF X–RAY FILM
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT ZONE LIT BY LIGHT
CENTERING DEVICE
JOB CARDS
LATERAL CENTERING IS
ACHIEVED WHEN THESE
TWO DISTANCES ARE EQUAL
EXPOSED AREA OF FILM

3–231
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 5
WIDTH COINCIDENCE BETWEEN ZONE LIT BY LIGHT CENTERING DEVICE AND EXPOSED AREA OF X–RAY FILM
CENTERING DEVICE
JOB CARDS

3–232
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 6
DEPTH COINCIDENCE BETWEEN ZONE LIT BY LIGHT CENTERING DEVICE AND EXPOSED AREA OF X–RAY FILM
CENTERING DEVICE
JOB CARDS
DEPTH COINCIDENCE IS ACHIEVED
WHEN REAR EDGE OF LIT AREA IS
ALIGNED WITH REAR EDGE OF
DARKENED AREA ON FILM

3–233
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–234
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: JUMPERS AND SWITCHES Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
JUMPERS AND SWITCHES
The objective is to verify the position of jumpers and switches. Jumpers and switches are divided into three
groups: generator, gantry and console.
5.1 Generator jumpers and switches.
5.1.1 Check that the jumper on generator CPU board 400–PL3 is installed in position X2.
See illustration 1.
This jumper must NEVER be removed from position X2 and must NEVER
CAUTION be placed in position TP1. If you find this jumper either removed or placed
in position TP1, the generator CPU RAMs are totally erased, necessitating
a TOTAL RE–CALIBRATION of the generator and AEC.
3–235
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
JUMPERS AND SWITCHES

5.2 Gantry jumpers and switches.
5.2.1 Check that the jumper on gantry CPU board 800–PL3 is installed in position X2. See illustration
1.
This jumper must NEVER be removed from position X2 and must NEVER
CAUTION be placed in position TP1. If you find this jumper either removed or placed
in position TP1, the gantry CPU RAMs are totally erased, necessitating a
TOTAL RE–CALIBRATION of the gantry.
ILLUSTRATION 1
POSITION OF JUMPER ON GENERATOR CPU BOARD 400–PL3 AND GANTRY CPU BOARD 800–PL3
GENE CPU BOARD 400–PL3 or
GANTRY CPU BOARD 800–PL3
!
JOB CARDS
B46
B41
X2
BT1
!
P1 P2
5.3 Console self–test activation switch.
5.3.1 Check that console self–test activation switch 100 S1 is in its ”application position”. See
illustration 2.
Note: When this switch is in its ”unused” position, the console display stays blank and ”beeps” at
1–second intervals after power on is pressed.
ILLUSTRATION 2
CONSOLE SELF–TEST ACTIVATION SWITCH 100 S1
SENOGRAPHE DMR CONSOLE SIDE VIEW
CONSOLE AUTOTEST POSITION
100PL2 XJ3
APPLICATION POSITION UNUSED POSITION
100PL2 XJ5
100 S1
CONSOLE SELF–TEST ACTIVATION
SWITCH 100 S1 (LOCATED NEXT TO
CONSOLE CABLE CONNECTOR 100 XJ3)
3–236
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: SAFETY LABELLING Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The attachment of appropriate safety labelling to the equipment is a LEGAL

CAUTION REQUIREMENT for operation of an X–ray producing unit.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None
SECTION 5
SAFETY LABELLING
The objective is to select and attach appropriate safety labels to the Senographe DMR, according to local safety
regulations concerning the use of X–ray producing equipment.
3–237
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SAFETY LABELLING
5.1 Locate the envelop (which is taped underneath the console) containing the 3 possible safety labels and select the
one that corresponds to local regulations (see illustration 1 below).
ILLUSTRATION 1
SAFETY LABELS
CEI (EUROPE) & ASIA
REDAC (CANADA)
JOB CARDS
CDRH (USA)
Note: The CDRH (USA) safety label is already affixed on the console.
3–238
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SAFETY LABELLING
5.2 Peel off the self–adhesive backing from the selected safety label, and stick the label over the CDRH (USA) label
in the lower right–hand corner of the console (see illustration 2 below).
ILLUSTRATION 2
PLACEMENT OF SAFETY LABEL ON CONSOLE
JOB CARDS
STICK LABEL HERE
3–239
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SAFETY LABELLING
Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–240
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP Version No.:

STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
JOB CARDS
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Generator calibration must be successfully completed for the screen pair in question before this Job Card is
performed.
Note: The AOP strategy parameter is determined automatically at the end of IST013 or IST014 refer-
ence energy calibration. So the manual setting of the AOP strategy (IST039) is no longer neces-
sary.
However, if there are several senographe DMR installed on the same site, it may be necessary to
“equalize” all the strategies to the same value, to avoid unjustified mAs deviation between identi-
cal senographes. For this purpose only, it is still possible to read/set the strategy value.
This equalization must only be done if the DMRs are using the same film/screen couple, same film
processor, same SID.
3–241
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRA-

TEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 039 2 of 4
SECTION 5
DETERMINE AOP STRATEGY
This Job Card provides the procedure for determining the AOP strategy parameter for a given screen pair. This
is done by taking a reference X–ray exposure in 1–point mode and choosing the AOP strategy parameter
according to the resulting mAs from the exposure.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BE OBSERVED DURING ALL PROCEDURES GIVEN BELOW IN
THIS SECTION:
this Job Card.
D When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
5.1 Set up for and take the exposure.

JOB CARDS

– Contact (no magnification)
– Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
– 4 cm plexiglass on the bucky
– SID : as per customer’s choice
– AEC mode (1–point)
– HV : 28 kV
– Track: Mo
– Filter: Mo
– Focal spot: LARGE
– Manual density correction: +0
993
5.1.2 Load cassette with undeveloped film into cassette holder and take an exposure. Note down the
resulting mAs.
5.1.3 Determine AOP strategy parameter value according to the resulting mAs value:
mAs < 30 => strategy = SUPER FAST
30 < mAs < 50 => strategy = VERY FAST
50 < mAs < 70 => strategy = FAST
70 < mAs < 100 => strategy = MEDIUM
100 < mAs < 150 => strategy = SLOW
mAs > 150 => strategy = VERY SLOW
3–242
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.2 Enter the AOP strategy parameter value into the Senographe DMR.
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3, see ”Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode
from the Console” in chapter 1).

STRAT on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D, or E) corresponding to
one of the 5 possible screen pairs to be calibrated.
5.2.3 Select the AOP strategy as determined above (SUPER FAST, VERY FAST, FAST, MEDIUM,
SLOW, or VERY SLOW) on the console.
JOB CARDS
5.2.5 If you are turning the machine back over to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off,
then on again.
5.3 Changing AOP Strategy of Senographe DMR.

In AOP mode, and following the calibration of a new Screen/Film targets combination, the resulting dose or
mAs value can be too high for a reference exposure on a calibrated equipment.
The origin of Dose value increase is the Track/Kv parameters combination choosen by AOP algorithm which
is optimized to get the best image quality compromise in AOP–CNT mode according to the film sensitivity
index.
Note: High contrast films are used with fast strategy.
The dose value can be reduced following the two methods:

1) Either by changing the technique used by the radiologist, i.e. using a different AOP mode as :
– From AOP–CNT (contrast) to AOP–STD (standard),
– Or from AOP–STD to AOP DOSE.
2) Or by reducing the dynamic range of the image by increasing the kV value. It is obtained if you modify the
strategy of film exposure; reducing its speed corresponds to an increase of the kV value:
– Access to menu /AOP/FSCx/ and set strategy to the immediat lower speed.
Changing the strategy will reduce image quality. It may be done only with the
CAUTION physician agreement.
3–243
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
3–244
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL Version No.:

LIMIT Date:
Time: Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Screwdriver 4 mm.
D Allen wrench 2.5 mm.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D No specific safety precautions are applicable.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
D Measure room overall height, floor to ceiling.
D Remove left cover from column housing (see IST032).
5.1 Determine optical sensor position (see Illustration1 )

The position of the optical sensor is determined as follows :
1. Ceiling height 2.5m (8.22ft.) or greater :
– Install the optical sensor in the upper mounting hole (1 in Illust.1 ).
Note: The Senographe DMR is delivered with the optical sensor is installed in this position.
2. Ceiling height 2.4m (7.9ft.) or greater, but less than 2.5m (8.22ft.) :
– Install the optical sensor in the middle mounting hole (2 in Illust.1 ).
3–245
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL

LIMIT Job Card IST 040 2 of 4
3. Ceiling height 2.3m (7.5ft.) or greater, but less than 2.4m (7.9ft.) :
– Install the optical sensor in the lower mounting hole (3 in Illust. 1).
4. Ceiling height less than 2.3m (7.5ft.) :
– The Senographe DMR cannot be installed without special modification.
Note: The adjustment of the metal plate which blanks off the upper and lower sensors only affects the
elevator lower travel limit.
5.2 Repositioning of the optical sensor

1. Remove the tyraps on the cable connected to the optical sensor.
2. Remove the two 2.5 mm Allen screws securing the sensor.

JOB CARDS
3. Remove the optical sensor and reinstall it in its new position, as determined in 5.1, above.
4. Reinstall and tighten the two 2.5 mm Allen screws, in the new position.
5. Reinstall tyraps on the sensor cable, as required.
6. Switch on the Senographe DMR, carry out a column raising and lowering test and check that the tube hous-
ing cover does not collide with the ceiling (check minimum clearance for safety of at least 8 cm to 9 cm).
3–246
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ILLUSTRATION 1
SENOGRAPHE DMR, SHOWING OPTICAL SENSOR POSITIONS
JOB CARDS
1
1
POSITIONS FOR 2
2 UPPER OPTICAL
SENSOR
3
3
COLUMN FRONT VIEW
3–247
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–248
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE Version No.:

CALIBRATION Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
3–249
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE

CALIBRATION Job Card IST 041 2 of 8
SECTION 5
GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION
DMR GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION

ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION CORRECTIVE ACTION
RESULT OF OUT OF ORDER Failure Go back to application mode
CALIBRATION and note (fix) the error code
EXPOSURES
(WHATEVER STOP BY ARM Failure caused by the gantry Go back to application mode
JOB CARD IS USED) and note (fix) the error code
TOO HOT The tube is too hot Wait for the tube cooling. If
it takes more than 20 min-
utes, then cancel the proce-
dure and do it again.
JOB CARDS
ARCING Too many arcings Repeat the exposure

SOFTWARE ERROR Mistake in calculation of the Inform the Central Support
parameters of a curve by
approximation : software
error
NOT ENOUGH PTS Insufficient number of points Do the calibration again
acquired.
Calibration is not complete
or has been interrupted by
the operator.
PARAM DISPERSED Maximum > 1000 time the Do the calibration again.
minimum. Inform the Central Support.
Procedure or software error
ALL PARAM NIL The matrix determinant = 0. Do the calibration again.
Procedure or software error. Inform the Central Support.
PIVOT NIL The matrix diagonal = 0 but Do the calibration again.
the result is < > 0 Inform the Central Support.
3–250
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


CALCULATION OVERFLOW Real number is transformed Check that the AEC calibra-
ERROR into a string. tion has been property done.
Values are out of the interval If yes, then check the cell.
+/– 9999000000
ERROR Floating point calculation The best way is to restart
068/022 error. AEC calibration at level
This error originates gener- IST 007, with the right
ally from invalid parameters default parameters. Suppose
calculated during pm yeld you are calibrating FSC A
calibration (IST 007). and that couples B, C, D
The error can occur whithin were not already used ; using
IST 007, 013 or 014 procedure IST 007 para-
JOB CARDS
graph 6–4–1, copy succes-
sively from C (no screen)
to A (no screen)
and C (with screen)
to A (with screen).
3–251
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


CONNECTION CONNECTING Information message : If there is no connection
WITH THE ARM connection in progress. despite the message, it is a
(DURING A software error ––> inform
CALIBRATION the Central Support
EXPOSURE)
NO ARM REPLY Gantry failure (arm) Check the gantry and its
connection with the genera-
tor (optical fibers)
ACCESS REFUSED The command has not been Software error ––> inform
taken into account the Central Support
CONNECT ERROR Unknown answer form the Software error ––> inform
JOB CARDS
gantry the Central Support

ARM STOPPED Gantry stopped Check that the gantry runs
properly, if is does it is a
software error ––> inform
the Central Support
ARM ERROR Gantry out of order Check that the gantry runs
properly, if is does not note
the error code
COMMUNIC ERROR The received message is Software error ––> inform
wrong the Central Support
CONFIGURATION TUBE MISMATCH The select configuration Choose one of the possible
OF THE does not exist configuration indicated in
X–RAY TUBE the steering guide
(paragraphs 13–v & 13–vi)
3–252
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

DMR ERRORS ASSOCIATED TO A JOB CARD

IST003 LIMITED ICH One or more filament heat- See IST003
X–RAY TUBE (Warning message only) ing current values were cal- paragraph 5.1.6.
HEATER CURRENT culated above 5.6A.
CALIBRATION
IST 005 TOO MUCH PLEXI PM current is insufficient Check the thickness of the
PHOTOCELL plexi and check that the
CALIBRATION bucky is without cassette.
Reduce the thickness of the
plexi according to the
Job Card and do the calibra-
tion again.
This problem may come
from the hardware ––>
JOB CARDS
check the photocell board
800–PL4. Change photocell
if necessary.
IST 005 NOT ENOUGH PLEXI PM current is too high Check the thickness of the
PHOTOCELL plexi.
CALIBRATION Increase the thickness of the
plexi according to the
Job Card and do the calibra-
tion again.
This problem may come
from the hardware ––>
check the photocell board
800–PL4. Change photocell
if necessary.
OUT OF ORDER Failure Go back to application mode
and note (fix) the error code.
ARM ABSENT Default generator configura- Select ”arm present” in the
tion CONFIG menu of the gener-
ator
3–253
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


IST 007 GRID ABSENT Test of the presence of the Put the grid back inside the
PM grid bucky
YIELD
GRID PRESENT Test of the presence of the Take out the grid from the
grid bucky
RH FILTER OFF Control of the tube and RH Check the tube configuration
filter version
HV = MIN, KV CHGE Information messages : only Press the exposure button to
HV = MAX, CFG CHGE appear when the operator continue the calibration
REDUCE HV, AGAIN interrupts the calibration
RISE HV, AGAIN
MEASURE ERROR Calculated point out of range Perform again the current
JOB CARDS
calibration step (6–3 or 6–5

or 6–8 or 6–10)
YIELD NIL Calculation error Copy parameters “x” to
another unused couple “y”.
Continue calibration with
couple “y”.
Couple “x” can be used with
another screen calibration.
BAD RESULT Reference energy will be Perform again the current
negative calibration Step: both 6.3
and 6.5 or both 6.8 and
6.10).
3–254
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


IST 013 ANOTHER FILM The delta of the measured Reload the cassette and
NON RECIPROCITY optical density exceeds the continue the calibration
CALIBRATION acceptable range :
––> make another exposure
to continue the calibration
ODMEA TOO SMALL The measured optical den- Check the value entered
ODMEA TOO LARGE sity is out of the acceptable
limits
INVALID PARAM The curve determined by Check the root values of
coefficient A0, A1, A2, is parameters A0, A1, A2,
not valid (see Job Card)
JOB CARDS
CALCUL. ERROR Calculation error of the non– Redo the calibration with the
reciprocity coefficients root parameters
(A0, A1, A2) indicated in
the Job Card
CHECK PLEXI CM If the measured thickness is Check the thichness of the
too much different from the plexi.
plexi thickness required Ignore the message if the
(+/– 0.5 cm) measure is right
IST 014 OD_MS = TOO LOW The mAs used for the expo- Change the mAs value or
REFERENCE OD_MS = TOO HIGH sure are too low or too hight. enter the right value of the
ENERGY This may also be an error in optical density
CALIBRATION the measurement of the opti-
cal density.
ARCING STOP Too many arcings : No specific action : try to
calibration stopped make the exposure again
IST 015 REDUCING HT Information message : if the Press the exposure button to
MAGNIFICATION RISING HT exposure button has been continue the calibration
CORRECTION relased during the calibration
IST 016 OUT OF RANGE The entered mA value is out Do the calibration again or
mA CALIBRATION of acceptable range. check the Hardware
(40 mA mini – 60 mA maxi)
3–255
REV 0 sm 2308529–100


IST 017 OUT OF RANGE The entered tension value Do the calibration again or
KV CALIBRATION exceed normal value by check the Hardware
more than 15%. The calcu-
lated parameters deviate
from normal value by more
than 15% at 25 and 40 KV
IST 018 NORMAL CELL ERR Direction of tube housing Coordination the software
STEREOTIX 2 LELF CELL ERR angulation is incorrect selection and the real angula-
PHOTOCELL CENT CELL ERR tion
CALIBRATION RIGHT CELL ERR
REDUCING HV Information : after the expo- Press the exposure button to
sure button is released, the continue the calibration
JOB CARDS
HPTM is reduced by the

software
RISING HV Information : after the expo- Press the exposure button to
sure button is released, the continue the calibration
HPTM is increased ad by the
software
IST 020 TOO MANY SPITS If more than 5 arcings at Check ground cable connec-
TUBE WARM–UP 22 KV. tion
If the number of returns Change the tube
from
26 KV to 22 KV is > or = 3.
If the number of exposures
for the same KV value is >
or = 10
3–256
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: DMR INSTALLATION FORM Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
Use this form to note down all the data collected during the DMR installation. This form has sufficient room
for the calibration of 2 screen / film couples. You can also add your personnal notes and remarks at the end
of this form, to help you during future maintenances.
3–257
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DMR INSTALLATION FORM

JOB CARDS
3–258
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
AOP type used by customer A or B or C
3–259
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
3–260
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

IST007: First screen. Test of thickness displayed on the console

RT (2cm) Delta (2cm) RT (4cm) Delta (4cm) RT (6cm) Delta (6cm)
Contact mode with Grid with-
out Screen
Contact mode with Grid with
Screen
Magnification mode without
Grid without Screen
Magnification mode without
Grid with Screen
Legend:
RT: Radiological Thickness
JOB CARDS
Delta (X cm) = Radiological Thickness – Plexiglass Thickness
Expected Results:
Each Radiological thickness must be equal to the Plexiglass thickness +/– 2 mm
absolute value (Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.
3–261
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
32 / 1,5 cm
28 / 5.5 cm
3–262
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
32 / 1,5 cm
28 / 5.5 cm
3–263
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
3–264
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
3–265
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

IST007: Second screen. Test of thickness displayed on the console

RT (2cm) Delta (2cm) RT (4cm) Delta (4cm) RT (6cm) Delta (6cm)
Contact mode with Grid with
Screen
Magnification mode without Grid
with Screen
Legend:
RT: Radiological Thickness. Delta (X cm) = Radiological Thickness – Plexiglass Thickness.
Expected Results:
Each Radiological thickness must be equal to the Plexiglass thickness +/– 2 mm
absolute value (Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.
JOB CARDS
3–266
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
32 / 1,5 cm
28 / 5.5 cm
3–267
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

32 / 1,5 cm
JOB CARDS
28 / 5.5 cm
3–268
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
3–269
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–270
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION Version No.:

PARAMETERS Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
SECTION 5
PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS
The objective is to check the values of the paddle deformation parameters and to modify them if necessary.
These parameters alter the X–Ray exposure behaviour in AOP mode.
5.1 Format 18x24 paddles in contact mode
5.1.1 Starting from application mode, select:

SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/PADD/18x24
5.1.2 Rotate the KV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check agains table 1 below. change
the value(s) if necessary.
Table 1 Offset value Gain value

Standard injected plastic paddle (*) +1.000 E + 0 +6.000 E – 1
Metallic arm paddles –1.000 E + 0 +7.000 E – 1
(*) = default factory setting.
3–271
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION

PARAMETERS Job Card IST 044 2 of 2
5.2 Format 24x30 paddles is contact mode
5.2.1 Select SETUP / 24x30
5.2.2 Rotate the KV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check against table 2 below. Change

Standard injected plastic paddle (*) +1.000 E + 0 +8.000 E – 1
Metallic arm paddles +0.000 E + 0 +1.000 E – 1
(*) = default factory setting.
5.3 Magnification paddles

JOB CARDS
5.3.1 Select: SETUP / MAGNIF
5.3.2 Rotate the KV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check against table 3 below. Change

All magnification paddles +2.000 E + 0 +2.000 E – 1
5.4 Stereo Paddles
5.4.1 Select: SETUP / STEREO
5.4.2 Rotate the kV button to see either the offset or the gain values. Check against table 4 below.
Changes the value(s) if necessary.

All Stereo paddles 3.000 E + 0 1.000 E – 1
5.5 Perform a CKSUM and return to Application mode.
3–272
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOW–UP Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.
SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
None.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
3–273
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
FOLLOW–UP Job Card IST 045 2 of 4
SECTION 5
Despite its inherent reliability, the Senographe DMR requires certain minimum maintenance. A Maintenance
Program, whose frequency may vary according to the type of use of the equipment, is outlined in Table 1.
Use the Maintenance Follow–up Table to track maintenance operations over time.

Frequency
Action Description Procedure

- Check belt tension.

- Lubricate elevator movement screw (grease bearings:
use SKF GMT 1/2 or Lubriplate 46-194427P85).
JOB CARDS
Elevator: - Check elevator movement speed.

1
- IST40 -Check gas spring for oil leakage
-Clean the gas spring shaft.
-Check lateral play of the column and adjust the bearing
if needed.
- Check belt tension.
- Lubricate compression bar (grease bearings: use SKF
GMT 1/2 or Lubriplate 46-194427P85).
Compression - Check compressive force calibration.
2
system - Check maximum compressive force (20 daN).
- Check limit force of programmed compression.
- Check resistance of belts in decompression.
- Check thickness measurement in compression.
15000 15000
- Check brake in rotation.
exposures exposures
3 Arm - Check locking between tube-arm support and
or or
receptor-support arm for possible play
6 months 3 months
- Check field covered by x-ray beam.
- Check field covered by centering light.
Image quality
4 - Measure half-value layer.
-IST 36
- Measure the dose.
- Check density (reference exposure).
- Clean SID and format detectors.
- Inspect accessories (including grids).
5 Miscellaneous
- Dust: Inspect / clean fans, mirror, collimator rails
- Check SID brake action
Systematic 90000 90000
7 - Replace the two belts of the compression system.
replacement exposures exposures
Systematic
8 3 years 3 years - Replace batteries in the two microprocessor boards.
replacement
Systematic
- Replace the X1 relay (91682082) on the 200 PL1 Mains
9 replacement in 3 years 3 years
Distribution Board.
Generator Cabinet
3–274
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:
Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure

Action Description count: count: count: count: count:
... ... ... ... ...

1 Elevator
JOB CARDS
Compression ... ... ... ... ...
2
system
... ... ... ... ...

3 Arm
... ... ... ... ...

4 Image quality
... ... ... ... ...

5 Miscellaneous
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

7
replacement
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

8
replacement
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

7
replacement
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

8
replacement
3–275
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
MAINTENANCE FOLLOW-UP (CONTINUED)
Date: Date: Date: Date: Date:
Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure Exposure

Action Description count: count: count: count: count:
... ... ... ... ...

JOB CARDS
1 Elevator
Compression ... ... ... ... ...

2
system
... ... ... ... ...

3 Arm
... ... ... ... ...

4 Image quality
... ... ... ... ...

5 Miscellaneous
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

7
replacement
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

8
replacement
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

7
replacement
Systematic ... ... ... ... ...

8
replacement
3–276
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE Version No.:

Date:
Time: 30 min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
SECTION 2
TOOLS
JOB CARDS
complete coverage of the photo-cell).
Tool reference (plexi plates) : 45 203 014 or 46–286893 (US pole).
Thickness accuracy of plexiglass plates is mandatory (10 0.2 mm).
For memo: chemical formula of plexiglass is C5H8O2, different from Lexan and Nylon!
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D About checksum, see chapter 1, para. 3–7.
D kV accuracy check (if applicable) followed by kVp recalibration must be performed before this job
card (see IST 033, para. 5.1.11).
D Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
D Job Card IST 007 must have been performed recently.
D In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.
3–277
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE
SECTION 5
CHECKS ON PRE–EXPOSURE IN AOP MODE
5.1 Purpose of test

For good results in gridlines, it is required to have a good prediction of exposure time in AEC and AOP mode.
This prediction can be affected by an uncorrected adjustment of the kV feed–back circuit on 701PL1 board
(KV/MA board). For example, an overshoot on KV waveform during pre–exposure (pre–shot) would give a
minimized or a maximized value for radiological thickness, compared to the thickness measured during main
exposure.
A simple check is to record the thickness measurement done by photocell during a complete exposure and
compare it to the measurement during pre–exposure. The measurement will have to be done several times to
take in account other variations in the system.
This adjustment does not modify the AEC/AOP calibration; it will improve the grid movement ( the risk of
JOB CARDS
grid lines is more important for short exposure times).

Since generator software 3.26, the AEC mode works with a pre–exposure, same as AOP mode.
ILLUSTRATION 2
START
Make 5 exposures
AEC 28kV
Turn P1 Measure of thickness
No
Result analysis good
Yes
Final adjustment
Turn P1
END
3–278
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
5.2 When perform this test

– If you detect gridlines
– or if radiological thickness of an AEC pre– exposure is smaller or equals to the radiological thickness of expo-
sure
– or if you have 097/027 error code in the generator error log file.
Caution:
After each pre–shot or exposure wait 30s before performing other X–rays.
5.3 How to check AEC exposure
The appreciation of Kv rise time is based on the measure of radiological thickness during the pre–shot. When
there is an undershoot or an overshoot of KV this measure of radiological thickness have a significant disper-
sion.
JOB CARDS
So we need to perform at least 5 pre–shot to get a sufficient accuracy; (du to the variability in pre–shot length)
5.3.1 Preparation for test:

• Power–OFF/ON the DMR
• Used a calibrated FSC; note here after the original parameters:
FSC NAME:_________________
• Set and note the following parameters in menu medical:
Disable auto decomp Check if Yes or no
Disable cassette detection
Note the original force limit registered______=______DaN
• SID = 660 mm
• ⋅DMR examination Arm: vertical
• 18x24 compression paddle installed
• Put 4 cm of plexiglass on the bucky; verified that photocell area is covered
• Compress the Plexiglas to get the mechanical thickness as described above; you need always compress with
the same force; chose 11DaN.
• You could set in medical menu, the maximum compression force to 11daN, to get reproducibility of all expo-
sures requested by this job card
• Insert a cassette with film (we do not need to develop this film).
• Choose AEC mode 28kV.
5.3.2 System warm–up in AEC mode 28 kV

• Perform a serie of 5 exposures with 30 seconds waiting time between each exposure in order to warm–up the
tube.
3–279
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
5.3.3 Acquisition of Exposures in AEC mode 28 kVp
1. Press 1st trigger button until 1st trigger lamp is on
2. Press 2nd trigger to take pre–exposure ONLY ; RELEASE 2nd trigger and Prep buttons BE-
FORE actual exposure starts. Clear the Abort sound.
3. Read the radiological thickness on console.
4. Record this value in Table 1, value THp1 (which stands for Thickness, pre–exposure N°1 )
Note: Be sure to record all digits on the console (ex: 4.17 cm)
5. Redo the same exposure, but this time, let the system finish the main exposure.
6. Read the radiological thickness on console.

JOB CARDS
7. Record this value in Table 1, value THe1 (which stands for Thickness, exposure N°1 ),
8. Repeat steps ”1” to ”7” FOUR TIMES and each time report values in Table 1 (THp2 to THp5
and THe2 to THe5). Observe carefully a waiting time between exposures.
9. Calculate average values for THp, THe and Delta

(Win95 Calculator can be useful for this task; you can find it using menu: Start/Programs/Acces-
sories)
10. Report Values AV_THp , AV_THe and AV_ ∆ Table 2. (AV stands for Average)
Table 1 : Pre–exposure test
(note Thickness values in cm)
THp THe (main Delta

(pre–expo exposure) (THe –
sure) THp)
THp1 THe1 Delta 1
THp2 THe2 Delta 2
THp3 THe3 Delta 3
THp4 THe4 Delta 4
THp5 THe5 Delta 5

Average AV_THp AV_THe AV_
Delta
3–280
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
5.4 Analysis of results

Two conditions are required:
• Average Delta should be comprised between 0.00 and –0.03 cm (no positive value allowed), meaning that
pre–exposure measured thickness is always slightly above the real thickness
• THp minimal is equals or greater than THe maximal
If these conditions are satisfied, go to section 5.7 Final adjustment of KV rise time.
If not, « kV return » signal may not be properly calibrated. Proceed to next paragraph 5.5.
5.5 Corrective action on KV risetime

D If the gap is small (less than 0.2 cm), you can directly fine tune the HV risetime by rotating the potentiome-
ter P1 CW or CCW according to examples given below (one turn corresponds to about 0.01 cm of thick-
ness).
JOB CARDS
Note: P1 is the frequency compensation adjustment of the DMR HV probe (HV connection +
wire…) if you turn P1 clockwise you go to overshoot, if you turn P1 to reverse clockwise you
go to undershoot.
Examples of adjustment for 701PL1 –P1:
First example :
AV_THp 4.03 cm AV_THe 4.06 cm AV_Delta 0.03 cm
In this case, turn P1 by 3 turns clockwise: this will increase THp by 0.03cm approximately.
Refine if necessary.
Second example :
AV_THp 4.08. cm AV_THe 4.01 cm AV_Delta –0.07 cm
In this case, when average delta is equals or smaller than –0.06, turn P1 with a maximum of 6 turns re-
verse clockwise by step: this will reduce THp by 0.06cm approximately; average delta is not linear.
Refine if necessary.
5.6 First Adjustment check

• Perform again the test exposures as specified in paragraph 5.3.2 and 5.3.3 above; note results in table 2 below.
• Results must be in the conditions of paragraph 5.4 Analysis of results
3–281
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Table 2 : Pre–exposure test

(note Thickness values in cm)
THp THe (main Delta

(pre–expo exposure) (THe –
sure) THp)
THp1 THe1 Delta 1
THp2 THe2 Delta 2
THp3 THe3 Delta 3
THp4 THe4 Delta 4

JOB CARDS
THp5 THe5 Delta 5
Average AV_THp AV_THe AV_

Delta
5.7 Final Adjustment of KV rise time

• The second adjustment of P1 is made after successfully perform first adjustment with average delta between
0.00 and –0.03.
• Second adjustment: turn P1 of 7 positive turns clockwise.
• Make 5 pre–exposures AEC Mo/Mo 28KV and for each one, check that radiological thickness is always
greater than the radiological thickness found in the last check.
5.8 Restore original parameters:

Disable auto decomp Yes or No
Original force limit registered = DaN
3–282
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Luxmeter (Range 1 to 10 000lux) suitable for photometric measurements.
JOB CARDS
D Luminancemeter (range 10 to 10 000 cd/m2 or nit) suitable for photometric measurements.
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.
3–283
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES)
SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Ambient light test

• Switch on all light sources of the view room except the viewbox to be checked,
• Position the luxmeter photocell at a distance of 30 cm from the viewbox, in direction opposite to the
latter (to measure the light received on viewbox surface),
• Record the Lux value (on datasheet) and proceed the same way for other viewboxes.
Pass criterion: Each measured Lux value of ambient light must be < 50 Lux.
5.2 Viewbox test:

JOB CARDS
5.2.1 Definition of measurement areas (See figure below)

• The viewbox is generally divided into four diagnostic areas (i.e. four times a 35 X 43 area),
• Five test points are identified in each diagnostic area (one test point at the center, and four test points at
the corner of an area of 35 X 43).
Area # 1 Area # 2 Area # 3 Area # 4

(35 X 43) (35 X 43) (35 X 43) (35 X 43)
C1 C2 C3 C4
Viewbox
5 test points in
each area
5.2.2 Procedure
• Switch on the viewbox to be tested and wait for 5 minutes,
3–284
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
• Position the luminancemeter towards the five test points of a diagnostic area and record the correspond-
ing luminance values (in cd/m2) values on datasheet,
• Repeat the measurements for all other areas,
• Perform the same way for all other viewboxes.
5.2.3 Pass criterion

• Value at the center of each diagnostic area must be equal to the mean of the measurements in the center
of each of the five areas within ± 15% and should be > 3500 cd/m2 (or nit) ; recommended value is
> 7000 cd/m2 (or nit).
• Values in the corners of each area should be equal the value at the center within ± 10%,
• The deviation between the means of the measurements in the center of each of the five areas of two
viewboxes must be < 20 %.
JOB CARDS
3–285
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
JOB CARDS
3–286
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY Version No.:

Date:
SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None
SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Densitometer, Sensitometer, Marker pen, Gloves, Film, Test Cassette.
JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION WEAR CLOTH GLOVES TO HANDLE THE FILM.
SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
4.1 Check temporal stability of the film processor
– Apply recommended check procedure provided by the manufacturer.
3–287
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE
5.1 Sensitometric procedure:
5.1.1 Purpose:
• The purpose is to check the compliance of system condition with respect to a rated and/or reference condition,
i.e. gamma as a function of chemical/Film/Film processor parameters.
• It could help to find out the optimum O.D. which allows a good completion of IST 013.
5.1.2 Procedure:
a) expose the film with the sensitometer set to green, with the film right way up (if single emulsion is used)
• For most of the films, the emulsion is facing down when the notch is on the upper left.
JOB CARDS
• For an X–RITE 333 sensitometer, the emulsion must be facing down with the film up against the stop.
b) Develop the film and write in all data necessary for its identification: site, date and time,
c) Calibrate the densitometer to zero on step 1 of the film sensitometric strip:
Note: Calibration of LNRT and Reference Energy are done using net Optical Density values (without base +
fog).
d) Measure and record O.D. levels for each step ( 1 through 21) in Table 3–1, then draw the sensitometric curve,
Step # Measured O.D. Step # Measured O.D.

Step 1 Step 12
Step 2 Step 13
Step 3 Step 14
Step 4 Step 15
Step 5 Step 16
Step 6 Step 17
Step 7 Step 18
Step 8 Step 19
Step 9 Step 20
Step 10 Step 21
Step 11
Table 3–1: O.D. steps record
e) Note the first step whose relative density is greater or equal to 1 (Sensitivity Index). Let N be the step found and
D(N) its relative optical density, and record it in Table 3–2.
f) Note the relative optical density for step (N + 2). Let this measured value be D(N + 2).
g) Calibrate the densitometer to zero without film, then measure the raw O.D. for step 1 (Base + Fog density). Re-
cord it in Table 3–2.
3–288
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

5.1.3 Calculation & Pass/Fail criteria
Parameters Measured val- Pass/Fail crite- Result

ues rion
Base + Fog density = Measurement of raw O.D. on step 1 Must be < 0.23
of the sensitometric strip
Sensitivity Index (N) = First step whose relative density
(D) is greater or equal to 1.
Contrast Index = D(N + 2) – D(N).
Density deviation between step N (corresponding to Sensi-
tivity Index) and step N + 2.
Calculated Gamma = Contrast Index / 0.3 See table 3
JOB CARDS
Maximum Density = Density of step 21
Table 3–2: Sensitometric calculations
Note: The Gamma value calculated by the DMR must be close to the Gamma value calculated manually to
get good results about optical density.
3–289
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

JOB CARDS
3–290
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE Version No.:

Date:
Time: xx min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
PURPOSE
This procedure applies to the DMR mammographic equipment line.
The standard adjustment made using Job cards IST007 and IST013 guarantees an acceptable Optical Density
variation for each Track/Filter combination.
The two purposes of this additional Job Card IST050 are the following:
1) to check the Optical Density variation for a plexiglass thickness varying from 2 to 6 cm,
2) to reduce the Optical Density variations when switching from one combination to another among the three
JOB CARDS
possible (Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh), and allows to be compliant with the specifications of MQSA 2002 stan-
dards (US Regulation). This is achieved by optimizing the values of the coefficients A0 without screen and
with grid coming from IST007 calibration, for Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh Track/Filter combinations.
SECTION 2
WHERE/WHEN
1) For already installed systems:
Where
– In the countries where MQSA 2002 has become a requirement.

– For the other countries if you need to reduce the Optical Density variation.
When
This procedure should be performed once for each Film/Screen combination.

It must be repeated each time Job Card IST007, IST013 or IST014 is redone, for example when the user intro-
duces a new Film /Screen combination
2) For new DMR system installation
Where
This procedure should be performed in all countries
When
This procedure should be performed once for each Film/Screen combination during the first installation of the
system (refer to the “flowchart of AEC/AOP calibration”).
It must be repeated each time Job Card IST007, IST013 or IST014 is redone, for example when the user intro-
duces a new Film /Screen combination
3–291
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE

SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
Copy the 2283482–200_IST050_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.xls file from the CD 2283482–200 onto
your PC hard disk, then run the file from the hard disk. Follow instruction given in the .xls file
Note: If you are not provided with Excel*, all necessary formulas are included in the
2283482–200_IST050_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.pdf file.
*Excel is a registered Trade–Mark of Microsoft Corporation.

JOB CARDS
3–292
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Purpose: A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR THE Version No.:

MAGNIFICATION MODE Date:
Time: xx min Personnel: 1
SECTION 1
PURPOSE
This procedure applies to the DMR mammographic equipment line.
The standard adjustment made using Job cards IST007, IST013 and IST046 guarantees an acceptable Optical
Density variation for each Track/Filter combination.
The goal of this additional Job card IST051 is to reduce the Optical Density variations when switching from
one combination to another among the three possible (Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh) inside the magnification
mode, and allows to be compliant with the countries regulations (e.g.: MQSA 2002).
JOB CARDS
This procedure does not reduce the shift between the contact mode and the magnification mode.
This is achieved by optimizing the values of the coefficients A0 without screen and without grid coming from
IST007 calibration, for Mo/Rh and Rh/Rh Track/Filter combination, the Mo/Mo combination being taken as
a reference.
SECTION 2
WHERE/WHEN SHOULD THIS JOB CARD BE PERFORMED?
Where
If you need to reduce the optical density variation between Mo/Mo, Mo/Rh and Rh//Rh inside the
magnification mode.
When
This procedure should be performed once for each Film/Screen combination.
It must be repeated each time Job Card IST007, IST013 or IST014 is/are redone, for example when the user
introduces a new Film/Screen combination.
3–293
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR THE MAGNIFICA-

TION MODE Job Card IST 051 2 of 2
SECTION 3
PROCEDURE
Copy the 2283482–200_IST051_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.xls file from the CD 2283482–200 onto your PC
hard disk, then run the file from the hard disk. Follow instruction given in the .xls file
Note: If you are not provided with Excel*, all necessary formulas are included in the
2283482–200_IST051_DMR_A0_OPTIMIZATION.pdf file.
*Excel is a registered Trade–Mark of Microsoft Corporation.

JOB CARDS
3–294
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER 4 – ERROR CODES
SECTION 1
ERROR CODE STRUCTURE
The structure of the error messages, as displayed on the DMR console (e.g. E55 [text]
161/013), is shown below:
Error
E 5 5 text 1 6 1 0 1 3
a bb ccc ddd
I : Warning without exposure inhibition
S : Warning with exposure inhibition
a : type of error
E : Fault with exposure inhibition
K : Fault generating power cut–off (safety)
bb: message number
ccc: subassembly ref. (hardware or software)
ddd: number indicating origin of fault
In the above example:

E55 indicates an error concerning tube housing angulation and generating an exposure
ERROR CODES
inhibition.
161/013 indicates no reference crossing during movement.
E55 is the error code type listed in the Operator Manual. This code is easy to use and
communicate, and is considered sufficient for customer use.
161/013 is the ”technical code”, recommended for GE internal communication.
The error code listing currently contains almost 500 codes. Around 200 of these codes
concern software errors which, by definition, should never occur.
If a software error should occur, especially if it occurs several times, please inform Service
Engineering, giving as many details as possible.
The error code listing, below, only contains codes ccc/ddd, to facilitate technical
communication.
Note: *** : these 3 stars indicates an explanation at the end of this chapter (section 3) for a
possible known root cause.
4–1
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Abbreviations used:
IST: Installation
MNT: Maintenance
PM: Photomultiplier
HTPM: PM high tension
IPM: PM current
VRTX: Real time operating system
Where an error message refers to a signal with a ”French signal name”, the corresponding
English language signal name is shown between parentheses.
ERROR CODES
4–2
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SECTION 2
ERROR CODE LIST
MEANING OF CODE CODE
Gene CPU software error: VRTX error during init 002/001

Gene CPU software error: reboot by watch_dog_hard or reset button 002/002
Gene CPU software error: reboot by watch_dog_soft 002/003
Gene CPU: reboot after power micro–failure 002/004
Gene CPU software error: bus error 003/000
Gene CPU software error: address error 003/001
Gene CPU software error: format error 003/002
Gene CPU software error: illegal instruction 003/003
Gene CPU software error: privilege violation 003/004
Gene CPU software error: trace error 003/005
Gene CPU software error: emulation line 1010 error 003/006
Gene CPU software error: emulation line 1111 error 003/007
Gene CPU software error: CHK error 003/008
Gene CPU software error: TRAPV error 003/009
Gene interface: reset error (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/001
ERROR CODES
Gene interface: read/write error on timer PTM1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/002
Gene interface: interrupt error on DUART1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/006
Gene interface: PTM1 timer 1 defective (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/007
Gene interface: interrupt error on PTM1 timer 1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 004/013
4–3
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Generator: fault at exposure command 006/000

Generator: fault at exposure command 006/001
Generator: signal kV_Inf_5 (Less_than_5kV) not rising 006/002
Generator: Signal En_Pose (Exposure_On) not rising 006/003
Generator: fatal security triggered during exposure 006/004
Generator: fatal security triggered at end of exposure or signal En_Pose (Exposure_On) 006/005
stays ’high’
Generator: signal Secu_Rattrap (No_Fatal_Security) stays ’high’ after ’arcing recovery’ 006/011
Gene init tests: one fatal security input <> 0; xxx identifies input. 007/xxx
Access generator error log display for full error decoding.
Focus bias software error: unknown command 011/001
Focus bias software error: unknown task status 011/002
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) ’high’ in standby status 012/001
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) stays ’low’ when bias generation starts 012/002
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) goes ’low’ after stabilization 012/003
Focus bias: signal Pres_Polar (Bias_Presence) stays ’high’ after bias generation stopped 012/004
Anode starter software error: unknown command 016/001
Anode starter software error: unknown task status 016/002
ERROR CODES
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) ’high’ in standby status 017/001

Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) not rising during acceleration to 017/002
9000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) not rising during acceleration to 017/003
6000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes ’low’ during rotation at 017/004
9000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes ’low’ during rotation at 017/005
6000 rpm
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes ’low’ during rotation (speed 017/006
< 9000 rpm)
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) goes ’low’ during rotation (speed 017/007
< 6000 rpm)
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays ’high’ during 9000 rpm 017/008
braking
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays ’high’ during 6000 rpm 017/009
braking
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays ’high’ during rotor failure 017/010
Anode starter: signal Pres_Rotation (Rotation_Presence) stays ’low’ during rotation 017/011
Heater software error: unknown command 021/001
Heater software error: unknown task status 021/002
4–4
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Heater software error: Heater scaling parameters (ICH) or heater values are not valid 021/003
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) ’high’ in standby status 022/001
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays ’low’ when heater started 022/002
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during pre–heater phase 022/003
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during 1st trigger 022/004
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during exposure 022/005
Heater track 1: mA value not significant 022/006
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ after exposure 022/007
Heater track 1: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays ’high’ when heater stopped 022/008
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) ’high’ in standby status 023/001
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays ’low’ when heater started 023/002
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during pre–heater phase 023/003
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during 1st trigger 023/004
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) goes ’low’ during exposure 023/005
Heater track 2: mA value not significant 023/006
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) ’low’ after exposure 023/007
Heater track 2: signal Pres_Chauf (Heater_Presence) stays ’high’ when heater stopped 023/008
ERROR CODES
Grid sync software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply when 026/001
starting
Grid sync software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply when 026/002
stopping
Grid sync software error: unknown command 026/003
Grid sync software error: unknown task status 026/004
Grid sync: signal Synchro_Bras (Synchro_Arm) ’high’ in standby status 027/001
Grid sync: grid start signal not received or grid fault detected 027/002
Grid sync: signal Synchro_Bras (Synchro_Arm) ’low’ after grid start 027/003
Grid sync: grid stop signal not received or grid fault detected 027/004
Arm fatal failure: acknowledgment of the Grid Stop Motion command sent by the 027/005
generator to the gantry not received by the generator
Arm fatal failure: Grid Stop Power command not received on time from the exposure 027/006
automaton (time out on the reception 15s)
Generator: delay task software error: unknown command 031/001
Generator: delay task software error: unknown task status 031/002
HTPM/IPM software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply 036/001
4–5
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

HTPM/IPM software error: unknown command 036/006
HTPM/IPM software error: unwanted command 036/007
HTPM/IPM software error: unknown task status 036/008
HTPM/IPM: HTPM reference not transmitted or HTPM fault 037/001
HTPM/IPM: IPM measurement request not transmitted or switch fault 037/002
HTPM/IPM: offset value outside tolerance 037/003
HTPM/IPM: HTPM measurement request not transmitted or switch fault 037/004
HTPM/IPM: invalid HTPM value (valid range = reference +/– 20% ) 037/005
HTPM/IPM: IPM measurement request not transmitted after HTPM measurement or 037/006
switch fault
HTPM/IPM: HTPM reference not transmitted when stopped or HTPM fault 037/007
Gene thermal protection software: VRTX error 041/001
Gene thermal protection software: unknown anode starter status 041/005
ERROR CODES

Gantry thermal protection software: VRTX error 046/001
Filter wheel software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply 051/001
Filter wheel software error: unknown command 051/002
Filter wheel software error: unknown task status 051/003
Filter wheel: filter change request not transmitted or filter fault 052/001
Focus software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received or unknown reply 056/001
Focus software error: unknown command 056/002
Focus software error: unknown task status 056/003
Focus: focus change request not transmitted or focus fault 057/001
Gene to gantry communication driver: no reply from gantry after 2 attempts 061/000
Gene to control panel communication driver: no reply from control panel after 2 attempts 062/000
Gene init tests: no gantry status feedback after 10 requests 063/006
Gene date/time: access timeout during dater init 066/000
Gene date/time: access timeout during read sequence 066/001
Gene date/time: access timeout during write sequence 066/002
Gene date/time: access timeout during time write sequence 066/003
4–6
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Generator: Zero divide 067/000

Generator: floating point calculation error. xxx is VRTX task number 068/xxx
Generator: checksum error on battery saved memory 071/081
Generator: timeout on signal Alim_Puis_OK (Inv_Supply_OK) (going ’low’ or ’high’) 071/082
Generator: error reading ’kV law table’ in 0 pt technique (AOP) 071/083
Exposure software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received at start of 1st trigger 072/001
Exposure software error: ACQ_NTR or ACQ_OVR received at end of 1st trigger 072/003
Exposure software error: unknown origin of aborted exposure 072/004
Exposure software error: aborted by PM in 2 pt technique 072/005
Exposure software error: unknown exposure technique 072/006
Gene software error: one system task (at least) not stable after a delay of 7 s when a 072/007
Prepa is performed
Exposure software error: unknown task status 072/008
Exposure software error: 0 pt or 1 pt exposure and gantry absent 072/009
Gene software error (IST, standby): parameter display problem 073/001
Gene software error (IST, standby): unknown tube type 073/002
Gene software error (IST, standby): alpha=0.0 when calculating value P_NDac_HTPM 073/003
Gene software error (IST, standby): incorrect thickness for correlation calculation 073/004
ERROR CODES
Gene software error (IST, standby): bias calibration task problem 073/005
Gene software error (IST, standby): heater scale calibration task problem 073/006
Gene software error (IST, standby): HV/DAC calibration task problem 073/007
Gene software error (IST, standby): FREQ/HV calibration task problem 073/008
Gene software error (IST, standby): PM calibration task problem 073/009
Gene software error (IST, standby): gantry connection task problem 073/013
Gene software error (IST, standby): gantry connection fault 073/014
Gene software error (IST, standby): mA measurement calibration problem 073/017
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown exposure end 074/001
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown gantry reply 074/002
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown gantry reply 074/003
Gene software error (IST, exposure): unknown exposure status 074/004
4–7
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Gene software error (MNT): anode starter speed impossible 075/010

Gene software error (MNT): anode starter: abnormal test task status 075/011
Gene software error (MNT): heater: impossible track 075/020
Gene software error (MNT): heater: abnormal test task status 075/021
Gene software error (MNT): heater: abnormal test task status 075/022
Gene software error (MNT): bias: abnormal test task status 075/030
Gene software error (MNT): HV test: abnormal test task status 075/040
Gene software error (MNT): gate test: abnormal test task status 075/041
Gene software error (MNT): inverter test: abnormal test task status 075/042
Gene software error (MNT): mA value: abnormal test task status 075/050
Gene software error (MNT): mA measurement: abnormal test task status 075/051
Gene software error (MNT): grid sync: abnormal test task status 075/060
Gene software error (MNT): PM test: abnormal test task status 075/070
Gene software error (MNT): PM test: abnormal test task status 075/071
Gene software error (MNT): PM test: measurement timeout 075/072
Gene software error (MNT): error codes: display problem 075/090
ERROR CODES

Gene software error (MNT): transfer: frame code error 075/100
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal transfer task (save) status 075/101
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal transfer task (save) status 075/102
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal state transfer task (load) status 075/103
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal state transfer task (load) status 075/104
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: unknown frame 075/105
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: end of loading error 075/106
Gene software error (MNT): transfer: abnormal transfer task (protocol) status 075/107
Gene init tests software error: timeout on system task 078/002
Gene init tests software error: defective function will self–identify 078/003
Gene init tests software error: error following VRTX request 078/128
Exposure aborted: timeout 079/001
Exposure aborted: heater fault *** 079/002
4–8
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Exposure aborted: anode starter fault 079/003

Exposure aborted: power fault 079/004
Exposure aborted: generator fault 079/005
Exposure: no gantry acknowledgement (at start of 1st trigger) or gantry fault 079/006
Gantry fault detected before start of exposure 079/008
Exposure: no sync signal from gantry to start exposure 079/009
Exposure aborted by mA meter (0 pt or 1 pt technique) 079/010
Exposure: no gantry acknowledgement (at end of 1st trigger) or gantry fault 079/011
Gene (IST, exposure): heater fault 080/001
Gene (IST, exposure): anode starter fault 080/002
Gene (IST, exposure): power failure 080/003
Gene (IST, exposure): interface fault 080/004
Gene (IST, exposure): no gantry reply – timeout after 1 second 080/005
Gene (IST, exposure): gantry fault 080/006
Gene (IST, exposure): no gantry reply to exposure command 080/007
Gene (IST, exposure): no grid sync feedback after timeout 080/008
Gene: ’Endurance’ error code 082/000
ERROR CODES
Communication error Digital system 083/000
Failure before exposure: rising Synchro_Grid signal not received from Gantry (after 084/008
Graphy pushed)
Failure before exposure: rising Synchro_Grid signal not received from Gantry (after 084/009
Graphy pushed and exposure start status received from the generator driver)
Generator: PROM checksum error 090/000
U–turn before end of pre–shot: The exposure time for the pre–shot (AOP mode) is greater 097/026
than the grid motion duration until the first turn–back point.
U–turn before end of exposure: The exposure time for the exposure (manual and AOP 097/027
mode) is greater than the grid motion duration until the first turn–back point.
Gantry software error: VRTX error during init 100/001
Gantry interface: Reset error (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/001
Gantry interface: read/write error on timer PTM1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/002
4–9
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Gantry interface: interrupt error on DUART1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/006
Gantry interface: PTM1 timer 1 defective (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/007
Gantry interface: interrupt error on PTM1 timer 1 (see Chap. 1 Sect. 3) 101/013
Gantry interface: PROM checksum error 101/020
Gantry interface: unexpected interrupt received (level 2) 101/023
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: unknown origin of task call 105/000

Gantry software error: boolean expected 105/001
Gantry software error: unknown generator grid request 105/002
Gantry software error: unknown generator request for HTPM/IPM switch 105/003
Gantry software error: unknown 1st trigger status 105/004
Gantry software error: unknown language choice requested by generator 105/005
Gantry software error: unknown generator command 105/006
Gantry software error: unknown VRTX error code 105/009
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (light centering) 105/016
Gantry software error: unknown task command (light centering) 105/017
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (compression) 105/020
Gantry software error: unknown task command (compression) 105/021
Gantry software error: unknown compression pedal status 105/023
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (lateral collimator) 105/026
Gantry software error: unknown task command (lateral collimator) 105/027
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (rear collimator) 105/030
Gantry software error: unknown task command (rear collimator) 105/031
4–10
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (filter wheel) 105/034

Gantry software error: unknown task command (filter wheel) 105/035
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (tube angulation) 105/038
Gantry software error: unknown task command (tube angulation) 105/039
Gantry software error: unknown task command (format) 105/046
Gantry software error: unknown format 105/048
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (column up/down) 105/049
Gantry software error: unknown task command (column up/down) 105/050
Gantry software error: unknown column command button status code 105/051
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (arm rotation) 105/052
Gantry software error: unknown task command (compression arm rotation) 105/053
Gantry software error: unknown status code of compression arm rotation control button 105/054
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (tube arm rotation) 105/055
Gantry software error: unknown task command (tube arm rotation) 105/056
Gantry software error: unknown status code of tube arm rotation control button 105/057
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (grid) 105/063
Gantry software error: unknown event (grid) 105/065
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: unknown acknowledgement (power calculation) 105/066
Gantry software error: unknown event (power calculation) 105/067
Gantry software error: unknown tube type 105/068
Gantry software error: unknown focus change code 105/069
Gantry software error: unknown filter code requested by generator 105/070
Gantry software error: unknown code for ’Exposure’/’No Exposure’ status management 105/071
Gantry software error: unknown exposure end code 105/072
Gantry software error: unknown ’Endurance’ code 105/073
Gantry software error: unknown ’Endurance’ event 105/074
Gantry/tube housing type configuration incompatibility (angulation/angulation) 105/080
Gantry/tube housing type configuration incompatibility (angulation/focus) 105/081
Gantry software error: column: unknown task return 106/002
Gantry software error: column: unknown task status 106/003
Gantry software error: column: unknown order transmitted to task 106/007
4–11
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Gantry software error: compression: too long between task calls 107/001
Gantry software error: compression: unknown task return 107/002
Gantry software error: compression: unknown task status 107/003
Gantry software error: compression: unknown order transmitted to task 107/004
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: positioning timeout 108/001
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown task return 108/002
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown task status 108/003
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 108/006
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 108/007
Gantry software error: lateral collimator: position reference value is outside tolerance 108/008
Gantry software error: rear collimator: positioning timeout 109/001
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown task return 109/002
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown task status 109/003
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 109/006
Gantry software error: rear collimator: unknown order transmitted to task 109/007
Gantry software error: rear collimator: position reference value is outside tolerance 109/008
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown task status 111/002
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown task return 111/003
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown order transmitted to task 111/006
Gantry software error: tube angulation: unknown order transmitted to task 111/007
Gantry software error: tube angulation: position reference value is outside tolerance 111/008
Gantry software error: tube angulation: task triggered by timeout 111/017
Gantry software error: filter wheel: unknown task return 112/000
Gantry software error: filter wheel: unknown task status 112/001
Gantry software error: filter wheel: 112/004
Gantry software error: filter wheel: unknown order transmitted to task 112/005
4–12
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Gantry software error: light centering: unknown order transmitted to task 114/000
Gantry software error: unknown set–up message 117/000
Gantry set–up access: generator end of exposure timeout 117/002
Gantry set–up access: communication sync problem at set–up access 117/003
Gantry software error: grid: task triggered by timeout (calibration time too long) 118/000
Gantry software error: grid: unknown task return 118/001
Gantry software error: grid: unknown task status 118/002
Gantry software error: grid: unknown order transmitted to task 118/005
Gantry software error: grid: unknown order transmitted to task 118/006
Grid movement: overcurrent detected 118/007
Grid movement: grid calibration time too long 118/008
Grid movement: overcurrent detected 118/009
Grid movement: invalid offset 118/010
Grid movement: invalid gain 118/011
Grid movement: limit of travel not found 118/012
ERROR CODES
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown task return 120/000
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown task status 120/001
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown task status 120/002
Gantry software error: arm lock: unknown order transmitted to task 120/003
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown order transmitted to task 121/000
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown task status 121/001
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown task status 121/002
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown task return 121/003
Gantry software error: rot. brake: unknown order transmitted to task 121/004
Gantry software error: Reset triggered by Watch_dog_soft 122/007
Gantry software error: grid sensor Presence_Trame (Grid_Presence) not ’high’ or ’low’ 122/013
Gantry software error: tube housing thermal contact not ’high’ or ’low’ 122/014
Gantry: checksum error on battery saved memory 151/000
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: synchronisation 153/075
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: column 153/076
4–13
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: compression 153/077

Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: compression arm rotation 153/078
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: tube housing arm rotation 153/079
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: lateral collimator 153/080
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: rear collimator 153/081
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: light centering device 153/082
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: filter 153/083
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: grid movement 153/084
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: tube housing angulation 153/085
Gantry ’Endurance’ error code: other function 153/086
Tube housing type/gantry configuration incompatibility (focus/angulation) 155/082
Tube housing type/gantry configuration incompatibility (focus/angulation) 155/083
Column up/down: Both end of travel sensors are closed 156/008
Column up/down: is locked in both directions (from speed measurement) 156/009
Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc (Column_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ status 156/010
Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc (Column_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ status 156/011
Column up/down: signal Pres_Log_Asc (Column_Soft_Pres) too long in ’high’ status 156/012
ERROR CODES
Column up/down: signals Asc_Inactif & R_On_Asc 156/013

(Column_Power_Inactive & On_Column_Return) both ’high’
Column up/down: Pres_Log_Asc*Pres_Oper_Asc*On_Asc 156/014
(Column_Soft_Pres*Column_Operator_Pres*On_Column) = 1 & R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) = 0
Column up/down: Pres_Log_Asc*Pres_Oper_Asc*On_Asc 156/015
(Column_Soft_Pres*Column_Operator_Pres*On_Column) = 0 & R_On_Asc
(On_Column_Return) = 0 & Asc_Inactif (Column_Power_Inactive) = 1
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column);Asc_Inactif & R_On_Asc 156/016
(Column_Power_Inactive & On_Column_Return) both ’low’
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column);Asc_Inactif 156/017
(Column_Power_Inactive) ’low’ & column defective
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column); signal Asc_Inactif 156/018
(Column_Power_Inactive) ’high’ during init
Column up/down: signal R_On_Asc (On_Column_Return) ’high’ during init 156/019
Column up/down: direction of movement is opposite to the desired direction 156/020
Column up/down: ’up’ end of travel sensor is defective 156/021
Column up/down: ’down’ end of travel sensor is defective 156/022
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (column); R_On_Asc (On_Column_Return) 156/023
’high’ without legal command
Column up/down: column is driven up but measured speed = 0 cm/s 156/024
4–14
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Column up/down: column is driven down but measured speed = 0 cm/s 156/025
Column up/down: emergency stop produced if movement continues more than 500 mS 156/027
after command release
Compression: motor slipping during reference search *** 157/005
Compression: abnormal immobility of paddle *** 157/006
Compression: loss of steps detected at reference crossing *** 157/007
Compression: abnormal step generation detected (during init) 157/008
Compression: signal Valid_Comp (Comp_Valid) cannot inhibit paddle movement (during 157/009
init)
Compression: counter used by force sensor no longer incremented *** 157/010
Compression: position sensor closed too long during compression 157/011
Compression: no reference crossing during decompression *** 157/012
Compression: signal Pres_Oper (Operator_Presence) cannot inhibit paddle movement 157/013
(during init)
Compression: signal Pres_Ajust (Comp_Adjust) too long in ’low’ status 157/014
Compression: signal Pres_Ajust (Comp_Adjust) too long in ’high’ status 157/015
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) cannot inhibit paddle movement 157/016
(during init)
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ status 157/017
ERROR CODES
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) too long in ’high’ status 157/018
Compression: power supply problem (signal Alim_OK (Power_Supply_Active)) 157/020
Compression: phase1 & phase2 cannot be ’low’ at the same time (during init) 157/021
Compression: signal Pres_Log_Comp (Comp_Soft_Pres) ’high’ (during init) 157/022
Compression: slipping during decompression movement *** 157/023
Lateral collimator motor: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 158/009
Lateral collimator: no reference crossing during movement 158/013
Lateral collimator: optical sensor detection problem 158/017
Lateral collimator: optical sensor detection problem 158/018
Lateral collimator: slipping during collimator movement *** 158/019
Rear collimator motor: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 159/009
4–15
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Rear collimator: no reference crossing during movement 159/013
Rear collimator: optical sensor detection problem 159/017
Rear collimator: optical sensor detection problem 159/018
Rear collimator: slipping during collimator movement *** 159/019
Front collimator motor: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 160/009
Front collimator: no reference crossing during movement 160/013
ERROR CODES

Front collimator: optical sensor detection problem 160/017
Front collimator: optical sensor detection problem 160/018
Front collimator: slipping during collimator movement *** 160/019
Tube housing angulation: no reference crossing during movement 161/000
Tube housing angulation: loss of steps detected at reference crossing 161/009
Filter wheel: step number error between two references 162/006
4–16
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

Filter wheel: no reference crossing during rotation 162/011
Filter wheel: in standby, wheel moved from stable position 162/012
Light centering device: signal Centreur_OK (Light_Centering_OK) too long in ’low’ status 164/001
Grid movement: power supply problem (signal Alim_OK (Power_Supply_Active)) 168/020
Inter–arm lock: signal Pres_Log_Ver (Lock_Soft_Pres) too long in ’low’ status 170/005
Inter–arm lock: signal Pres_Log_Ver (Lock_Soft_Pres) too long in ’high’ status 170/006
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm lock); Eta_Verrou_Off 170/007
(Lock_Power_Inactive) ’low’ during init
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm lock); Eta_Verrou_Off & R_On_Verrou 170/008
(Lock_Power_Inactive & On_Lock_Return) both ’low’
Inter–arm lock: signals Eta_Verrou_Off & R_On_Verrou (Lock_Power_Inactive & 170/009
On_Lock_Return) both in ’high’ status
Inter–arm lock: R_On_Verrou (On_Lock_Return) = 0 & 170/010
Pres_Log_Ver*Pres_Oper_Ver*On_Verrou (Lock_Soft_Pres*Lock_Oper_Pres*On_Lock)
=1
Inter–arm lock: signal R_On_Verrou (On_Lock_Return) ’high’ without legal command 170/011
Inter–arm lock: signal R_On_Verrou (On_Lock_Return) ’high’ during init 170/012
ERROR CODES
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm lock); R_On_Verrou 170/013
(On_Lock_Return) ’high’ without legal command
Arm rot. brake: signal Pres_Log_Frein_Rot (Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres) from compression arm 171/005
too long in ’low’ status
Arm rot. brake: signal Pres_Log_Frein_Rot (Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres) from compression arm 171/006
too long in ’high’ status
Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein (On_Brake_Return) ’high’, but signal Eta_Rot_Off 171/007
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) ’low’
Arm rot. brake: Pres_Log_Frein_Rot*Pres_Oper*On_Frein_Rot 171/008
(Rot_Brake_Soft_Pres*Operator_Present*On_Rotation_Brake) = 1 & R_On_Frein_Rot
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) = 0
Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein_Rot (On_Rotation_Brake_Return) ’high’ without legal 171/009
command
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm brake); Eta_Rot_Off 171/010
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) & R_On_Frein_Rot (On_Rotation_Brake_Return) are ’low’
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) ’low’ & comp. arm defective
(Rotat_Power_Inactive) ’low’ during init
Arm rot. brake: signal R_On_Frein_Rot (On_Rotation_Brake_Return) ’high’ during init 171/013
Power shutdown: uncontrolled movement risk (arm brake); R_On_Frein_Rot 171/014
(On_Rotation_Brake_Return) ’high’ without legal command
4–17
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Magnification sensor: unknown magnification code 172/003

Gantry interface: arm lock temperature calculation problem 172/004
Gantry interface: Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) signal ’low’ during init 172/005
Power failure due to CPU reset *** 172/006
Gantry interface: date write error 172/007
Gantry interface: time write error 172/008
Button interlock: signal Presence_Operateur (Operator_Pres) too long in ’high’ status 172/009
Button interlock: signal Presence_Operateur (Operator_Pres) too long in ’low’ status 172/010
SID sensor: unknown SID code 172/011
Arm angulation sensor: unknown angulation code 172/012
Gantry interface: date/time function read error 172/014
Signal On_Asc (On_Column) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/015
Signal On_Centreur (On_Light_Centering) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/016
Signal On_Comp ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/017
Signal On_Frein (On_Rotation_Brake) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/018
Signal On_Verrou (On_Lock) (Arm lock) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/019
Signal On_Trame (On_Grid) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/020
ERROR CODES
Signal Mot_Diaph_L_1 (Lat_Diaph_Motor_1) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/021

’low’
Signal Mot_Diaph_L_2 (Lat_Diaph_Motor_2) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/022
’low’
Signal Mot_Diaph_A_1 (Rear_Diaph_Motor_1) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/023
’low’
Signal Mot_Diaph_A_2 (Rear_Diaph_Motor_2) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/024
’low’
Signal Mot_Gaine_1 (Housing_Motor_1) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/025
Signal Mot_Gaine_2 (Housing_Motor_2) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/026
Signal Mot_Filtre_1 (Filter_Motor_1) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/027
Signal Mot_Filtre_2 (Filter_Motor_2) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still ’low’ 172/028
Signal R_Standby_Gaine (Housing_Standby_Return) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK 172/029
(Loops_OK) still ’low’
Signal R_Standby_Filtre (Filter_Standby_Return) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK (Loops_OK) still 172/030
’low’
Signal R_Standby_Diap_L (Lat_Diaph_Standby_Return) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK 172/031
Signal R_Standby_Diap_P (Rear_Diaph_Standby_Return) ’high’ but Bouclage_OK 172/032
Compression: one pedal pressed and signal Pres_Pedale (Pedal_Presence) ’low’ 172/055
4–18
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Compression: no pedal pressed and signal Pres_Pedale (Pedal_Presence) ’high’ 172/056

Fuse fault: signal Fuse_OK ’low’ 172/064
Power supply: ’ISO’ supply defective on 800–PL4 172/065
Power supply: ’+15V’ supply defective on 800–PL2 172/067
Power supply: one (or more) supplies defective on 800–PL1 (except +27V) 172/068
Power micro–failure detected 172/088
ERROR CODES
4–19
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SECTION 3
ERROR CODES: KNOWN ROOT CAUSES
071/081: Generator checksum error: check + 5.1V (see Job Card IST022) and Lithium
battery.
079/002 + 023/006: no mA measurement; change 701PL1 (kV/mA board).
157/005: check for play between compression motor axis and pulley (screw not tightened).
157/006: check for bad feedback from the compression encoder.
157/007: check for defective cable on the compression steel spring.
157/010: loss of compression feedback; a square wave should be always present between TP
14 and TP1 (0V) of 800PL2.
157/012: check cable between 800PL8 and 800PL5.
157/023: check for play between compression motor axis and pulley (screw not tightened).
158/019: check for play between collimator lateral motor axis and pulley (screw not
tightened). Possible problem with 800PL1 (Gantry power board).
ERROR CODES
159/019: check for play between collimator rear motor axis and pulley (screw not tightened).
160/019: check for mechanical play between collimator front motor axis and blade (screw
not tightened).
check for poor position of the flag in optocoupler fork.
check the calibration of front blade in IST030.
171/019 and 171/020:
reset DMR.
check for friction point in sensor; change if necessary.
If problem persists, note software version and call your OLC.
171/021 and 171/024:
reset DMR.
check sensor, connections, and board 800PL5, change if necessary.
172/006: if appearing at power on, the gantry interface board is probably defective.
4–20
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER 5ILLUSTRATION 2TABLE 3 – SIGNAL LISTS/GLOSSARIES

SIGNAL LISTS
5–i
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5–ii
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
GLOSSARY
ENGLISH/FRENCH
GENERATOR (GENERATEUR)
SIGNAL LISTS
5–1
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5–2
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
SIGNAL NAME NOM DU SIGNAL

FROM TO
(GENERATOR) (GENERATEUR)
+12V 400T1 400PL1 - 2/F2 +12V
+12V_INPUT 400PL1 - 6/A4 400PL2 - 8/C1 +12V_ENTREE
+12V_LV_SUPPLY 400PL1 - 2/F2 400PL1 - 6/E4 +12V_ALIM_BT
+12V_STARTER_CMD 400PL1 - 25/E4 300PL2 - 6/H4 +12V_CMDE_LANCEUR
+12V_STARTER_CMD 400PL1 - 25/E4 300PL2 - 6/H4 +12V_COUPE
+15Vcpu +15V (CPU:NOT USED)
+15V_kV 701PL1 - 5/B3 ...... +15VK
+15V_mA 701PL1 - 5/A4 ...... +15VM
+250V 200PL2 - 2/A3 +250V
+27V 200PL2 - 2/E3 +27V
+27V_FAN 200PL2 - 2/H11 +27V_VENTILATEUR
+5VCPU = 5V 400PL2 - 8/C2 +5VCPU = +5V
+5V_LV_SUPPLY 400PL1 - 25/E4 400PL2 - 8/C2 +5V_ALIM_BT
+VE (+8V) 200PL1 - 3/B10 +VE (+8V)
+VLC 200PL2 - 2/A4 +VLC
+VR 200PL1 - 3/D10 200PL2 - 1/D2 +VR (+12V)
+VRA 200PL1 - 2/A3 +VRA (+5V)
+VV (KEEP ALIVE) +12V 200PL1 - 3/E10 200PL2 - 1/D2 +VV (+12V VEILLE)
+VV 200PL2 - 1/F4 200PL1 - 4/E5 +VV
-12V 400PL1 - 6/A4 400PL2 - 8/A1 - 12V
-12VD 400PL1 - 6/A3 ...... - 12VD (-12V_DRIVERS)
-12V_DRIVERS 400PL1 - 6/A3 700PL1 - 5/G3 - 12V_DRIVERS (-12V)
-12V_INPUT 400PL1 - 6/A3 400PL2 - 8/C1 - 12V_ENTREE
-12V_LV_SUPPLY 400PL1 - 2/F2 400PL1 - 6/E4 - 12V_ALIM_BT
-15Vcpu - 15V (CPU NOT USED)
SIGNAL LISTS
-15V_Vk 701PL1 - 5/A1 ...... - 15VK
-15V_Vm 701PL1 - 5/A3 ...... - 15VM
-VE (-8V) 200PL1 - 3/C10 - VE (-8V)
0VD 701PL1 - 5/F3 ...... 0VD
0VE 200PL1 - 3/B10 0VE
0VLC 200PL2 - 2/B4 0VLC
0VV 200PL1 - 3/E10 200PL2 - 1/D2 0VV
0V_27V 200PL2 - 2/F3 0V_27V
0V_250V 200PL2 - 2/B3 0V_250V
0V_600VF 300PL1 - 1/H1 200PL1 - 1/E11 0V_600VF
0V_CONSOLE 200PL2 - 2/F11 400PL1 - 4/C4 0V_PUPITRE
0VCPU 400PL3 - 8/A2 0VCPU
5–3
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
0V_DRIVERS 400PL1 - 3/G4 701PL1 - 6/G4 0V_DRIVERS
0V_FAN 200PL2 - 2/H10 0V-VENTILATEUR
0V_GANTRY 200PL2 - 2/E11 800PL1 -20/H4 0V_STATIF
0V_HEATER_CAPACITOR 200PL2 - 2/B8 400PL1 -19/D10 0V_CAPA_CHAUFF
0V_INPUT=0VCPU=PT4 400PL1 - 6/H4 400PL2 - 8/A2 0V_ENTREE
0V_KEEP_ALIVE 200PL1 - 3/E10 200PL2 - 3/A5 0V_VEILLE
0V_kV 701PL1 - 5/A2 ...... 0VK
0V_LV_SUPPLY 400PL1 - 6/H4 0V_ALIM_BT
0V_mA 701PL1 - 5/A4 0VM
0V_MAIN_SUPPLY 200PL2 - 2/B8 400PL1 -19/D10 0V_ALIM_PUISS
0V_PHASE_1 300PL2 - 1/D2 400PL1 -24/H4 0V_PHASE_1
0V_PHASE_3 300PL2 - 1/C1 400PL1 -24/H1 0V_PHASE_3
0V_RS232 400PL2 - 8/H4 0V_RS232
0V_SHIELD 400PL1 - 2/D2 BLINDAGE_0V
125_kHz_ROTOR__ 400PL1 - 23/F1 125_kHz_LC
12V 12V (CPU: NOT USED)
12_KEEP_ALIVE 200PL1 - 3/E10 200PL2 - 3/B5 12V_VEILLE
220V 200PL1 - 1/A10 220V
250V<E<700V 200PL2 - 3/D4 ...... 250V<E<700V
250V_HEATER_CAPACITOR 200PL2 - 2/A8 400PL1 -19/B9 250V_CAPA_CHAUFF
250V_MAIN_POWER 200PL2 - 2/A8 400PL1 -19/B9 250V_ALIM_PUISS
27V_CONSOLE 200PL2 - 2/E11 400PL1 - 4/B4 27V_PUPITRE
27V_GANTRY 200PL2 - 2/E11 800PL1 -20/H4 27V_STATIF
2_MHz_ROTOR 400PL1 - 25/G2 ...... 2_MHz_LC
300VR (INVERTER) 200PL1 - 1/B11 300PL1 - 1/F5 300VR
SIGNAL LISTS
5000_RPM 400PL2 - 4/B4 400PL1 -25/H4 5000_TOURS

5000_RPM 400PL2 - 4/B4 400PL1 -25/H4 T5000
5kV_A 701PL1 - 2/A3 400PL2 - 6/E1 5kV_A (kV_INF_5_A)_______
5kV_B_ 701PL1 - 2/A3 400PL2 - 6/E1 5kV_B (kV_INF_5_A)
5V_INPUT 400PL1 - 6/A4 400PL2 - 8/C2 +5V_ENTREE
600VF (INVERTER) 300PL1 - 1/H2 200PL1 - 1/F11 600VF
AC1_INV_CURRENT 300PL1 - 1/B8 400PL1 -10/H4 AC1_I_OND
AC2_INV_CURRENT 300PL1 - 1/B8 400PL1 -10/H4 AC2_I_OND
ACCELERATION 200PL2 - 2/C11 400PL1 -3/C10 PRES_ACCELERATION
AUTO_DELAY_48ms 400PL1 - 10/F1 ...... AUTO_DELAIS_48ms
AUTO_POWER_ON 200PL2 - 3/E8 ...... AUTO_MST
AUTO_RELANCE 400PL1 - 9/D2 ...... AUTO_RELANCE
5–4
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
# #

# #
# #
# #
#

#
# %
# !

# ! #
# %
# !

# # ##
# # ##
# #
# # %
##

#

#
# !
#
## #
## #
## #
# # #
#
# #
## #

#
#
#

SIGNAL LISTS
# #
# #
# #
# #
#
#
# #

" %
#
#
# $ # $
#
#
#
#
5–5
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
)#
)#
)#

)#
)#
)#
)#

)#
)"
!"#)$
$) ! )!*
) ! )! (

##!

##$!
##!)

#!)##$!
##!)

)##$!
$ %)#$)##!(
)"$%) %
$%

) %

)
$##!() ##!)
$! !
$!
!
$! !
$!
!

$!() ) )!")
$!()
)
)!")
$!())
)!")
$!' !'
$#
"! #
$# "! #

$#
#

$#"#) )
)#"#)
$#"#)
)
)#"#)
SIGNAL LISTS
$#"#))
)#"#)
$#"#)) )#"#) # $"
$!!#)"
!"#)$!#
)#

)#
)#

)#
)#)
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
&$#)#

) #
"!)!""#!
!)!
5–6
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
%& ! "&&
#&! #&!
$ "&!& #%!& &
$ "&!& #%!& &
$ "&
&
$ "&!$
! &$
$ "&!&$
! & &$
$'

&&
&&&&&

&&
&&!&#& & "&#
&&!&$& & "&$
&&!& & "&
&&!&&! & "&
& !&# &&#
& !&$ &&$
& &!&&! &&
& "! "&
& "!& &&
& "!& &&
!& "!%
"&"!
!& "!%
"&
!%&%& !&
& !!&
!& &!!
%
%&"!! "!&
SIGNAL LISTS
%&"!!
"!&

&
&

!& &"
!& &"
!& &"
!&"
"&"
!&"!& &
5–7
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
" ''#"#"
! "
" '"' "''#
" '"'
"' '#
" '!# "'
!# ''#
" '!# "'
!# ' '#
" ' ! !'#
" ' ! !'#
!'#)
" ' '
'
" ' ' !'#'
!'#)
" ' '
'$
" ' '
!'#'
" ' #!" #"' #'
"'# "'!# ' !''
"'!'" "' "
"'!'" "
"'!'"'
"' '
"'!'"'
"' '
"'!'"' '"'
" "
"' "'
"''
"''
"''
"''
"' "'
"' '
"' '
SIGNAL LISTS
"' '

"' '
$ " '
$' '
$
$ " '
#"'
$'# "'% ''%
$'# "'!# " !''
$''% ''%
$'!#&' '#!!'
$'!#&'
'#!!'
$'!#&' '#!'
$'!#&''
'#!!''
$'!#&''
'#!!''
($'
#"'($
5–8
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
*&)" )
%$)*&)
)%$)*&) %$
*&)" )
*&)
*&)" )
%$)*&)
)%$)*&) %$
*&)" )
*&)
*&)'

*&)'
*&)')
*&)')
*&)')
)*&)') *&)')
*&)')
*&)')
*&)')
)*&)') *&)')
*&)#%"$
#%")*&
*&)""
#)*&
*&)"!%#$ %$)"%
*&)"!%#$) %$)"%)
*&)"!%#$) %$)"%)
##)$)*&)
*&))) *&)
##)$)*&)
*&)))
##)$)*&)
*&))) *&)
##)$)*&)
*&))) *&
"$
) ) )*&))
) ) )*&)
)*&)
)*&) )
)*&)
)*&) )
&)#% ()) %$))$
SIGNAL LISTS
+ +
#) "# "#)#$%"
$)"$" $"$
+# +#
+)
+) #%")+)
+))
+) #%")+)
+) ' & %$ "$%")+
+)'

+)'
+)') +)')
+)')
+)')
+)#%"$)
#%")+) +
+)#%"$)
#%")) +)
5–9
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
)*%)#"#
#"#)*%)%
)#)"$!#' "$)!##!
))*%
*%)%
)#)$##
%'#)
)$##
#$)
)#)$##
%'#)
%!)## "$!!)##
")

!#! ")
"))"$!#
"$!)")
")

!#! ")
")

!#! ")
")
)"$!#
"$!)")

" "
&!
$""
&!)#!)$!!#
$"")$!#)
&!) "#
&!))! $!#
)"#
&!))&#
###)"#
&!)"$') !"))
&!)"$') !!#))
&!)"$') )
&!)"$')!" !")
&!)"$') !")
&!)"$') !")
SIGNAL LISTS
&!)"$')!") !"))

!)$## $#)!
!)$##
$#)!
!$#)#$# #)$#)!$
!$#)#)$# #$#)!$
!')) )!")%'#

!) "
!')) )!")%'#

!) "
!"#)
+ !()
+
!##)!" !")!##
!##)!" !")!##
!##)#%
!"))#
5–10
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
# % #* !
!
#*&#
# % #* % &##%*!# !
!#$* &#%* %&#
# % #* '#&##%* !
!

$&#**
# % #* '#&##%* !
!

$&#**
# % #* '# *%% !
$&#%*#*
# % #* '#*&##%*,
!

%%*$&#%*
%%
# % #*$&!!)* !
&% **
#( !
!
#(
#(#% # $ $ !
#(*#%&# #(
#( $# ! !
#(
#(#% # $ $ !
#(*#%&# #(
#(*# $# ! !
#(*#$
#(*(! $&# !
! ! $*#(
#(*#"&#% ! #(*
#(*#$

$#' %#$ !
#(*#$

$%) ! $&#%

$&#%)*#* !
! %&#*$&
$&#%)*#* !
! %*$&
$%
! $ '

$"&* ! *$"&
$"&#*&##% !
*##
$#*+'* !

! $#* $#*'*
$#*+'* !

! $#* $#*'
$#*+'* $#*+'*
$#*+'* $#*+'*
SIGNAL LISTS
$%#%#*#'* !
*% &#
$%# *+'* $%# *+'*
$%# *+'* !

! $%# * $%# *+'*
$%# *+'* $%# *+'*
$%# *+'* !

! $%# * $%# *+'*
$) !
$)
$)# *# !
$)# *#$
$)*# % #* !
#**$)
%!#*#*%*%(
!
%%*$&!*%(
%!#*$$*%*%(
!
%%**%(
%$%*
+' ! %$%*
+'
5–11
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

FROM TO
$"
$"#$$

$"#$$
#'$
$"#$$

$"#$$
$*"*$*,

$*#% *,
$"* *$"
%* #$*
$"*

#$*
$"*
*$"
%* #$*
$"* $"*

$"* * $"* *
$"*

$"*
$"*
* $"* *
$"*
*
$"*
*
$"*
*
$"*
*
$( #"
$(
$(*"$"# #
$(*"$%" $(
$( #"
$(
$(*"$"# #
$(*"$%" $(
$(*" #"
$(*"#
$(*"#

#"& $" #
$(*"#

$*##*$*,

$**,
&
&
&

&
&*" )
&*"
&* "
&* "
& & & &
&
&
SIGNAL LISTS
&

&
'$*#$$

$$$*#$
'"

%$
*( #%" * #
*$*&"
*#%""*$
*&*#% )*
*%$**$
* *+&*$#$ *$#$*+&*&
* *"%$$"

**%
*&"*%""$*$$
*#%"$*"*
* '"**"!%"$ **#$
*$"*

**
5–12
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
GLOSSARY
ENGLISH/FRENCH
GANTRY (STATIF)
SIGNAL LISTS
5–13
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5–14
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
SIGNAL NAME (GANTRY) FROM TO
(STATIF)
800PL4 - 1/E7 ...... 0VISOA
800PL1 -21/H1 ...... 0V_27V_CL
+15ISO (800PL4) 800PL4 - 1/G8 ...... +15ISO (800PL4)
+15V (800PL1) 800PL1 -20/D3 ...... +15V (800PL1)
+15V (800PL2) 800PL2 - 3/F2 ...... +15V (800PL2)
+5ISO (800PL4) 800PL4 - 1/E8 ...... +5ISO (800PL4)
-15ISO (800PL4) 800PL4 - 1/G7 ...... -15ISO (800PL4)
-5V (800:PL1.PL2) 800PL1 -20/B3 -5V (800:PL1.PL2)
-FILTER_STANDBY 800PL2 - 3/B5 800PL1 -15/H3 -STANDBY_FILTRE
-HOUSING_STANDBY 800PL2 - 3/B5 800PL1 -14/H3 -STANDBY_GAINE
-LAT_DIAPH_STANDBY 800PL2 - 3/B5 800PL1 -17/H3 -STANDBY_DIAPH_L
-REAR_DIAPH_STANDBY_A 800PL2 - 3/B5 800PL1 -16/H3 -STANDBY_DIAPH_A
0V_STEREOTIX 800PL1 -21/F4 STEREOTIX 0V_STER
12V (800PL1) NOT USED 800PL1 -21/C4 800PL2 - 3/F2 12V (800PL1) NON UTILISE
12V (800PL2) NOT USED ...... ...... 12V (800PL2) NON UTILISE
15V = +15V ON 800PL1 800PL1 -21/A4 800PL2 - 3/F1 15V = +15V DE 800PL1
24 x 30_SIZE 800PL10- 1/B2 800PL2 - 9/H8 FORMAT_24*30
24 X 30_SIZE_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... FORMAT_24*30_A
27V 800PL1 -20/H4 ...... 27V
27V_BRAKE 800PL1 -22/A2 27V_FR
27V_CL (LOGIC BOARDS) 800PL1 -22/D4 ...... 27V_CL (CARTES LOGIQUES)
27V_COLUMN 800PL1 -20/D2 ...... 27V_ASC
27V_COMP 800PL1 -22/F4 ...... 27V_COMP
27V_D 800PL1 -21/E2 800PL2 - 7/G2 27V_D
27V_EXT (EXTERNAL) 800PL1 -22/A3 800PL5 -80/0L 27V_EXT
SIGNAL LISTS
27V_GRID 800PL1 -22/D2 ...... 27V_TRAME
27V_LIGHT_CENTERING 800PL1 -22/F3 ...... 27V_CENTR
27V_LOCK 800PL1 -22/F2 ...... 27V_VERROU
27V_P 800PL1 -20/G4 ...... 27V_P
27V_STEPPER 800PL1 -22/D3 ...... 27V_PAP
27V_STEREOTIX 800PL1 -20/A2 STEREOTIX 27V_STER
5VEXT (EXTERNAL) 800PL1 -21/C3 800PL2 - 3/G2 5VEXT
5V_CL (LOGIC BOARDS) 800PL1 -21/C3 800PL2 - 7/H3 5V_CL
5V_STEREOTIX STEREOTIX 800PL12- 1/A4 5V_STER
ARM_SYNCHRO 800PL2 - 7/E3 400PL2 - 6/B4 SYNCHRO_BRAS
ARM_TILT_±27 800PL15- 1/B3 800PL2 - 9/H3 INCLIN_GARAGE
ARM_TILT_±27_A 800PL2 - 9/C5 ...... INCLIN_GARAGE_A
5–15
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
'!!'
'
'!!'' ''
'!!'
'
'!!'' ''
'!!' '
'!!'' ''
'" "'
''" ''!
"&&'
'"&&
!' '
'
!' '
' '
!!'!! ' '
!!'!! ' ' !!
'' ''
'' ''
' !!% !!%
' !
'"

'"
'" '"
"''
' '
"''
' '
"'

"'''

' ''
"'''!
' ''
"'''

' ''
"'''!

' ''
SIGNAL LISTS
"'" "'

"'" '
"'! !'
"'! ! !'
"'! ! !'
"' ''' ' ''
"' ''' ' ''
"'$'!#
'!
"'$'(
'!'
!#'
"'$ $'
"' !' ''
5–16
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
!& *' "
'*$
!! *#!& *"!(+
"
"
!& *$$*"&$$
#*!#
!"* "

!"*
!"*
"

!"*
!"*&$%*"#$ "
"#$*&$%*!"
!"** "
*!"*
!"*&## %*#*'+
"
% $**!"
&*
!"*&## %*'&* "
% $* *!"
!"*&## %*'&*
"
% $*
*!"
!"*&## %*'&* "
% $**!"
!"*#%! "
$ $*!"
!"*#!& "

" $$*!"
!"*'%*' "

'*'%*!"
!"*! * " !"*! *
!"*! *
" !"*! *
!"*!"#%!#*"#$ "

"#$*!"*!"
!"*" "
"
"*!"
!"*"$
"
!%!# "
"$*!"*

!"*"$* " !%# " "$*!"*
!"*"$*
"
!%!# "
"$*!"*

!"*"$*
" !%!# " "$*!"*
!"*"#$ *" "
"#$*"*!"
!"*#*#!& "
" $$*! $ *!"
!"*#*"* "
" ! $ *!"*
SIGNAL LISTS
!"*#*"*
"
" ! $ *!"*
$&#%*!" !%
!"*$%)
&$
!"*$%)* $&#%*!"*
!"*$!%*"#$ "

"#$*!*!"
!"*$"*! "

!*""*!"
!"*$&"") ' ' "

" *!" ' '
!"*' "

"& '*%&*%%#) "
*$&'* '
"& #$$ &$ " "

"& #$$ &$ " "

"& #$$ &$ " "

5–17
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
!% "## %# ! !

!%
"## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!% "## %# ! !

!%$$"'( ! $$"(
!% ) ! )
!% ) ! )
!%) ! )
!%"
"
"&(
!%"
"
"&!
!%"

"

"&!
!%"'( ( ! ("#(
!%"'(
( !
("#(
!%"'(( !

("#(
!%$
$
$&(
!%$
$
$&!
!%$#$( ( !
($#$(
!%$#$(
( !
($#$(
!%$#$(( !

($#$(
!%$#$(( $ %# ! ($#$( %$#
SIGNAL LISTS
!%( $ %# !

!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%(
$ %# !
!
(
!%(
$ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !

!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
!%( $ %# !
!
(
5–18
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
!%( $ %#
!
! (
!((
! ( !(

!("$
! ##( !
!(!
!
! !( !
"'(#$ !("'
!
! "#( %!(!

(#$" $ %# (#$" $ %#
$"(! #("
!
! "(! #($"
($"(&
$"(( %#(#%!!'
!
!
&
$"(" %("$%"
!
! "$ %"(##($"(
$"( $ "(
!
! $($"(
$"( $ "(("$%"
! "( $($"(

$"( $ "(
!
! $($"(
$"( $ "(("$%"
! "( $($"(

$"(!#(
! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(!#(
! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(!#( ! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(!#(
! $ " ! !#($"(
$"(! #("
!
! "(! #($"
$"(! #("(
! "(! #($"(

$"(#$'("$%"
! "(#$'($"
$"(#$(" %
!
! ##(#$($"
$"(#%!!'
!
! ($" & &

"("
!
! #( "
"(" &
!
! #( "
" $(!( $((")

! "( $(!(&(
SIGNAL LISTS
$%"
" $(!( $((")

! "( $(!(&(

$%"
" $(!( $ "(
!
! $(!(&(
" $(!( $ "(
!
! $(!(&(
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
" $
" $(!(!#(
! !#(!(&(
$ "
5–19
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
#! %*"*"!$*# "
" #*"!$*"*'
#! %*"*$% ) " "
$% )*"*'
#! %*"*$% +
"
#*$% )*"*'
)*#%&#
#! %*"*$&"") " "
*"*' ' '
&$*! "

"
&$*!
&$*! "
&$*!*
# " %#
#*# "

#*%#
#*!"*#!& *#+
" "

#%!&#*$$*!"*%#
%&#
#*!%!# "
# !%!# !%*%#
#*!%!# "
# !%!# !%*%#
#*! *#!& " "

$$*! *%#
#*"!$%! "

"

"!$*%#
#*"!$%! *#!& "

"

$$*"!$*%#
#*"#$ "

" "#$ *%#
#*"#$ * "
"#$ *%#*
#*## " "

! $ *%#
#*#*#!& " "

$$*! $ *%#
#*$%!" " " &%*%#
#*$%!"* " &%*%#*
!&$ *"!$*# "
" #*"!$*
!&$ *!%!#*
" "

!%* *
!&$ *!%!#*
*#+
"

#*!%* *
%&#
!&$ *!%!#* " "

!%* *
SIGNAL LISTS
!&$ *!%!#**#+

"

#*!%* *
%&#
!&$ *"$*
"

!%!# "
"$* *

!&$ *"$*
"

!%!# "
"$* *

!&$ *"$* "

!%!# " "$* *
!&$ *"$* "

!%!# " "$* *
!&$ *"!$*# "
" #*"!$*
!&$ *"!$*#* " #*"!$* *
!&$ *"!(# " "

* ' '
!&$ *$% )*#+
"

#*$% )*
%&#
!&$ *$%*#!& " "

$$*$%*
5–20
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
! * #
'"*## " "

%"
#*"*"!$*"*
" " *"!$*"!%
#*"*"!$*"* " "

*"!$*"!%
#*"*"!$*"*
" "
*"!$*"!%
!'
#*"*"!$*"** " *"!$*"!%*
#*"*"!$*"*

" " *"!$*"!%

!'
#*"*"!$*"*
* " *"!$*"!%
*
$!*$&"")*"#$ "
"
"#$**$!
$!*$&"")*%$% "
"
%$%**$!
%*"*"!$*# ' "
" #*"!$*"*
%*"*!%!#*
" "

!%*"**
%*"*!%!#* " "

!%*"**
%*"*!%*
*#%&# "

#*!%*"**
%*"*!%**#%&# "

#*!%*"**
%*"*"$*
"

! !%!# "$*"**

%*"*"$*
"

! !%!# "$*"**

%*"*"$* "

! !%!# "$*"**
%*"*"$* "

! !%!# "$*"**
%*"*"!$*# "
" #*"!$*"*
%*"*"!$*#* " #*"!$*"**
%*"*$% )*#+ #*$% )*"*
"

%&#
%*"*$%*#!& " "

$$*$%*"*
%*"*$&"") " "

*"* ' '
SIGNAL LISTS
%* %# " %#&#
%* %# "

%# & %#&#
%* %# "

%# & %#&#
%* %# * "
" %#&#*& &(
%* %# ** " %#&#*& &(*
%* %#+
" "

$$* %#&#
*#!&
%* %# *! "

"
%#&#*!
%* %# *!* "
%#&#*!*
#%!&#*$$* +
%*#!& *#%&# " "

%#&#
! "

! '##!&
5–21
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
#"
%
%#"
% #"
%%
%#"%
%" "%#"
%" %#"
%$%!#
!%#"%
% !% %%#"
%# #%#"
% "%
%% "%%
! %
! %
!% %
!%% %%
!%% %%
!%% %%
%" ! %"
%
%
% %
!%% !%%
!%%%!" %!%%
!%% !%%
!%%%!" %!%%
%" %
SIGNAL LISTS
%"%!" %%

%
%
%%!" %%
% %!
%%!" %%!
%! ! %!"
%!%!%&
%%!"
!"
% %#"
%%!" %%#"
%!!% %%!
%!!%%&
%%%!
!"
5–22
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
"#$&"$ #$%!&+
#
# #$%+"#+$
"#$&"$+#$%!&
# #$%+"#$
"#$&"$+#$%!&

#
# #$%+"#+$
+&
"$+'%+
#
"'+
#+#"%+$
(
#
# $+#"%+#"&
#+#"%+#+
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#+
(
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#++
# #"%+#"&+
#+#"%+#+
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#+
(
#
# #"%+#"&
#+#"%+#++
# #"%+#"&+
#+#"%+$
#
# $+#"%+#"&
#+#"%+$+
# $+#"%+#"&+
#+" '!
#
# " '!+#
(
#+#$%!
#
# #$%+#
#++" #+'$,

# +#%+
$!&+ %
#++" #+'$,

# +#%+
$!&+ %
%+&# +# $%
# (+# + %+
#
#
%'$
# (+# + %+
#
# $%+ %'$

"!%!+&# " ,
# (+$$!
#
#
!
#")$+$+"
# #")+&$ +"

#")$+$+"+
#
#")+&$ +"+
SIGNAL LISTS
#")$+%'##*+&(
#
#
+" ( (
#")$+%'##*+&(+
#
+"+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
#+" #+
# #+" #+
$$ #+%'##*+
#
# +#+ ( (

$$+#+#"%+$+
(
#
# $+#"%+#+
$$+ + &+# %'#, +#++ (

#
#
#* (
$$+#+$"'!+$,

#
# $&"'$+ %%+#+
&'$!
5–23
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
""*!* $ "*
! !

$*!**
""*!* $ "* ! !

$*!**
""*!* $*
*",
!
"* $*!**
$%"
""*!* $**",
!
"* $*!**
$%"
""*!*!#*
!

$ " !#*!**

""*!*!#*
!

$ " !#*!**

""*!*!#* !

$ " !#*!**
""*!*!#* !

$ " !#*!**
""*!*! #*" !
! "*! #*!*
""*!*! #*"** ! "*! #*!**
""*!*#$)*",
!

"*#$)*!*
$%"
""*!*#$*" % ! !

##*#$*!*
" $$ *" !

" "*" $
" $$ *" !

" "*" $
" $$ *"*& ! &*"*" $
" $$ *! '"*,
!
$*&"" %* *
$&*
" $$*! '"*$& !

!
$*" $*
" $$*! '"*$&* !
$*" $* *
" $*"* ! "*" $
" $*"** ! *"*" $*
" $*"**" *
!
! *"*" $*"

" $*"*" % ! !

##*"*" $
SIGNAL LISTS
" $*"* * % ! !

"$ %"*&"" %*"*
" $*"*# $*!"# ! !"#* *"*" $
"(! !$$& ! !

"(! "

"(! !$$& ! !

"(! "
"(* !$#" ! ! "(* "

#* & ! ! *
#* * ++ ! ! * ++
#* * ! * *
#*
& ! ! *

#*
*
++ ! ! *

++
#*
* ! *
*
#* & ! ! *
5–24
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
SID_2_ (560mm) 800PL5 - 2/F4 800PL2 - 9/H6 FOCALE_2 (560mm)
SID_2_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... FOCALE_2_A
SID_3* (0V) 800PL5 - 2/F4 800PL2 - 9/H5 FOCALE_3*
SID_3_ (510mm) 800PL5 - 2/F4 800PL2 - 9/H5 FOCALE_3 (510mm)
SID_3_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... FOCALE_3_A
CDE_FORMAT_A (COLLIMAĆ
SISE_CMD_A 800PL2 - 8/B6 ......
TOR)
CDE_FORMAT (COLLIMAĆ
SIZE_CMD 800PL6 - 1/D4 800PL2 - 8/G3
TOR)
SOFT_CMD_START_COLĆ
800PL2 - 4/E8 ...... START_LOG_ASC
UMN_
SOFT_CMD_START_COMP 800PL2 - 4/E4 ...... START_LOG_COMP
SOFT_CMD_START_LOCK 800PL2 - 4/E4 ...... START_LOG_VERROU
SOFT_CMD_START_ROT_BRA
800PL2 - 4/E4 ...... START_LOG_FREIN_ROT
KE
STEREOTIX_AUTHORIZAĆ
STEREOTIX 800PL2 -10/H2 AUTORISATION_STEREOTIX
TION
STEREOTIX_AUTHORIZAĆ AUTORISATION_STEREOĆ
800PL2 -10/C2 ......
TION_A TIX_A
STEREOTIX_SUPPLY_PRESĆ
800PL2 - 6/C5 ...... PRES_ALIM_STER
ENCE
TEMPER_HOUSING_SAFETY 800PL6 - 1/D4 800PL2 - 8/G5 SECU_GAINE
TEMPER_HOUSING_SAFEĆ
800PL2 - 8/C6 ...... SECU_GAINE_A
TY_A
TEST_COLUMN_STOPS 800PL2 - 3/B7 ...... TEST_BUT_ASC
TUBE_ARM_DISTR_GND_REĆ
800PL1 -19/G3 800PL2 - 8/G5 RETOUR_MASSE_RG
TURN
TX-PID (PATI.IDENT.DEVIC) 800PL3 - 3/B3 800PL1 -21/G4 TX+PID (T1B2)
TX-PID (PATI.IDENT.DEVIC) 800PL3 - 3/B3 800PL1 -21/G4 TX-PID
SIGNAL LISTS
TX_GENE_(OPT.SERIAL LINK) 800PL3 - 3/B3 800PL2 - 7/E2 TX_GENE (T1A2)
UCOM_GRID 800PL1 -10/A2 ...... UCOM_TRAME
VCC (+5V) 800PL1 800PL1 -20/C4 ......
VCC (+5V) 800PL1
VIA 800PL1 - 2/E2 ...... VIA
W18_GROUND_RETURN 800PL5 - 1/E4 800PL2 - 8/G2 RETOUR_MASSE_W18
W19_GROUND_RETURN 800PL5 - 1/C4 800PL2 - 8/G3 RETOUR_MASSE_W19
_12V_DROP 800PL2 - 7/D6 ...... _CHUTE_12V
_15V_DROP 800PL2 - 7/D7 ...... _CHUTE_15V
_27V_DROP 800PL2 - 7/A1 ...... _CHUTE_27V
_COLUMN_LOWER_STOP_A LOWER LIMIT 800PL2 -11/B4 _BUTE_ASC_BAS_A
5–25
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL
(STATIF)
"" "#

""

""""
" """
"" !
" !"
""
""
"" "
" ""
"" "
""
"" "
""
""#

""""
" "
""#

""""
"
" "!"
""
"" "

""
SIGNAL LISTS
5–26
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
GLOSSAIRE
FRANÇAIS/ANGLAIS
GENERATEUR (GENERATOR)
SIGNAL LISTS
5–27
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5–28
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
NOM DU SIGNAL SIGNAL NAME

ORIGINE DESTINATION
(GENERATEUR) (GENERATOR)
+12V 400T1 400PL1 - 2/F2 +12V
+12V_ALIM_BT 400PL1 - 2/F2 400PL1 - 6/E4 +12V_LV_SUPPLY
+12V_CMDE_LANCEUR 400PL1 - 25/E4 300PL2 - 6/H4 +12V_STARTER_CMD
+12V_COUPE 400PL1 - 25/E4 300PL2 - 6/H4 +12V_STARTER_CMD
+12V_ENTREE 400PL1 - 6/A4 400PL2 - 8/C1 +12V_INPUT
+15V (CPU:NOT USED) +15Vcpu
+15VK 701PL1 - 5/B3 ...... +15V_kV
+15VM 701PL1 - 5/A4 ...... +15V_mA
+250V 200PL2 - 2/A3 +250V
+27V 200PL2 - 2/E3 +27V
+27V_VENTILATEUR 200PL2 - 2/H11 +27V_FAN
+5VCPU = +5V 400PL2 - 8/C2 +5VCPU = 5V
+5V_ALIM_BT 400PL1 - 25/E4 400PL2 - 8/C2 +5V_LV_SUPPLY
+5V_ENTREE 400PL1 - 6/A4 400PL2 - 8/C2 5V_INPUT
+VE (+8V) 200PL1 - 3/B10 +VE (+8V)
+VLC 200PL2 - 2/A4 +VLC
+VR (+12V) 200PL1 - 3/D10 200PL2 - 1/D2 +VR
+VRA (+5V) 200PL1 - 2/A3 +VRA
+VV 200PL2 - 1/F4 200PL1 - 4/E5 +VV
+VV (+12V VEILLE) 200PL1 - 3/E10 200PL2 - 1/D2 +VV (KEEP ALIVE) +12V
-12V 400PL1 - 6/A4 - 12V
-12VD (-12V_DRIVERS) 400PL1 - 6/A3 ...... - 12VD
-12V_ALIM_BT 400PL1 - 2/F2 400PL1 - 6/E4 - 12V_LV_SUPPLY
-12V_DRIVERS (-12V) 400PL1 - 6/A3 700PL1 - 5/G3 - 12V_DRIVERS
-12V_ENTREE 400PL1 - 6/A3 400PL2 - 8/C1 - 12V_INPUT
SIGNAL LISTS
-15V (CPU NOT USED) - 15Vcpu
-15VK 701PL1 - 5/A1 ...... - 15V_Vk
-15VM 701PL1 - 5/A3 ...... - 15V_Vm
-VE (-8V) 200PL1 - 3/C10 - VE (-8V)
0V-VENTILATEUR 200PL2 - 2/H10 0V_FAN
0V232_1 400PL3 - 3/C4 CPU:0V232_1
0VD 701PL1 - 5/F3 ...... 0VD
0VE 200PL1 - 3/B10 0VE
0VK 701PL1 - 5/A2 ...... 0V_kV
0VLC 200PL2 - 2/B4 0VLC
0VM 701PL1 - 5/A4 0V_mA
0VV 200PL1 - 3/E10 200PL2 - 1/D2 0VV
5–29
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
'* ' "
'* '
'* ' "
'* '
'* '
" " '* '
'**% " '*'*$&"")
'**"&$$ " " '* *$&"")
'*"*& " " '*%#*"%!#
'*"& "
'"&
'*#'#$ "
" '*#'#$
'* %# " " '* "&%!'"&"%
'*"$*
" " '*"$*
'*"$*

" " '*"$*
'*"&"%# " " '*! $!

'*#$
" '*#$

'*$%% " " '* %#)
'*' "
"
'*"*'
*+,* "
*+,*#!%!#**
' "& !% &$ '
'*' "
"
*"*'
' " '
'' "
''
'**"&$$ " " '* *"!(#
'*"*& " " '*%#*"%!#
'*"&"%# " " '*! $!
'*$%% " " '* %#)
*,* " *,*#!%!#
SIGNAL LISTS

'# "

"
'# '#%#
*%!&#$ " " *#"
+'* +'* ********* "
" +'*
+'* +'* ** "
" +'**
'
" " ' '#%#
**!
" " * '*&## %
**!
" " * '*&## %
*"&$$*! " " '*$&"")*!
*"&$$*!* "
" '*$&"")*!*
*"&$$*!* "
" '*$&"")*!*
*"&$*! " " '*$&"")*!
5–30
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
$%)#$)#*
)"$%)%

#!'
!!#))

&!)"$')
###)"# &!))&#
$#))#
%)"$'))
$#))
!#!)"$')
$#)")
m"
$#)')
m"
$#)

$#)"
$#)"# $#)&!)
$#)
%!#!)
$#)!$
%)! $"#
$#)!$)
%)! $"#)
$#)!$)
%)! $"#)
$#)!$)
#!)! $"#
$#)!
$#)!
##!)
$##!')

)%
%)"
)#
)#)"#!#!
)#
)#)"#!#!
)#
)# )"#!#!
)#

)#
)"#!#!
)#
)#)"#!#!
)#

)#)"#!#!
$#)!

!')$##
$#)!

!')$##
SIGNAL LISTS
$#)!

!)$##
$#)!

!)$##

)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#
)#

)#
)#

)#
)#

)#
)##$! ##!)
!#(*
)!!
#)
5–31
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
)"#)

%"())
)"#)

%"() )
)"#)

%"()
)
)$
)$
)$ )$
)$

)$
)$ )$

)$
)$
)$ )$
)$#$)

%$#$))
)$#$)

%$#$) )
)$#$)

%$#$)
)
)$#$) $ %# %$#$))
"$
%)%
$")
%) #$) $"))$"
%) #$) $") )$"
%$)*&
*&)"
%$)*&)
*&)" )
%$)*&)
*&)" )
)$$#
$)
'+
) )
#)") )")
)
'+
) ) # #)") )")
)
SIGNAL LISTS
) "#$ #)

)"#)&($ "())

# "
)"#)&($ "())

# "
%) " )" ) " )" (
#)%)
$")")

#)%) &
$")")
$)%"+
#))""
"$)#!%")"
#)*&
*&)""
#)%) $")")
5–32
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
% % %%

% %
%% $%
% %
% %
% %%
% %
%
%
% %

% "% $%
%% %%%
"%% &
%

%!% &
% %
%
"

%
%
# %
! !%
%%! % %!
%% # % % #
%% %%&
%%

% % !% $%
% %! %% %!%
%&
SIGNAL LISTS
% % #
% % #%
% % %% %
%% %%&
% %

% %
%%
% %
% %!%

%
%
%
% % $
% % $
% % $
5–33
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
#))$ #!)#)
#))! ")#)
#) )$
#!)#)
#) )! ")#)
!
!(

) )
!)+ )+
)!! " $!)$!!#
) #!)$!!#)"
)# &$#)#
# #
#) #)
#))
#))
#))
#))
#) #)
#) )
#) )
#) )
#) )
))' %))'
))' %)$!!#)'
*%)))
"")#)*%)
*%))) *%)
"")#)*%)
SIGNAL LISTS
*%))) *%

"")#)*%)
*%))) *%)
"")#)*%)
*%)'

*%)'
*%)')
*%)')
*%)')
*%)')
*%)%
))*%
#$!)"$
"$!#()!)
#)"$ #$!)"$
"$!#()!)
) )*%)) )
) )*%) )
)*%) )
)*%)
)*%) )
)*%)
5–34
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
* *
(#
" (
(#
" (
(#
" (
((!'
!'( " (
(

!(
( !"

!(
*! *!
*( !# (*(
*(
*( !# (*(
*((
*(&

*(&
*(&( *(&(
*(&(
*(&(
! !
" (!# +
!# ((#

"(
" (!# +
!# ( (#

"(
!# ( (!# "
!# ()$
)$(!# "
!# (*( *
*(!# "(
!# (*( *(
*(!# "(
!# (!(
!((!# "
!# (!(

!(
(!# "
!# ( !" !(!# "
!# (!"#

!(!# "
SIGNAL LISTS
!(( (!# "(
!(( (!# "(
$(# "(!# +
!((
"
!" % (
(#
" (
!(

" !(
!(

" !(
!(

" !(
!"(
" (

5–35
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
GANTRY_EMERGENĆ
POING_STATIF_B 200PL2 - 3/F2 800PL2 -11/F7
CY_STOP_B
POLARISATION_COMMUN 400PL1 - 14/A2 45440617 COMMON_BIAS
POLARISATION_COURANT 400PL1 - 14/A2 45440617 CURRENT_BIAS
POSE_RX 400PL2 - 4/C3 400PL1 - 9/H4 RX_EXPOSURE
PRES_ACCELERATION 200PL2 - 2/C11 400PL1 - 3/C10 ACCELERATION
PRESENCE_ALIM 400PL1 - 4/B2 400PL2 - 5/H2 POWER_SUPPLY_PRESENT
PRESENCE_CHAUFFAGE 400PL1 - 20/F1 400PL2 - 5/H2 HEATER_PRESENCE
PRESENCE_POLARISATION 400PL1 - 15/B2 400PL2 - 5/H2 BIAS_PRESENCE
PRESENCE_ROTATION 400PL1 - 25/A4 400PL2 - 5/H2 ROTATION_PRESENCE
PRES_ALIM 200PL2 - 4/A9 ...... POWER_SUPPLY_PRES
PRES_ALIM 200PL1- 4/B2 400 PL2 - 5/H2 POWER_SUPPLY_OK
PRES_ALIM_A 200PL2 - 4/A11 400PL1 - 4/E4 POWER_SUPPLY_PRES_A
PRES_ALIM_B 200PL2 - 4/A11 400PL1 - 4/F4 POWER_SUPPLY_B
PRES_CHAUF 400PL1 - 20/F1 400PL2 - 5/H2 HEATER_PRESENCE
ROTOR_MOT CURĆ
PRES_COURANT_MOTEUR 400PL1 - 24/A4 ......
RENT_PR
PRES_LANC_ACTIF 200PL2 - 2/D11 400PL1 - 3/C9 ROTOR_ACTIVE
PRES_POLAR 400PL1 - 15/B2 400PL2 - 5/H2 BIAS_FREQUENCE
PRES_ROTAT 400PL1 - 25/A4 400PL2 - 5/H2 ROTATION_PRESENCE
PRES_SECTEUR 200PL2 - 4/A8 ...... MAINS_PRESENCE
PUISSANCE 400PL1 - 9/D3 ...... POWER
POWER_HEATER_CURĆ
PUISSANCE_COURANT_CH 400PL1 - 18/B3 ......
RENT
R1A1 400PL3 - 3/A4 CPU:R1A1
R1A2 400PL3 - 3/A4 CPU:R1A2
R1B1 400PL3 - 3/A4 CPU:R1B1
SIGNAL LISTS
R2A1 400PL3 - 3/A4 CPU:R2A1

RAZ_3s 200PL2 - 4/E4 ...... RESET_3s
REF_30V 200PL1 - 2/F5 ...... INVERTER_30V_REF
RETOUR_mA 701PL1 - 4/H2 XJ2 HV -UN/IT mA_FEEDBACK
RX+ 400PL1 - 25/A4 400PL2 - 8/F4 RX+
RX+A1 CPU:RX+A1
RX+GENERATOR(CONĆ
RX+_GENERATEUR (RX+) 400PL2 - 6/G1
SOLE:S.L)
RX- 400PL3 - 3/A4 400PL2 - 8/F4 RX- (SERIAL LINK)
RX-GENERATOR(CONĆ
RX-_GENERATEUR (RX-) 400PL2 - 3/A4
SOLE:S.L)
RX_BRAS 400PL3 - 3/A3 400PL2 - 8/F3 RX_ARM (SERIAL LINK)
5–36
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
RX_DEMANDE 400PL1 - 9/F4 ...... RX_REQUIREMENT
RX_RS232(SERVICETĆ
RX_RS232 400PL2 - 8/F4
ERM.S.L)
R_DECHARGE 200PL1 - 1/E9 ...... DISCHARGE_RESISTOR
SECURITE 400PL1 - 9/E3 ...... SAFETY
SECURITE_POLARISATION 400PL1 - 15/B3 ...... BIAS_SAFETY
SECU_BLOQ 400PL1 - 9/A4 400PL2 - 5/H2 FATAL_SECURITY
SECU_BLOQUANTE 400PL1 - 9/A4 400PL2 - 5/H2 FATAL_SECURITY
SECU_RATTRAP 400PL1 - 9/A4 400PL2 - 5/H2 NO_FATAL_SECURITY
SEL (V2) 200PL1 - 1/A10 SELECTION
SORTIE.DAC 400PL2 - 7/D3 ...... HEATER_DAC_OUTPUT
SRI_A (SRI_kV_A) 400PL2 - 4/A2 700PL1 - 3/H4 SRI_kV_A
SRI_B (SRI_kV-B) 400PL2 - 4/A2 701PL1 - 3/H4 SRI_ kV_B
SRI_kV_A SRI_kV_A
SRI_kV_B SRI_kV_B
STROBE_A (STROBE_kV_A) 400PL2 - 4/A2 701PL1 - 3/H3 STROBE_kV_A
STROBE_B (STROBE_kV_B) 400PL2 - 4/A2 701PL1 - 3/H3 STROBE_kV_B
STROBE_kV_A STROBE_kV_A
STROBE_kV_B STROBE_kV_B
SURCHARGE_DETECTEE 400PL1 - 20/D4 ...... OVERLOAD_DETECTED
ROTOR_OVERLOAD_DEĆ
SURINT_ENREG_LC 400PL1 - 23/G3 ......
TECT
SUR_I_B 300PL2 - 1/E1 400PL1 -24/C2 ROTOR_OVERCURRENT_B
SUR_I_H 300PL2 - 1/E1 400PL1 -24/C2 ROTOR_OVERCURRENT_H
SYB 400PL2 - 6/C4 ...... SYB
SYNCHRO_BRAS 400PL2 - 6/B4 ...... SYNCHRO_ARM
SIGNAL LISTS
T1A2 400PL3 - 3/B3 CPU:T1A2 (SERIAL LINK)
T1B1 400PL3 - 3/B4 CPU:T1B1 (SERIAL LINK)
T2A1 400PL3 - 3/B4 CPU:T2A1
T5000 400PL2 - 4/B4 400PL1 -25/H4 5000_RPM
TEMPS_POSE_MAX 400PL1 - 9/A2 400PL2 - 5/H4 EXPOSURE_TIME_MAX
TEST_62KV5 701PL1 - 1/G3 TEST_62KV5
TEST_kV_VIDE 400PL1 - 10/F3 ...... NO LOAD_kV_TEST
TEMĆ
TETA_INF_TMAX 200PL2 - 4/D11 ......
PER_LESS_THAN_TMAX
TEMPER_HIGHĆ
TETA_SUP_TMAX 200PL2 - 4/F9 ......
ER_THAN_TMAX
THERMAL
THERMOSTAT+ 200PL2 - 2/F10 THERMOSTAT+
SWITCH
5–37
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
#!"##

#!"##
#$#(!$
!$#(#($#
#($#(!$
!$#(#$#
#$(

($##
# "(&

& "$!(#&
#!

#("(#
#!( #!(
#!( ( #!(
(
#!( ( #!( (
#!(

#!(
#!(
(
#!(
(
#!(
(
#!(
(
#&
#& "!
#&(!#!*
#&(!#$! #&

" "
#&
#& "!
#&(!#!*
#&(!#$! #&

" "
#&(!"
#&(! "!
#&(!"

"!% #!
#&(!"

"
#(()

#(""(#()
#(! #!

#("(#
#(!( #("(# (
#(!( #("(# (
#("$ ()

#(!(#()
%
%
SIGNAL LISTS
%

%
%(!
%(! '
%( !
%( !
% % % %
%
%
%

%
%'#(

(#($##
%'#(

(#($##
%'#( "(

& "$!(#(
%'#( "(

& "$!(#(
($#((#
(%("$ '(
5–38
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

ORIGINE DESTINATION
%! %&"% ! &"%
&"%%
%! %&"% ! &"%
&"%%
%#%%!'
%%

%% % %
%%! %%!
%&"%$% &"%$%
&"%$%
%&"%$% &"%$%
&"%$%
% %$!
% %"'
%!%

%"%! %'
%! %%

% %&"%"
% %&"%
SIGNAL LISTS
5–39
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5–40
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

SIGNAL LISTS
5–41
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Page blank
SIGNAL LISTS
5–42
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
NOM DU SIGNAL (STATIF) ORIGINE SIGNAL NAME (GANTRY)
TION
$ ! ! $ !
' ! !
' !
' !
!

' !

$ ! ! $ !
$ ! ! $ !
' ! !
!
' ! !

'$ !
')
') !

')$%# !
$%# %( ')$%# %(

' ! &%$ !
!

' ! % &$

' !
&%$
' !
% &$
' ' ! !
!
' ' !
' !

'
')$ !

') &
')%# !

')%)%#
') #%$ "&$ !

') #$
') ! !

') !
') !

!

')
')(% !
!
')(% (%#
')# !

')#
')! !

')!
')!! !

')$%!!#
')$%# !

$%# %(
')$%# %(
')%# !

')#
')'## & !

')
SIGNAL LISTS
'(% !
!

'(% (%#
') !
!
') #$
')$%# $%# %( !
')$%# %(
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$

! !
!&
#$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
! !
!& #$$ &$
5–43
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
A7 800PL3 - 5/B4 800PL2 - 1/G6 CPU:A7 (ADDRESS BUS G64)
ALIM_COMP (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 - 7/G4 COMP_SUPPLY (VCC:+5V)
ALIM_DIAPH_A (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 -16/H4 REAR DIAPH_SUPPLY_
ALIM_DIAPH_A_L (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 -19/B3 REAR_ &_ LAT_DIAPH SUPPLY
ALIM_DIAPH_L (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 -17/H4 LAT_DIAPH_SUPPLY
ALIM_DIAPH_V (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/B7 800PL1 -26/C2 FRONT_DIAPH_SUPPLY
ALIM_FILTRE (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 -15/H4 FILTER_SUPPLY
ALIM_FILTRE_GAINE(VCC
800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 -14/H4 FILTER_&_HOUSING_SUPPLY
+5V
ALIM_GAINE (VCC: +5V) 800PL2 - 3/G2 800PL1 -14/H4 HOUSING_POWER
ALIM_OK (VCC: +5V) 800PL1 - 1/A3 800PL2 -10/G5 POWER_SUPPLY_ACTIVE
ALIM_OK_A 800PL2 -10/D5 ...... POWER_SUPPLY_ACTIVE_A
ALIM_SAUV_+5V 800PL3 - 9/E2 ...... CPU:+5V_LITHIUM_BATTERY
ASC 800PL2 - 4/E3 ...... COLUMN_CMD
ASC_INACTIF 800PL1 - 1/A2 800PL2 -10/D4 COLUMN_POWER_INACTIVE
ASC_INACTIF_A 800PL2 -10/D3 ...... COLUMN_POWER_INACTIVE_A
AUTORISATION_STEREOTIX STEREOTIX 800PL2 -10/H2 STEREOTIX_AUTHORIZATION
AUTORISATION_STEREOĆ STEREOTIX_AUTHORIZAĆ
800PL2 -10/C2 ......
TIX_A TION_A
BATTERIE_OK 800PL3 - 9/A1 ...... CPU:BATTERY_OK
BOUCLAGE_OK 800PL1 - 1/A3 800PL2 -10/G4 LOOPS_OK
BOUCLAGE_OK_A 800PL2 -10/D4 ...... LOOPS_OK_A
SIGNAL LISTS
BUTEE_TRAME 800PL5 - 2/C4 800PL2 - 9/H5 GRID_STOP

BUTEE_TRAME_A 800PL2 - 9/D5 ...... GRID_STOP_A
C_PRESENCE_K7 800PL5 - 1/H3 800PL5 - 1/B3 CASSETTE_DETECT
CDE_ASC+_A 800PL2 - 8/C4 ...... COLUMN+_CMD_A
CDE_ASC-_A 800PL2 - 8/C4 ...... COLUMN-_CMD_A
CDE_ASC_+_RC 800PL5 - 1/E4 800PL2 - 8/G4 COLUMN_CMD_+_CADB
CDE_ASC_+_RG 800PL6 - 1/E4 800PL2 - 8/G5 COLUMN_CMD_+_THADB
CDE_ASC_-_RC 800PL5 - 1/E4 800PL2 - 8/G4 COLUMN_CMD_-_CADB
CDE_ASC_-_RG 800PL6 - 1/E4 800PL2 - 8/G4 COLUMN_CMD_-_THADB
CDE_COMP_A 800PL2 -11/E6 ...... COMP_CMD_A
CDE_DECOMP_A 800PL2 -11/E5 ...... DECOMP_CMD_A
5–44
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
*!# ,

")*
#!
*!#* ,

""**
#!
*!*!#*

!#*!**
*!*!#*!

!#*!**!*
*!"* $!(* *
*!"*

$!(*
*
*!"*
$!(**
*#"#*
$#"#* *
*#"#*

$#"#*
*
*#"#*
$#"#**
*#"#* $#" $#"#** # $"
*%!!$
*
*%!!$*
**
**
**
**

**
#!$!
#*#!
#!
#!$!
#*#!
$
#!
#!$!
#*#!
$
#!$!*$$'

#*#!*
#!$!*$$'*
#*#!**
#!$!*

#*#!*
#!$!**
#*#!**
*"#! "#!#'
*"#!#'
SIGNAL LISTS
+ $ +
+ $ +
+ $+
*$
*$
*$

*$
* *

*" *
!*#!
!*!
* !

% *!!
#
*!$* &,
$*""* $""

!*!
$* % *$
5–45
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
COMP_1 800PL2 -12/A3 ...... COMP_1
COMP_2 800PL2 -12/A3 ...... COMP_2
COMP_ON_1 800PL1 - 7/D3 ...... COMP_ON_1
COMP_ON_2 800PL1 - 7/D3 ...... COMP_ON_2
CONSIGNE_COMP_1 800PL2 - 5/A6 800PL1 - 5/H3 COMP_REF_PH_1
CONSIGNE_COMP_2 800PL2 - 5/A8 800PL1 - 6/H3 COMP_REF_PH_2
CONSIGNE_HTPM(COMMANĆ
800PL2 - 5/F1 800PL4 - 1/E8 PMHV_REFERENCE
DE DAC
CONSIGNE_TRAME 800PL2 - 5/A4 800PL1 -10/H2 GRID_REFERENCE
CONS_FORCE 800PL8 - 1/B3 800PL2 -12/H3 FORCE_REF
CONS_FORCE* 800PL8 - 1/B3 800PL2 -12/H3 FORCE_REF* (0V)
EN_STER (NOT USED) EN_STER (NOT USED)
ETA_ROT_OFF 800PL1 - 1/A3 800PL2 -10/H5 ROTAT_POWER_INACTIVE
ETA_ROT_OFF_A 800PL2 -10/D5 ...... ROTAT_POWER_INACTIVE_A
ETA_VERROU_OFF 800PL1 - 1/A3 800PL2 -10/H5 LOCK_POWER_INACTIVE
ETA_VERROU_OFF_A 800PL2 -10/D5 ...... ROTATION_POWER_INACTIVE_A
FOCALE_0 (660mm) 800PL5 - 2/G4 800PL2 - 9/H6 SID_0_ (660mm)
FOCALE_0* 800PL5 - 2/G4 800PL2 - 9/H6 SID_0* (0V)
FOCALE_0_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... SID_0_A
FOCALE_1 (610mm) 800PL5 - 2/F4 800PL2 - 9/H6 SID_1_ (610mm)
FOCALE_1* 800PL5 - 2/F4 800PL2 - 9/H6 SID_1* (0V)
FOCALE_1_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... SID_1_A
FOCALE_2_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... SID_2_A
SIGNAL LISTS

FOCALE_3_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... SID_3_A
FORMAT_24*30 800PL10- 1/B2 800PL2 - 9/H8 24 x 30_SIZE
FORMAT_24*30_A 800PL2 - 9/D8 ...... 24 X 30_SIZE_A
FREIN_ROT 800PL2 - 6/A2 ...... ROT_BRAKE_CMD
FREIN_ROT+ 800PL1 -18/B4 COIL BRAKE ROTATION_BRAKE+
FREIN_ROT- 800PL1 -18/B4 COIL BRAKE ROTATION_BRAKE-
FUSE_OK 800PL1 - 1/A3 800PL2 -10/G4 FUSE_OK
FUSE_OK_A 800PL2 -10/D4 ...... FUSE_OK-A
FU_ASC 800PL1 -20/E1 ...... COLUMN_FUSE
FU_FR 800PL1 -22/B1 ...... BRAKE_FUSE
5–46
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
&)'## & !

)&$
#) !

! % )
#) ) ! % ) )
#)
!

! %
#)
) ! % )
)
#) !

! %
#)) ! % ))
)
!

! #)%%)

)
) ! #)%%)
)
)
!

! #)%%)

)
) ! #)%%)
)
) !

! #)%%)
) ) ! #)%%) )
)# !

! #)%%)*
)#) ! #)%%)*)
)! $)! %
! ! #)!)! $)!)
)! $)! %
! ! #)!)! $)!)
'
)! $)! %
) ! #)!)! $)!)
)
)! $)! % ! !
#)!)! $)!)
)! $)! % ! !
#)!)! $)!) '
)! $)! %) ! #)!)! $)!))
%$) ) ! ! !)&##%)#)'&)
%$)
) ! ! !)&##%)'&)
%$)) ! ! !)&##%)'&)

%$)) ! ! !)&##%)'&)
SIGNAL LISTS
)!$)
!
!)
) !)&##%)$
)!$) !
!)) !)&##%)$
#)&((# ! &((#)
$$)$ ! !

&)# &
$$)%#&# ! !

%)%#)# &
$$) ! ! !

!)# &
$$) $) ! ! !

!)#)# &
$$) $)%# ! !

#)#)# &
$$)#)! % ! !

#)!)# &
$$)#)# % ! !

# %)#)# &
$$)"& #% # !
)# &
$$) )%# ! !

#) )# &
5–47
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
""( "(#! !( "#(!$
""("#( (

!!( ("#(!$
""("#( (

#( ("#(!$
""("#(#!

#!("#(!$
""("#(

$"("#(!$
""(%!!$

(!$
"(# ( !" )

%( ("(
"$!
( (
(
(
#("

$(#!
#("
#! $(#!
#("
#! $(#!
#( (
#( (
#( (

#( (
#( ((

!!( (#!(
#( ((

!!( (#!(
#( ((

#( (#!(
#( ((

#( (#!(
#( (%(

!#( (#!(
#( (%(

!#( (#!(
#(#!(
#!(#!(
#(#!(

#!(#!(
#((
$"(#!(
#((

$"(#!(
! )
#(#! !(#!
SIGNAL LISTS
#!
! )
#(#! !(#!
#!
((
( &!("$ '(
("(#
($( &!(#%
(#!$!(
(#( &!(#%
(#(!# (!##( &!(#%
(#(%!!$ (( &!(#%
($"(

($"(
( &(#!(
(!( &!(
("

($
(#!$!

(# #!
5–48
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
# #

## # #
# #
#"! #
!# #!#
# #
# #
##
##
##
##
## ##
## #
$
###
###

$
###
###

$
### ###

$
### ###

$
###
###

$
###
###

$
### ###

$
### ###

$
##"# ###

$
##"# ###

SIGNAL LISTS
$
##"# ###

$
##"# ###

# #
##
# #
##
# # ##
# # ##
##

!##
##

!##
##
!##
##
!##
5–49
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
! #*#* * ! !
%*! #*!* *
! #*#*
* ! !
%*! #*!*
*
! #*! $ !
!

!*! #*!*
! #*! $ !
!

!*! #*!* &
! #*! $ * !

!*! #*!* *
! #*! $
!
!
!*! #*!*
! #*! $
!
!
!*! #*!*
&
! #*! $
* !
!*! #*!*
*
! #*$" ! ! "*! #$
! '*$"* ! ! '"*"*
! '*$"* * !
! '"*"* *
*!"#*##$$ ! ! ##$$*$$ "
!"#*$" !
!

"*!"#
!"#*$"* !
"*!"#*
!"#* ! !
##$*!"#*
!"#** !
!
##$*!"#*
!"#*%#$* ! !
!*%#$*!"#
!"#**# !
!
# *#%!!)*!"#
!"#**#$" !
#$" $(*#%!!)*!"#
!"#* *# !
%*# $*!"#
!"#* * ! !

!*# $*!"#
!"#* *"*" $ !
" $*"*# $*!"#
!"#* *&"" % !
*# $*!"#
!"#* !" !

!"$ "*!"#$
!"#* !* ! !

!* !"$ "*!"#
SIGNAL LISTS
!"#* !*" ! !

!"$ " !"#$*
!"#* !*" ! !
!"$ "*!"#$*$
!"#*! !
!
!*!"#
!"#*!* ! !
!*!"#*!
!'*# !

%*!'
!* !* ! !* !*
!* !* ! !* !*
!* !*
!
!* !*

!* !*
!
!* !*

5–50
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
#
#)+ "&#

#
#)" "&#

# #)" "&#
#+"!$+"+ "
" ##+"+"!$+#
#+"!$+"+ "
" ##+"+"!$+#+ '
#+"!$+"++ " ##+"+"!$+#++
#+"!$+"+ "
" %+"+"!$+#
#+"!$+"+ "
" %+"+"!$+# '
#+"!$+"++ " %+"+"!$+#+
#+"!$+"+' "
" #! %+"+"!$+#
#+"!$+%# "
" %#+"!$+#
#+"!$+%# "
" %#+"!$+#
#+"!$+%#+ " %#+"!$+#+
#+"!$+ "
" !&$ +"!$+#
#+"!$+ "
" !&$ +"!$+#
#+"!$+ + " !&$ +"!$+#+
#+"!$+"!% " "
"+"!$+#
#+"!$+"!% " "
"+"!$+# '
#+"!$+"!%+ "
"+"!$+#+
#$+!&"+"! "
"
# *+$%!"+#*
#$+$&# " "
"'+"+$+
#%!&#+$$+ %#&# " "

%+#!& +#%&#
#%!&#+$$+!"+%# " "

#+!"+#!& +#%&#
##+"+#!& +#,
#%!&#+$$+"+ " "

%&#
#%!&#+$$+%#+ " "

%#+#!& +#%&#
SIGNAL LISTS
%&+#+$%#+ +#,
#%!&#+$$+# "

"
%&#
#%!&#+$$+(
"
" (
+#!& +#%&#
#%!&#+$$+(
"
" (
+#!& +#%&#
#%!&#+'##!&+# + " "

#!%+#+!+!&
#)" #
" "

#)" "% %'
#)" # " "

#)" "% %'
#)+ #
" " #)+ !"%$#
5–51
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
%!%% !%%%!"
%!%% !%% %!"
%!%%%
%%!%%!"
%!%%%
%%!% %!"
%!%%%
!%%!%%!"
%!%%% !%%!% %!"
%!%%#% !%%!%%!"
%!%%#% !%%!% %!"
%!%!%
!%!%%!"
%!%!% !%!% %!"
%!%%
" %!%%!"
%!%% " %!% %!"
%%
%"%!"
%!%!%&
%%!"

!"
%%
%%!"
%%%!
%!!%%!"
%%! %%!"
%%#"

%%!"
%% !$%&
% !$%%
!"
% !$%%
!%% !$%!"
!%% !$%&
% !$%%#
!"
% !$%!
!% !$%!"
% !$%
" % !$%!"
"!% ! " % !$
SIGNAL LISTS
"!%% % !$%

"% !%" % !$
"%% !%" % !$%
% %!
% %!
!$%%

%% !$%
!$%%

!%% !$
!$%%#
!%% !$
!$%!

!% !$
!$%

" % !$
5–52
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
"#!#))"
"#))"#!#)$)
"#!#))
"#))"#!#)
"#!#))!)!#
"#))"#!#)!#)!
"#!#))%!!$
"#))"#!#)
"(!)!"

!)"(!
#
#') $#
#
#' $#
#"#))"

")"$ ()#"#
#"#)$#)"
#"#)$)"# "
#!
!
#' #

#' ##%
#'
#' ##%
#') #

#')) #"!
$)#!
$)!
%)"
$)%
%)
)%
%)!)!#
!##)!)%
%)%#)

)%#)%
%)%!!$
)%
% %
% %
%!!$
)
%!!$
%!!$
%

%
)$#)")") &! #
)$)&!)"# )
SIGNAL LISTS
)$#)")$#) $ ! #
)$)$ !)"# )
)$#)
%
)
%)!
)$#) %
) %)!
)$#)
%
)
%)!
)

$) # $"
)

$) # $"
)

$) # $"
)

$) # $"
)

$)
# $"
)

$)
# $"
5–53
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
DESTINAĆ
TION
#

!#
!
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#

!# !
#### # # ##
####
# # #
# "#
## "
SIGNAL LISTS
5–54
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
CHAPTER 6 – RENEWAL PARTS
CONTENTS
ILLUSTRATION TITLE PAGE
ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6–1 LOCATION OF SUBASSEMBLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6–2 LOCATION OF BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6–3 SENOGRAPHE DMR 36005705 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6–4 GENERATOR CABINET 36005958 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
6–5 GENERATOR CABINET SEMI–ASSEMBLED 36002118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–11
6–6 701–HV UNIT ASSEMBLY 45440275 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–13
6–7 200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT 45440274 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–15
6–8 400–GENERATOR CONTROL PLATE 36005963 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–19
6–9 300–GENERATOR POWER PLATE 45440269 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–21
6–10 GENERATOR CABLE ASSEMBLY SET 45441072 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–23
6–11 100–CONSOLE CDRH 45561630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–25
6–12 SET OF COVERS 45560678 – COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE 45560702 . . . . . . . 6–27
6–13 800–GANTRY 36005747 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
6–14 800–COLUMN UNIT 45559482 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31
6–15 SET OF CABLES, COLUMN 45560239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–33
6–16 800–ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS 2102287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–35
6–17 800–READOUT UNIT 36005259 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–37
6–18 800–SET OF CABLES, GANTRY 45560263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–39
6–19 800–MAIN HARNESS 45560261 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–41
6–20 800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–43
6–21 800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–45
6–22 800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–49
6–23 800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–51
RENEWAL PARTS
6–24 TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2101067 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–53

6–25 SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2109334 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–55
6–26 IMAGE RECEPTOR 45554608 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–57
6–27 PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY 2102432 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–59
6–28 PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY 45560085 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–61
6–i
REV 0 sm 2308529–100

6–29 ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY 45560090 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–63

6–30 SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM 45560231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–65
6–31 SET OF HANDLES 45475381 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–67
6–32 ACCESSORIES 45560675 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–69
6–33 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 45560671 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–73
6–34 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–77
RENEWAL PARTS
6–ii
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ABBREVIATIONS
ITEM
NO.
– Not illustrated.
–6 Item No. 6 not illustrated.
FRU Field Replaceable Unit.
1 Critical.
2 Not critical.
N Not available.
REP
Y Repairable.
QTY
PL Previously listed as an assembly or subassembly.

AR As required.
APP Applies to.
Viewing direction.
RENEWAL PARTS
6–1
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–1
LOCATION OF SUBASSEMBLIES
SENO DMR
ILL. 4–3
OPTIONAL X–RAY TUBE/TUBE HOUSING

ACCESSORIES ILL. 6–3
ILL. 6–34
701 – HV UNIT
ASSEMBLY
ILL. 6–6
200 – GENERATOR
LINE SUPPLY UNIT
ILL. 6–7
400 – GENERATOR
CONTROL PLATE
ILL. 6–8
300 – GENERATOR
POWER PLATE
ILL. 6–9
GENERATOR ACCESSORIES
CABLE ASSEMBLY 100–CONSOLE ILL. 6–32
SET CDRH
ILL. 6–10 ILL. 6–11
SET OF COVERS
ILL. 6–12
COVERS MOUNTING
HARDWARE
ILL. 6–12
RENEWAL PARTS
GENERATOR CABINET
ILL. 6–4
GENERATOR CABINET
SEMI–ASSEMBLED
ILL. 6–5
6–2
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
800–GANTRY
ILL. 6–13
TUBE HOUSING SPACER

ILL. 6–24
SET OF CABLES,
TUBE HOUSING SPACER
ILL. 6–25
SET OF HANDLES
ILL. 6–31
800–READOUT UNIT
ILL. 6–17
PADDLE FASTENER
ASSEMBLY
800–COLUMN UNIT ILL. 6–28
ILL. 6–14
SET OF CABLES,
COLUMN IMAGE RECEPTOR
ILL. 6–15 ILL. 6–26
ELECTROMAGNET PHOTOCELL
MOUNT ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
ILL. 6–29 ILL. 6–27
800–ASSEMBLED 800–EXAMINATION
GANTRY BOARDS ARM
ILL. 6–16 ILL. 6–20 thru 6–23
SET OF CABLES,
COMPRESSION ARM
800–MAIN HARNESS ILL. 6–30
ILL. 6–19
RENEWAL PARTS
800–SET OF CABLES,
GANTRY
ILL. 6–18
6–3
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–2
LOCATION OF BOARDS
100–PL1 OPERATOR BOARD

100–PL2 CONSOLE CONTROL
BOARD
701–PL1 KVMA BOARD

200–PL1 MAINS–POWER BOARD
200–PL2 SUPPLY COMMAND BOARD
RENEWAL PARTS
400–PL1 GENERATOR COMMAND BOARD

400–PL2 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
400–PL3 GENERATOR CPU BOARD
300–PL2 ANODE STARTER BOARD
300–PL3 ANODE STARTER SECURITY BOARD
300–PL1 INVERTER BOARD
6–4
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
800–PL6 TUBE HOUSING ARM

DISTRIBUTION BOARD
800–PL11 ENCODER BOARD
800–PL16 INTER–ARM–LOCK
COMMAND BOARD
800–PL12 GANTRY
READOUT
BOARD
800–PL9 ENCODER
800–PL5 COMPRESSION BOARD
ARM
DISTRIBUTION 800–PL8 PADDLE
BOARD BOARD
800–PL14 MAGNIFICATION
SENSOR 800–PL15 INTER
BOARD ARM TILT
SENSOR
800–PL7 SID BOARD
SENSOR
BOARD
800–PL10 IMAGE
800–PL3 GANTRY RECEPTOR
CPU BOARD
BOARD
800–PL4 PHOTOCELL
BOARD
800–PL2 GANTRY 800–PL13 ENCODER

INTERFACE BOARD
BOARD
800–PL1 GANTRY
POWER
BOARD
RENEWAL PARTS
6–5
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–3
SENOGRAPHE DMR 36005705
4 2
3
6
RENEWAL PARTS
6–6
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–3
SENOGRAPHE DMR 36005705
A
ITEM
PART NO. FRU REP DESCRIPTION QTY P
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N SENOGRAPHE DMR 1
1 N S GENERATOR CABINET (SEE ILLUSTRATIONS 6–4, 6–5) 1

2 45561630 1 Y S 100–CONSOLE CDRH (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–11) 1
3 N S SET OF COVERS (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–12) 1
4 N S 800–GANTRY (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–13) 1
5 N S ACCESSORIES (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–32) 1
6 45560702 1 S COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–12) 1
7 36005982 2 S IDENTIFICATION KIT 1

– N S S IDENTIFICATION, SENO DMR CDRH ASSY 1
– N S S IDENTIFICATION, AEC/AOP SENO DMR 1
– N S S IDENTIFICATION, SENO DMR HV CABINET CDRH 1
– N S S IDENTIFICATION, SENO DMR COLLIMATOR CDRH 1
– N S S IDENTIFICATION, SENO DMR IMAGE RECEPTOR 1
– N S S GANTRY IDENTIFICATION, SENO DMR 1
– N S S FRONT STRIP SCREEN PRINTED 1
8 39558870 1 Y S X–RAY TUBE/TUBE HOUSING M52/GS412 49

(SEE DIRECTION DTP 45290897) 1
– 45290185 1 S S THERMOSTAT 65ºC 1
8 2218375 1 S X–RAY TUBE/TUBE HOUSING MAXIRAY 70TH–F (D4172M) 1
– 2105128 2 S S THERMOSTAT 65C (WIRED) 1
– 9 N S TECHNICAL PUBLICATION, SENOGRAPHE DMR 1

– 10 2308527–101 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (FRENCH) 1
– 11 2308527–100 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (ENGLISH) 1
– 12 2308527–106 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (SPANISH) 1
– 13 2308527–108 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (GERMAN) 1
– 14 2308527–111 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (ITALIAN) 1
– 15 2308527–127 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (PORTUGUESE) 1
– 16 2308527–140 2 S S OPERATOR MANUAL (JAPANESE) 1
– 17 2308529–100 2 S S SERVICE MANUAL (ENGLISH) 1
– 18 36002977 2 S S SCHEMATICS 1
– 19 45561604 2 S S PIM 1
RENEWAL PARTS
– 20 2157897 2 S FLOPPY MAMMOCOM V1.16 1
– 21 2248747 2 S FLOPPY DATACONVERTER V5.10 1
– 22 36003399 1 HEATER CURRENT & BIAS TOOL 1

– 23 36003565 1 RESOLUTION PATTERN HOLDER (TOOL) 1
– 24 46–194427P407 1 MAMMO COMPRESSION SCALE (TOOL) 1
6–7
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION
GENERATOR CABINET 36005958
6 6
1 7
8
6
6
4
5
3 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–8
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–4
GENERATOR CABINET 36005958
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N GENERATOR CABINET PL
1 N S GENERATOR CABINET, SEMI–ASSEMBLED (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–5) 1

2 45440275 1 Y S 701–HV UNIT ASSEMBLY (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–6) 1
3 45067118 2 S METAL STRAP WITH FASTENER 1
4 N S 200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–7) 1
5 45067119 1 S METAL STRAP WITH FASTENER 1
6 45438672 1 S MOULDED SLIDEWAY 4
7 N S 400–GENERATOR CONTROL PLATE (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–8) 1
8 N S 300–GENERATOR POWER PLATE (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–9) 1
– 9 N S GENERATOR CABLE ASSY SET (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–10) 1
– 10 45559859 1 SET OF GENERATOR LABELS 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–9
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–5
GENERATOR CABINET, SEMI–ASSEMBLED 36002118
1 2
3
RENEWAL PARTS
6–10
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–5
GENERATOR CABINET SEMI–ASSEMBLED 36002118
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N GENERATOR CABINET, SEMI–ASSEMBLED PL
1 91641455 1 S TRANSPORTATION BALL D=30 STL 4

2 91719024 1 S FIXED JACK D=40 M10X25 4
3 45474049 1 S SMALL PANEL PAINTED 2
4 45474050 1 S LARGE PANEL PAINTED 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–11
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–6
701–HV UNIT ASSEMBLY 45440275
RENEWAL PARTS
1 2 3
701–PL1
6–12
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–6
701–HV UNIT ASSEMBLY 45440275
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 45440275 1 Y 701–HV UNIT ASSEMBLY PL
1 36003514 1 Y S 701–PL1 KVMA BOARD V4 1

2 91710259 1 S NYLON BOARD SUPPORT H=6.35MM CLIP–ON 4
3 45203148 1 S COAXIAL CABLE, HV UNIT/PCB 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–13
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–7
200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT 45440274
4
5
7 3
17
18 6
19
2
200–PL1
26
T1
27
28
14
D25
14
D24
200 PL2 XJ2
15
25 D26
W12
15
D27
24
W10 16
200–PL2
20
F1 13
RENEWAL PARTS
21
F2
12
22
F3
10
9 11
6–14
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–7
200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT 45440274
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT PL
1 91658207 1 S NYLON BOARD SUPPORT H=22.2MM 6
2 36002368 1 Y S 200–PL1 MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD V4 1

F1 58079686 1 S S FUSE 6X32 1.0A 250V ULL 1
F2 58079685 1 S S FUSE 6X32 0.5A 250V ULL 1
F3 58079685 1 S S FUSE 6X32 0.5A 250V ULL 1
X3,X4 91692636 1 S S RELAY 12VDC 1250VA 250VAC 5A 2
X1 91682082 1 S S RELAY 12VDC 16A 1
R1 99182099 1 S S COILED RESISTOR 280W 22 OHMS 5 % 1
3 45560072 1 S FAN ASSEMBLY WIRED 1

4 N S FLAT WASHER M3 N PASS SST 2
5 N S SELF–TAPPING FLSTR HD SCREW M3X10 GALV STL 2
6 58079856 1 S CAPACITOR AL 2200 mF –10+50 % 350V SCREW 1
7 99091203 1 S CAPACITOR AL 33000 mF –10+50 % 63V SCREW 1
8 N S CABLE TIE L=381MM 2
9 91717028 1 S FUSE HOLDER 1
11 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X16/16 PASS SST 2
12 91728240 1 S CONTACTOR 3–POS 660V 18A 220VAC 1
13 91717300 1 S ROTARY SWITCH 2–POS 50A 600VAC 1
14 91707990 1 S DIODE DD31N400K 400V 480A UL (D24) 1
91707990 1 S DIODE DD31N400K 400V 480A UL (D25) 1
15 91707991 1 S DIODE DD61N400K 400V 1200A U (D26) 1
91707991 1 S DIODE DD61N400K 400V 1200A U (D27) 1
16 36002367 1 Y S 200–PL2 SUPPLY COMMAND BOARD V5 1

F1 99194288 1 S S FUSE 6X32 3.15A 250V 100A ULL 1
F2 58079685 1 S S FUSE 6X32 0.5A 250V 35A ULL 1
F4 58079166 1 S S FUSE 6X32 10A 380V 10KA ULL 1
RENEWAL PARTS
F3 91684676 1 S S FUSE 27X27 125A 150VAC 1
17 N S FLAT WASHER M5N PASS SST 4

18 N S TOOTH–LOCK WASHER EXT TTH M5 PASS SST 4
19 N S HEX NUT M5 PASS SST 4
6–15
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
LLUSTRATION 6–7
200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT 45440274 (Continued)
4
5
7 3
17
18 6
19
2
200–PL1
26
T1
27
28
14
D25
14
D24
200 PL2 XJ2
15
25 D26
W12
15
D27
24
W10 16
200–PL2
20
F1 13
RENEWAL PARTS
21
F2
12
22
F3
10
9 11
6–16
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–7
200–GENERATOR LINE SUPPLY UNIT 45440274 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
20 99184154 1 S FUSE 27X60 35A 600V 100KA ULL (F1) 1

21 99184154 1 S FUSE 27X60 35A 600V 100KA ULL (F2) 1
22 99184154 1 S FUSE 27X60 35A 600V 100KA ULL (F3) 1
– 23 N S SET OF CABLES, LINE SUPPLY 1

24 45554286 1 S S FLAT CABLE WITH CABLE SHEATH 10–C (W10) 1
25 45554287 1 S S FLAT CABLE WITH CABLE SHEATH 26–C (W12) 1
26 45066951 1 S AUTOTRANSFORMER SINGLE PHASE–THREE PHASES 9KW (T1) 1

RENEWAL PARTS
6–17
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–8
400–GENERATOR CONTROL PLATE 36005963
A B
400–PL3
400–PL1 400–PL2
14
13 12
A B
1 4
2
3 8
or
15
400–PL3
14 7
RENEWAL PARTS
400–PL1 400–PL2
6 5
6–18
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–8
400–GENERATOR CONTROL PLATE 36005963
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 400–GENERATOR CONTROL PLATE PL
1 91716597 1 S POWER SUPPLY 45W+5V/+–12V 400T1 1

2 N S CROSS–TIP SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 2
3 N S TOOTH–LOCK WASHER EXT TTH M4 SST 2
4 N S NYLON SPACER 15.88MM UL 11
5 91654698 1 S NYLON PCB SUPPORT H=15.9 MM CLIP–ON 3
6 45563251 1 Y S 400–PL1 GENERATOR COMMAND V6 BOARD 1

F1 99194291 1 S S FUSE 6X32 2.5A 250V 100A ULL 1
F2 99194291 1 S S FUSE 6X32 2.5A 250V 100A ULL 1
F3 99194291 1 S S FUSE 6X32 2.5A 250V 100A ULL 1
7 45441852 1 Y S 400–PL2 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD 1
8 2274829–5 1 S 400–PL3 GENERATOR CPU BOARD V6.21 PROGRAMMED 1
– 9 N S S STANDARD CPU BOARD 1
– 10 99171545 2 S S S RED JUMPER PITCH 2.54 1

BT1 99171019 1 S S S LITHIUM BATTERY 850 MAH 1
– 11 N S CONTROL PLATE CABLE ASSEMBLIES 1

12 45440115 1 S S CPU POWER SUPPLY CABLE(W1) 1
13 45440116 1 S S INFO CONTROL CABLE (W2) 1
14 45440117 1 S S POWER SUPPLY CABLE 5V AND 12V (W3) 1
15 36005763 1 400–PL3 GENERATOR CPU BOARD V1–45 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–19
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–9
300–GENERATOR POWER PLATE 45440269
8 20
19 10 21
20 18 11 22
300–PL1
17
15
16
300–PL2
D1 D2 D3
A
300–PL3
6 6 5 7 12 13 14 9 21 25 5 2 4
10 300–PL1 26 6 300–PL2 300–PL3
11 27 7
B
1
RENEWAL PARTS
23 23 22 24 B A
6–20
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–9
300–GENERATOR POWER PLATE 45440269
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 300–GENERATOR POWER PLATE PL
1 45440270 1 S GENERATOR CAPACITOR UNIT 1

2 45553694 1 Y S 300–PL2 ANODE STARTER BOARD 1
– 3 36003868 S STARTER POWER SUPPLY SECURITY ASSY 1

4 36004634 1 S S 300–PL3 ANODE STARTER SECURITY BOARD 1

6 N S WASHER Z5 N PASS SST 12
8 58079252 1 S THERMOSTAT 55/45ºC 1
9 58079253 1 S THERMOSTAT 40/30ºC 1
12 58079525 1 S DIODE MODULE DD31N 1.4KV 60A ULL (D1) 1
17 58079220 1 S THYRISTOR (TH1) 1
18 58079220 1 S THYRISTOR (TH2) 1
21 45439388 1 S 300–PL1 INVERTER BOARD 1
23 N S WASHER Z5 N PASS SST 14
25 45066952 1 S FILTERING INDUCTOR 2X125 UH 5% 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–21
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–10
GENERATOR CABLE ASSEMBLY SET 45441072
2
4
5
6
1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–22
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–10
GENERATOR CABLE ASSEMBLY SET 45441072
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N GENERATOR CABLE ASSEMBLY SET PL
1 45474577 1 S HEATER & BIASING CABLE (WG2) 1

2 C801418 1 S STD FLAT CABLE HE10 40–COND L=0.5M (WG3) 1
3 45474701 1 S 250V DISTRIBUTION CABLE (WG4) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–23
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–11
100–CONSOLE CDRH 45561630
9 A 11
12
10
8
3
100–PL1
8 7 2
100–PL2
A B
RENEWAL PARTS
6–24
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–11
100–CONSOLE CDRH 45561630
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 45561630 1 Y 100–CONSOLE CDRH PL
– 1 N S CONSOLE
2 45561530 1 Y S S 100–PL2 CONSOLE CONTROL BOARD 1
3 45474413 1 Y S S 100–PL1 OPERATOR BOARD 1

– 4 45474388 1 S S S CABLE (CONSOLE–A40) 1
– 5 45474389 1 S S S CABLE (CONSOLE–A16) 1
6 91717079 1 S S S 2–LINE FLUORESCENT READOUT 1
7 2102661 1 S S S VACUUM FLUORESCENT DISPLAY MODULE 1
8 N S S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 5

9 45561941 1 S S CONSOLE COVER ASSEMBLY 1
10 N S S SHOULDERED WASHER 2
11 45474409 2 S S BUTTON 2
12 N S S HEX SKT HDLS SCREW FLAT END M3X6/6 PASS SST 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–25
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–12
SET OF COVERS 45560678 – COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE 45560702
2 1
11
5 6
3 4
RENEWAL PARTS
12
13 7 8
10
6–26
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–12
SET OF COVERS 45560678 – COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE 45560702
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N SET OF COVERS PL
1 45560679 1 S TUBE HOUSING SPACER COVER LABELED (RIGHT) 1

2 45560680 1 S TUBE HOUSING SPACER COVER LABELED (LEFT) 1
3 45560683 1 S LEFT REAR COVER LABELED 1
4 45560684 1 S RIGHT REAR COVER LABELED 1
5 45559653 1 S HALF LEFT COVER, COMPRESSION 1
6 45559654 1 S HALF RIGHT COVER, COMPRESSION 1
7 45559550 1 S LEFT COVER, COLUMN 1
8 45559551 1 S RIGHT COVER, COLUMN 1
9 45438593 1 S GENERATOR TOP COVER 1
10 45438606 2 S KICKPLATE 1
11 45554462 1 S SILK–SCREENED FRONT PLATE 1
12 45560688 1 S COVER PLATE 1
13 45560693 1 S PDD AND STEREOTIX 2 CONNECTOR COVER ASSEMBLED 1
– 45560702 1 COVERS MOUNTING HARDWARE PL
– 14 N S CROSS–TIP SCREW M4X16/16 PASS SST 12

– 15 N S LRG RAISED RND HD SCREW M4X10 PASS SST 10
– 16 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X50/16 BLACK STL 2
– 17 N S CAPTIVE NUT M4 THK=1.2/1.6 STL 8
– 18 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 SST 8
RENEWAL PARTS
6–27
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–13
800–GANTRY 36005747
7
8
2 6
RENEWAL PARTS
6–28
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–13
800–GANTRY 36005747
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 800–GANTRY PL
1 N S COLUMN UNIT (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–14) 1

2 N S ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–16) 1
3 N S HEX SCREW M4X10 SST 4
4 36005259 1 S READOUT UNIT (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–17) 1
5 N S SET OF CABLES, GANTRY (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–18) 1
6 N S MAIN HARNESS (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–19) 1
7 N S EXAMINATION ARM (SEE ILLUSTRATIONS 6–20 THRU 6–23) 1
8 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M10X25/25 BLACK STL 4
RENEWAL PARTS
6–29
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–14
800–COLUMN UNIT 45559482
A B
24
A
4 24
5
6
2
3
B 19
800–PL13
7 17 20
8 25
26
21
22
23
RENEWAL PARTS
12
13
14 10
15 1 16 11 18
6–30
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–14
800–COLUMN UNIT 45559482
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 800–COLUMN UNIT PL
1 99142807 2 S BALL BEARING 15X32X9 1–ROW PROTECTED 1

2 91726743 2 S BALL BEARING 32X15X13 2–ROW SLANTING 1
3 N S INT CIRCLIP D=32 TYPE 80 2
4 N S TONGUE–LOCK WASHER M15 1
5 N S WASHER 20X15.2X2 2
6 N S SPANNER NUT M15X1 CAST STL 1
7 99146577 2 S BEARING 6X19X6 4
8 N S EXT CIRCLIP D=6 TYPE 81 4
9 91726753 1 S GAS SPRING 1
10 N S SHAFT 2
11 N S SHAFT PIN 4
12 N S TOOTH–PULLEY 40–TOOTH AL 1
13 N S DISK KEY 4X5X13 STL 1
16 91726709 1 S BELT 73–TOOTH 1
17 N S CLAMP 1
18 99091203 1 S CAPACITOR AL 33000 mF–10/+50% 63V SCREW 1
19 45554409 1 S 800–PL13 ENCODER BOARD 1
21 45554615 1 S ENCODER SUPPORT GLUED 1
22 N S HEX SKT HDLS SCREW CUP END M3X5/5 PASS SST 1
23 N S SET OF CABLES, COLUMN (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–15) 1
24 N S PROTECTIVE CAP D=31.8/35.8 H=8.5MM 1
26 N S FLAT WASHER M4N PASS SST 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–31
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–15
SET OF CABLES, COLUMN 45560239
2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–32
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–15
SET OF CABLES, COLUMN 45560239
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N SET OF CABLES, COLUMN PL
1 45553517 1 S MOTOR WIRED (ELEVATOR) W27 1

2 45553524 1 S CABLE (ELEVATOR ENCODER) W34 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–33
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–16
800–ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS 2102287
2 1
800 PL–3 800 PL–4
5
800 PL–2
6 7
8
800 PL–1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–34
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–16
800–ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS 2102287
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 800–ASSEMBLED GANTRY BOARDS PL
1 2100282 1 Y S 800–PL4 PHOTOCELL BOARD 1
2 2274828–5 1 S 800–PL3 GANTRY CPU BOARD V6.21 PROGRAMMED

– 3 N S S CPU BOARD 1
– 4 99171545 2 S S S JUMPER, RED PITCH 2.54 1
BT1 99171019 1 S S S LITHIUM BATTERY 850MA/H 1
5 36004749 1 Y S 800–PL2 GANTRY INTERFACE BOARD 1

6 45553502 1 S CABLE (PL1/PL2–1) 1
7 45553503 1 S CABLE (PL1/PL2–2) 1
8 2100224–2 1 Y S 800–PL1 GANTRY POWER BOARD 1

F1 58079627 1 S S FUSE 6X32 2.0A 250V ULL 1
F2 58079627 1 S S FUSE 6X32 2.0A 250V ULL 1
F3 99194288 1 S S FUSE 6X32 3.15A 250V ULL 1
F4 99194288 1 S S FUSE 6X32 3.15A 250V ULL 1
F5 99194288 1 S S FUSE 6X32 3.15A 250V ULL 1
F6 99194288 1 S S FUSE 6X32 3.15A 250V ULL 1
F7 99184975 1 S S FUSE 6X32 12.5A 250V ULL 1
F8 99183979 1 S S FUSE 6X32 10A 250V ULL 1
F9 58079626 1 S S FUSE 6X32 10A 250V ULL 1
F10 58079688 1 S S FUSE 6X32 8A 250V ULL 1
F11 58079686 1 S S FUSE 6X32 1.0A 250V ULL 1
9 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M3X6/6 SST 13
RENEWAL PARTS
6–35
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–17
800–READOUT UNIT 36005259
2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–36
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–17
800–READOUT UNIT 36005259
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 36005259 1 800–READOUT UNIT PL
1 N S 800–PL2 GANTRY READOUT BOARD 1

2 45441931 1 S CABLE (READOUT) 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–37
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–18
800–SET OF CABLES, GANTRY 45560263
V1
V2
4
RENEWAL PARTS
6–38
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–18
800–SET OF CABLES, GANTRY 45560263
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 800–SET OF CABLES, GANTRY PL
1 45553520 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER ( ELEVATOR AT LOW) 1

2 45553521 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (ELEVATOR AT HIGH) 1
– 3 N S CABLE (EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON) W33A 1

4 45067225 1 S S EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON D=30 RED 1
– 5 N S CABLE (EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON) W 33B 1

6 45067225 1 S S EMERGENCY STOP BUTTON D=30 RED 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–39
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–19
800–MAIN HARNESS 45560261
10 B
7 5 4
W10 W8 W7
8
W59
9 6
W60 W9
2
1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–40
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–19
800–MAIN HARNESS 45560261
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 800–MAIN HARNESS PL
1 45475034 1 S 4–PIN HV CABLE ASSEMBLY 1

2 C133902 1 S S GASKET 2
– 3 45560262 1 S SET OF CABLES, MAIN HARNESS 1

4 45553497 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (GEN–TRANSMIT CONNECTION) (W7) 1
5 45553498 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (GEN–RECEPT CONNECTION) (W8) 1
6 45553499 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (GRID SYNC) (W9) 1
7 45553500 1 S S OPTICAL FIBER (SEND PM) (W10) 1
8 45067456 1 S S DOUBLE FOOTSWITCH (W59) 1
9 45067456 1 S S DOUBLE FOOTSWITCH (W60) 1
10 91663932 1 S ZIPPERED CABLE SHEATH WHITE D=35MM AR
RENEWAL PARTS
6–41
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–20
800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086
2
3
4
5
11
12
13
14
6
7
8
9
15
16
17
18
19
RENEWAL PARTS
6–42
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–20
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N 800–EXAMINATION ARM PL
1 N S TUBE HOUSING SPACER (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–24) 1

3 N S WASHER M10 N PASS SST 2
4 45560085 2 S PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–28) 1

5 N S S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X20/20 PASS SST 4
6 N S ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–29) 1

7 N S S WASHER WITH CONVEX FACE 5.2X10.5X2 BRUNISHED STL 2
8 N S S WASHER WITH CONCAVE FACE 6X10.5X2.1 BRUNISHED STL 2
– 10 N S SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–30) 1

11 1 S SET OF HANDLES (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–31) 1
13 N S HDLS SCREW M4X6 BLACK STL CUP END 2
15 45554608 2 S IMAGE RECEPTOR (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–26) 1

17 N S S WASHER WITH CONVEX FACE 5.2X10.5X2 BRUNED STL 4
18 N S S WASHER WITH CONCAVE FACE 6X10.5X2.1 BRUNED STL 4
19 36005180 1 Y IMAGE RECEPTOR WITHOUT PHOTOCELL 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–43
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–21
A
20
21
22 C
C D
B
19
23 25
24
D
7 8 10 9 B
26
1 11
12
13
5 3 6 4 14
RENEWAL PARTS
16
800–PL7
15
17
18
6–44
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–21
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N EXAMINATION ARM PL
1 45553532 1 S BRAKE WIRED (ROTATION) W42 1

3 N S SPACER 1
4 N S SPACER 1
5 91632919 2 S BALL BEARING 8X125X22 1–ROW PROTECTED 4
6 N S INT CIRCLIP D=125 TYPE 80 1
7 N S SLEEVE 1
9 N S CAP 1
10 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X15 BLACK STL 6
12 45554468 2 S LOCKING SECTOR 1
15 99069708 N S TAPPED SPACER M3X5 GALV STL 2
16 45475707 1 S 800–PL7 SID SENSOR BOARD 1
19 45554401 1 S EXAMINATION ARM ANGLE INDICATOR 1
20 45559710 1 S REAR HANDLE 1
23 45560283 2 S BOTTOM COVER LEADED 1
24 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 SST 4
25 45554528 1 S SPRING BLADE 1
26 36006659 1 KIT OF COMPRESSION BELT, RENEWAL PARTS 1

– N S BELT 49–TOOTH 1
– N S BELT COMPRESSION SUPPORT 1
– N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 4
– N S SHOULDERED RING D=6/8 L=8 1
– N S BELT FASTERNER 1
– N S BELT TENSIONER 1
– N S TENSION SPRING FOR COMPRESSION BELT 1
RENEWAL PARTS
– N S FLAT WASHER M4 U PASS SST 2

– N S HEX SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 1
– N S BELT CLAMPING PLATE 1
– N S FLSTR HD SCREW M2X4/4 SST 2
6–45
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–21
800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086 (Continued)
A
20
21
22 C
C D
B
19
23 25
24
D
7 8 10 9 B
26
1 11
12
13
5 3 6 4 14
RENEWAL PARTS
16
800–PL7
15
17
18
6–46
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–21
800–EXAMINATION ARM 45560086 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N S COMPRESSION BELT 1
– N S BENT PLATE 1
– N S FLAT WASHER Z4N PASS SST 2
– 27 1 BRAKE ADJUSTMENT TOOL 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–47
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–22
9
800–PL5
10
11
A
C
15 16
D
14
B
8 3 1
800–PL11 4 2
5 13 12
RENEWAL PARTS
6 13
7
12
6–48
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–22
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5

2 N S HDLS SCREW M3X3 BLACK STL FLAT END 1
3 N S TAPPED SPACER M3X5 GALV STL 2
9 45559853 1 S 800–PL5 COMPRESSION ARM DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1
12 45561758 2 S SID HANDLE 2
13 1 S AXIS 2
14 45559850 1 S CONTROL AXIS 1
15 36005971 1 S LEFT CASTING 1
16 45554436 1 S RIGHT CASTING 1
B SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–23

RENEWAL PARTS
C SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–23
D SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–23
6–49
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–23
5 2 3 1
C D
9
800–PL15
10
11
7
800–PL14
RENEWAL PARTS
6–50
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–23
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
1 N S PIN 1
2 N S OFF–CENTERED SHAFT 1
5 99146577 1 S BALL BEARING 6X19X6 2
6 N S SPACER 2
7 45553870 1 S 800–PL14 MAGNIFICATION SENSOR BOARD 1
9 45554408 1 S 800–PL15 INTER ARM TILT SENSOR BOARD 1
10 N S SPACER 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–51
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–24
TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2101067
A B
35
37
10
38
35
36
28
33
800–PL6
29
A 4 30
31
6 32
4
7
3 8
9
11
12
13
B
C 1
21 22
20 24
25
5
RENEWAL PARTS
16 26
17
27 14 15 23
18
19
6–52
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–24
TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2101067
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N TUBE HOUSING SPACER PL
1 45067212 1 S X–RAY TUBE ROTATION SCREW 1

2 N S TAKE–UP PULLEY, X–RAY TUBE ROTATION 1
3 N S MOTOR PULLEY, X–RAY TUBE ROTATION 1
5 45554501 1 S ANTI–ROTATION PAD 1
6 91726679 2 S BELT 43–TOOTH 1
7 45554577 2 S ANTI–SCATTER SHIELD 1
9 N S HEX SCREW M4X6/6 PASS SST 2
10 45560092 1 S 3–FILTER WHEEL ASSEMBLY 1
11 N S TOOTH–LOCK WASHER EXT TTH M4 SST 2
13 N S HEX NUT M4 SST 2
14 45066644 1 S HALOGEN LAMP 12V 100W 1
15 45562593 2 S OPTICAL BOX 1
16 91718731 1 S PUSHBUTTON 22X32 1
17 91718732 1 S CAP 1
19 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M3X6 16 SST 2
20 45561662 1 S WIRED SOCKET (CENTERING LIGHT) 1
21 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M2.5X8/8 PASS SST 2
22 45560093 1 S FIXED MIRROR 1
23 45561636 1 S COLLIMATOR CDRH 1
24 N S LOCK SHAFT 1
25 N S PIN SHAFT WIRE D=0.9 4
26 36006853 1 S ANTI–SCATTER BOX 1
27 99116465 1 S LRG RAISED RND HD SCREW M4X10 PASS SST 1
28 45067305 1 S ROCKER SWITCH, 3–POS. 1
29 N S BUTTON MOUNT, WELDED 1
30 N S CAPTIVE NUT M4 THK=1.7/2.5 STL 4
33 2104795 1 S 800–PL6 TUBE HOUSING ARM DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1
– 34 N S SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–25 ) 1
RENEWAL PARTS

6–53
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–25
SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2109334
3
W49
1
W36
2
W48
4
W53
5
W56
RENEWAL PARTS
6
W75
W76
6–54
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–25
SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER 2109334
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N SET OF CABLES, TUBE HOUSING SPACER PL
1 45553526 1 S CABLE (TUBE HOUSING ARM BUTTON) (W36) 1

2 45553538 1 S FILTER MOTOR (W48) 1
3 45553539 1 S TUBE ANGULATION MOTOR (W49) 1
4 45553543 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (FILTERS POS) (W53) 1
5 45553546 1 S OPTOINTERRUPTER (TUBE HOUSING POS) (W56) 1
6 36006829 1 S FAN WIRED (X–RAY TUBE) (W75) (W76) 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–55
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–26
IMAGE RECEPTOR 45554608
A B 25
26
15 29 27
28
24
2
3
C
ÉÉ
B 16
É
11
800–PL10
21
13
14
C
35
1 4 5
6
9 32
30 10 7 13 33
31 12 18 17 8 14 34
22
23
RENEWAL PARTS
A
30
31
20
6–56
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–26
IMAGE RECEPTOR 45554608
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N IMAGE RECEPTOR PL
1 45067222 1 S BALL RACE 1

2 91389008 2 S BALL SPRING PUSHBUTTON M8 STL 1
4 2102432 1 Y S PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–27) 1
6 N S FLAT WASHER M3 N STL 2
8 N S FLAT WASHER Z3 U STL 2
9 N S HEX SCREW M3X16/16 PASS SST 2
11 36006656 1 S 800–PL10 IMAGE RECEPTOR BOARD 1
12 N S FORK 1
15 45067349 1 S ROLLER MICROSWITCH 1–POS 1
16 36002774 1 S PIN 1
17 36002238 1 S LEVER 1
18 N S HDLS SCREW M3X5 BLACK STL FLAT END 1
– 19 45560182 2 S SET OF CABLES, IMAGE RECEPTOR 1

20 45067194 1 S S ELECTRODYNAMIC MOTOR (W28)
21 45560236 2 S WELDED COVER 1

23 N S FLAT WASHER M4 U PASS SST 2
24 45560189 1 S MOBILE COVER 1
25 N S SPRING WASHER DYNA 8X4.2X0.3 STL 2
27 N S FLAT WASHER 8X4X0.8 PASS SST 4
28 N S FLAT WASHER M4 U NYLON 2
29 N S HEX NUT ”SNEP” H130 M4 SST 2
30 N S BALL SPRING PUSHBUTTON M12 SST 2
31 N S HEX NUT M12 GALV STL 2
32 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X25/22 PASS SST PL
RENEWAL PARTS
33 N S WASHER WITH CONVEX FACE 5.2X10.5X2 BRUNISHED STL PL

34 N S WASHER WITH CONCAVE FACE 6X10.5X2.1 BRUNISHED STL PL
35 N S FLAT WASHER Z3 U STL 2
6–57
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–27
PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY 2102432
1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–58
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–27
PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY 2102432
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 2102432 1 Y PHOTOCELL ASSEMBLY PL
1 45067100 1 S PHOTOMULTIPLIER 1
2 N S PLUG 1
3 N S STOPPER 1
– 4 56052519 1 CELL DISASSEMBLY TOOL 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–59
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–28
PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY 45560085
A
19
2 3 4 1 5 6
10
7 9 20
8
18
11
15 16
16 17
RENEWAL PARTS
800–PL9 800–PL8
13 12
14 14
6–60
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–28
PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY 45560085
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 45560085 2 PADDLE FASTENER ASSEMBLY PL
1 N S COMMAND SHAFT 1
2 N S SELF–LUBRICATING BUSHING D=6X10X6 BRONZE 4
3 N S WASHER ”BELLEVILLE” 12.5X6.2X0.5 STL 10
5 36005384 1 S COMMAND BUTTON 2
6 N S HEX SKT HDLS SCREW CUP END M3X8/8 PASS SST 2
9 N S PCB SUPPORT 1
11 91671876 2 S MAGNET D=4X20 1
12 45561125 2 S PADDLE FASTENER RIGHT COVER 1
13 45561126 2 S PADDLE FASTENER LEFT COVER 1
14 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 PASS SST 2
16 N S HEX SCREW M3X8 PASS SST 5
17 45554410 1 S 800–PL8 PADDLE BOARD 1
18 45553536 1 S CABLE (PADDLE FINE–MOVEMENT) 1
19 N S FLAT WASHER Z6 U GALV STL 4
RENEWAL PARTS
6–61
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–29
ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY 45560090
7 4 8 9
6 5 3 1 10
RENEWAL PARTS
6–62
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–29
ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY 45560090
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N ELECTROMAGNET MOUNT ASSEMBLY PL
1 45553531 1 S ELECTROMAGNET WIRED (LOCK) 1

3 45554473 2 S FORK JOINT 1
4 N S CYLINDRICAL SELF–LUBRICATING BUSHING BRONZE 1
5 N S COMPRESSION SPRING 1
6 45562514 1 S LOCKING PIN GLUED 1

7 91671876 2 S S MAGNET D=4X20 1
8 45554472 1 S FORK JOINT SHAFT 1

9 N S SMOOTH SELF–LOCKING RING 1
10 N S RUBBER WASHER 6X12X1 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–63
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–30
SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM 45560231
3
W39
1
W37
2
W38
6
W43
7
W44
8
W45
RENEWAL PARTS
9
W47
6–64
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–30
SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM 45560231
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N SET OF CABLES, COMPRESSION ARM PL
1 45553527 1 S CABLE (SID) W37 1

2 45553528 1 S CABLE (IMAGE RECEPTOR) W38 1
3 45553529 1 S WIRED MOTOR (COMPRESSION) W39 1
– 4 N S CABLE (ELEVATOR/ROTATION PUSHBUTTONS) W40 1

5 45067305 1 S S ROCKER SWITCH, 3–POS. 8
6 45553533 1 S CABLE (PADDLE SHIFT) W43 1

7 45553534 1 S CABLE (TILT) W44 1
8 45553535 1 S CABLE (MAGNIFICATION) W45 1
9 45553537 1 S CABLE (PADDLE POSITION ENCODER) W47 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–65
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–31
SET OF HANDLES 45475381
1 1
2 2
4 4
RENEWAL PARTS
3 3
6–66
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–31
SET OF HANDLES 45475381
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 1 SET OF HANDLES PL
1 N S SET OF FOUR SILK–SCREENED COVERS 1

2 N S TOP TUBE 2
3 N S BOTTOM TUBE 2
4 N S SCREW D=3X25 SST 8
RENEWAL PARTS
6–67
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–32
ACCESSORIES 45560675
3
4
5 24
6 25
29 31
30 32
9
13
8 16 10 12 26
14
21
17
28
RENEWAL PARTS
20
6–68
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–32
ACCESSORIES 45560675
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– – ACCESSORIES PL
– 1 36005696 1 Y S BUCKY 18X24 CDRH 1

– 2 N S S BUCKY 18X24 1
3 36006129 1 S S S CASSETTE HOLDING SPRING 1
4 2 S S S GRID CENTERING DEVICE 1
5 45067233 1 S S S PLATE 18X24 EQUIPPED 1
6 45067325 1 S S S ANTI–SCATTER GRID 18X24 1
– 7 45475428 1 S PADDLE 18X24 1

8 C808651 1 S S PLATE 18X24 MARKED 1
9 36003722 1 S S SLIDER 1
10 45475446 1 S CENTERED PADDLE (INJECTED) 1
– 11 45559489 1 S AUXILIARY PADDLE 1

12 C808649 1 S S AUXILIARY PLATE 1
13 36003722 1 S S SLIDER 1
14 45560513 2 S LINE SUPPLY CABLE 1

– 15 2 S EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT (SEE ILLUSTRATION 6–33) 1
16 36003928 1 S SHOULDER GUARD PACKED 1
17 2103708 2 S MANUAL FILM MARKING DEVICE 1
– 18 1 S MAGNIFICATION ASSY CDRH 1

– 19 36006471 N S S MAGNIFICATION UNIT 1
20 N S S S PLASTIC SHIELD 1
21 91671876 2 S S S MAGNET D=4X20 1
– 22 45561633 1 S CASSETTE HOLDER 18X24 CDRH 1

– 23 2102562 N S S CASSETTE HOLDER 18X24 1
24 36006129 1 S S S CASSETTE HOLDING SPRING 1
25 45554550 2 S S S GRID CENTERING DEVICE 1
26 45560632 1 S SERVICE TERMINALE CABLE 1
– 27 45560622 1 S SENOGRAPHE INSTALLATION KIT 1

RENEWAL PARTS
– 45562674 N S S JACK SCREW 4
6–69
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–32
ACCESSORIES 45560675 (Continued)
3
4
5 24
6 25
29 31
30 32
9
13
8 16 10 12 26
14
21
17
28
RENEWAL PARTS
20
6–70
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–32
ACCESSORIES 45560675 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– N S S JACK SUPPORT 4
– N S S COVER 7
– 45559940 1 S S PLASTIC COVER 30
– N S S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M10X80/80 BLACK STL 3
– N S S FLAT WASHER M10 N PASS SST 3
– N S S GRID ADJUSTMENT TOOL 1
– N S S WASHER 8
– N S S STABILIZER 4
– N S S EXPANSION BOLT M10 3
28 36003930 1 S CABLE ASSEMBLY L=5M PACKED 1
29 36005889 1 KIT OF 2 GRID SUPPORT 18X24 & 24X30 1

– N S GRID SUPPORT FOR 18X24 1
– N S GRID SUPPORT FOR 24X30 1
30 36006416 1 KIT OF 2 BUCKY CORNERS (SEE NOTE BELOW) 1

– N S RIGHT CORNER 1
– N S LEFT CORNER 1
– N S COVER 1
Note: Recommended glue for bucky plastic corners is: Loctite 406
RENEWAL PARTS
6–71
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–33
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 45560671
RENEWAL PARTS
6–72
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–33
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 45560671
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 45560671 2 EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT PL
– 45560707 N S TEST CABLE 64–C 1

– 45067305 N S ROCKER SWITCH, 3–POS 2
– 99098347 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X16X16 PASS SST 2
– 99116465 N S LRG RAISED RND HD SCREW M4X10 PASS SST 2
– 99131462 N S FLAT WASHER Z4 N PASS SST 2
– 99030316 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M5X50/16 BLACK STL 1

– 99107007 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M4X8/8 PASS SST 2
– 99107126 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X8/8 PASS SST 1
– 45559730 N S CAP 1
– 45559940 N S PLASTIC COVER 6
– 45560509 N S COVER 6
– 45066644 N S HALOGEN LAMP 12V 100W 1
– 58079627 N S FAST FUSE 6X32 2.0A 250V C 100A ULL 2
– 58079166 N S FAST FUSE 6X32 10A 380V C 10KA ULL 2

– 91684676 N S FAST FUSE 27X27 125A 150V AC ULR 1
– 99184154 N S FAST FUSE 27X60 35A 600V C 100 KA ULL 3
– 99194291 N S SLOW–BLOW FUSE 6X32 2.5A 250V C 100A ULL 3
– 99183931 N S SLOW–BLOW FUSE 6X32 3.2A 250V C 100A ULL 1
– 99183979 N S SLOW–BLOW FUSE 6X32 10A 250V C 200A ULL 2

– 45475294 N S LANGUAGE SLICK–ON LABEL KIT 1
– 99158195 N S CABLE TIE 4
– 45561528 N S TOOL BOX 1

– 45561829 N S TEST BOARD–64 1
– 36002607 N S GRID ADJUSTMENT TOOL 1
– 36002608 N S PIN 1
– 36002609 N S AXIS 1
RENEWAL PARTS
– 99060937 N S HEX SKT HD CAP SCREW M3X10/10 PASS SST 1

– 99077775 N S FLAT WASHER M3 N PASS SST 1
– 36002677 N S DUMMY BOARD 1
6–73
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–33
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 45560671 (Continued)
RENEWAL PARTS
6–74
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–33
EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE KIT 45560671 (Continued)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 91683324 N S SHUNT TUBE (FOR SINGLE PHASE) 1

– 99010569 N S FLAT WASHER Z3 U STL 1
– 91348401 N S CAPTIVE NUT M4 THK=1.2/1.6 STL 2
– 99111709 N S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X10/10 SST 2
RENEWAL PARTS
6–75
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–34
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
13
14
16
4 2
19
18
3
RENEWAL PARTS
6–76
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
ILLUSTRATION 6–34
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
– 1 45559844 1 S X–RAY SHIELD 1

2 45554827 2 S S PLEXIGLASS WINDOW FOR X–RAY SHIELD 1
3 36005901 1 S HANDSWITCH KIT 1

– N S S COMPONENTS FOR HANDSWITCH 1
4 46–270800G3 1 S S S HANDSWITCH ONLY 1
– N S S S END CAP 1
5 46–315241P1 1 S S S SPIRAL CABLE 1
– N S S STIRRUP 1
– N S S FLSTR HD SCREW N4–40 UNC L=1/4” SST 2
– N S S FLSTR HD SCREW M4X16/16 PASS SST 2
– N S S FLAT WASHER M4 U PASS SST 1
– N S S CABLE TIE 1
– N S S INSULATING SMOOTH SPACER 4.2X8X3 NYLON 2
– N S S DATA 36005901–104 HANDSWITCH DMR 1
6 N S SENOGRAPHE PATIENT CHAIR 1
– 7 N S ACCESSORY TROLLEY 1
8 45554823 1 S S ACCESSORY TROLLEY WHEEL 4
9 N S STEREOTIX CDRH 1
– 10 36005701 1 Y S BUCKY 24X30 CDRH 1

– 11 N S S BUCKY 24X30 1
– 12 N S S S BUCKY 24X30 SEMI–EQUIPPED 1
13 36006129 1 S S S S CASSETTE HOLDING SPRING
14 45554550 2 S S S S GRID CENTERING DEVICE 1
– 15 N S S PLATE 24X30 EQUIPPED
16 45067326 1 S S S ANTI–SCATTER GRID 34X30 1
– 17 45559733 1 S COMPRESSION PADDLE 24X30 1

18 C808650 1 S S PLATE 24X30 MARKED 1
19 36003722 1 S S SLIDER 1
RENEWAL PARTS
6–77
REV 0 sm 2308529–100
Blank page
RENEWAL PARTS
6–78
Technical
Publications
2308529–100
Revision 0
SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P)

sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 2001 by General Electric Co.

Senographe DMR SM

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Senographe DMR SM

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical

SENOGRAPHE DMR (V1_P)

CopyrightE 2001 GE Medical Systems

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

3 JOB CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

JOB CARD IST 021 – CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

4 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

5 SIGNAL LISTS/GLOSSARIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–I

6 RENEWAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–I

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION

1–1 through 1–46 0

2–1 through 2–4 0

3–1 through 3–294 0

4–1 through 4–20 0

5–i & 5–ii 0

5–1 through 5–54 0

6–i & 6–ii 0

6–1 through 6–78 0

1–1 Chapter Overview

1–2 Inspection for Damage

D See the Pre-installation Manual for a description of the delivered equipment.

3–2 Application and Installation modes

3–3 Description of the Console

application mode, press the SETUP key again.

mode, the SETUP key is pressed for the first time.

Menu access paths: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL OR SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

1. Press the SETUP key .

3. Select the sub–assembly to be installed (GENE or ARM for generator or gantry,

SMALL AUTO AUTO +0 A

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ GENE ARM

3–5 Installation Menu Tree Structure

Enter your password

tion steering step

WITH BEEP GEMS-E (Arm soft version) ARM (release date)

ue) END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP

THIS MENU IS THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRO-

Not used for DMR

installation steering step 13.–a. G

RE–INITIALIZING THE TUBE

s=(value) MAX EXPOSURE TIME T(s)=(value)

RESET TUBE ENERGY (Reset done)

TUBE CTubH WarmUp

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN

Job Card IST 002

FOCAL BIAS VOLT modif x=(value)

kV CALIBRATION mA MEASURE CALIBRATION meas=x mA

1st pt 2nd pt calcul MEASUR

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID

PARAMETERS DUPLICATION (fsc) (screen) –> (fsc) (screen)

/DAC PM/PM_HV calibration

PM/PM–HV calibration CHANGE

PM/PM_HV PARAM change x=(value)

STEREOTIX PARAM change x=(value)

STEREOTIX CELL calib calc

Card IST 006

Job Cards IST 014 and IST 019

REF ENERGY calculation for Stereotix 2 mode